Home

Paradyne JetFusion Integrated Access Device User's Manual

1. sssssss 156 Enabling and Disabling DHCP Server 156 Enabling and Disabling Checking for Additional DHCP Servers157 Configuring DHCP Server Parameters 157 Configuring the DHCP Address Range Pool ssss 158 2000 A2 GB20 10 V February 2004 Configuring a DHCP Client Entry seeesseess 158 Displaying DHCP Server Details sssssssssse 160 Displaying DHCP Server Statistics sss 161 Displaying DHCP Server Assigned and Unassigned Addresses161 Displaying DHCP Entry Details seseeseesssssss 162 Deleting a DHCP Client Entry esseeseeeeess 162 Deleting a DHCP Assign ment Entry ssssse 162 Chapter 10 Multicast Configuration Configuring Multicast cures ep ae Eee Lh E eoa neces 163 Enabling and Disabling Global IP Multicast 164 Configuring PIM Dense Mode by Port 164 Managing Multicast Route Source sseess 165 Adding a Multicast Routing Source ssssss 165 Removing a Multicast Routing Source 166 Displaying the Multicast Routing Source 166 Displaying the IGMP Group sseeeee
2. cccccccccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 193 Media Statistics Reports cccccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 205 Route Table RED GM ss uses teuer Eq Serp rs aor ace pee ergablnantebeae 217 ARP Table Bepoft ooo ipei ad etes hc a eee 217 Bridge Forwarding Database Report 217 Bridge Status Report ssssssssssseeeeen 218 PPP Authorization Entries Report sseeesssss 218 Syst m Uptime Repo cuoio epe purt as UP reg eps es adde E Exc reete gs 219 Memory Statistics Reports ccececcsscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Zero All Sta SCS ecce iaa icone 220 2000 A2 GB20 10 Chapter 13 Command Line Interface INtr d CtiON ae 221 set wan stp bridge xaxov tc oce e enel is 221 Command Line Interface Reference 223 ON aua e thee dieu Ue tice aay Fe ane ey Ore and ser Directe rri qve IURE 223 js 223 LEE ERAEN AE TE E cL Etapa Lb Pus 223 isisizingizdil eet ro PEUT RD EET 223 reset SY STO MMMM 224 Vii February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 remove lan Ip addtre5SS ie RR URL ER EPDUPURE RUE E A RE 224 Sep bridge global auci o oce dn ecce coe D Metecodecdes 224 Ser bridge stp global idee petra tene tetro di eve tute nerd 225 set dhcp server enable ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeees 225 set dhcp server gateway
3. Description active slot number IP address of packets sent to DHCP Clients IP address of the DNS server IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for host ID defines the entity that owns the IP address For example commengines com length of time to keep the Internet connection active maximum IP address to assign minimum IP address to assign client entry number name of the host IP address of outgoing interface IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for host ID length of time to keep the Internet connection active IP address of packets sent to destination IP address of the DNS server 160 February 2004 Displaying DHCP Server Sta tistics Displaying DHCP Server Assigned and Unas signed Addresses 2000 A2 GB20 10 When you re done viewing the information press any key to return to the menu Type S to display DHCP Server statistics The IAD displays the following information about the DHCP Server Table 9 2 DHCP Server Statistics Statistics plain bootp requests received plain bootp replys sent discover packets sent offer packets sent dhcp request packets received declines received releases received acks sent nacks sent requests for other servers protocol errors For the IAD to display this information you must attach DHCP Client devices that use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the IAD Type A to display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses or type U to display
4. Input Input packets are filtered after network address translation Output Output packets are filtered before network address translation The maximum number of filters is 128 Packets pass through the appropriate set of filters in the order in which the filters display in the list shown on the user interface Configure IP Router Configure IP Filtering gt Display all filters of the chosen type Each packet moves down the list of filters until it reaches the end or the attributes of an active filter match the packet When a match occurs the packet is then processed according to the action field Pass or Discard of the first filter that matched the packet Pass packet passed to the next level Discard packet discarded When output packets are dropped RTCS OK is returned from IP route When you create a new filter all fields are set to an inactive state An inactive filter passes all IP packets you must modify at least one field to narrow the range of packets to pass or change the action to discard all packets To create a set of filters to pass only certain types of packets you need to create a default filter that discards all packets and then insert narrower filters before the default filter For example you need to add a filter to cover each range of packets To select only the packet ranges to discard no default filter needed because the default action is to pass all packets You only add filte
5. Incorrect PVC DLCI set for voice channel IAD is improperly provisioned at the voice gateway Incorrect network provisioning Incorrect directory number at the Class 5 switch Corrective Action Ensure that the power cord is securely connected Ensure that the power cord is plugged into a live outlet Ensure that the power switch is on If powered by an adapter ensure that the correct adapter is used Ensure that an Ethernet cable is properly connected to the IAD and its upstream connection Verify these settings VPI 0 to 255 VCI 0 to 65535 DLCI 16 to 1023 default PVC 0 39 DLCI 33 Verify and correct provisioning of IAD as required Table 9 2 Check and correct network provisioning at DSLAM network switches etc Check and correct as required 244 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 14 1 Troubleshooting Symptoms and Causes Symptom Cannot receive or send data If IAD is configured as router If the IAD is configured as a bridge Probable Cause Incorrect PVC DLCI set for data channel Incorrect network setup Incorrect or missing LAN or WAN IP address Incorrect or missing default static route Incompatible RIPv1 incorrect bridging parameters Incorrect connection Missing peer or converter Corrective Action Verify these settings VPI 0 to 255 VCI 0 to 65535 DLCI 16 to 1023 default PVC 0 38 DLCI 32 View I
6. POTS Statistics Report Table 12 24 on page 215 BRI Statistics Report Table 12 25 on page 216 Clearing a Statistic Clearing Network Statistics on page 192 99999 99 2000 A2 GB20 10 205 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Frame Relay Statistics Report Type F to display the Frame Relay Statistics report This report displays basic about Frame Relay operations on the WAN link for all ports and DLCIs Table 12 18 Frame Relay Statistics Report Parameter Received Data Rx Frames Rx Bytes Rx Frames discarded DE set on Rx FECN set on Rx BECN set on Rx Rx congestion counter CLLM frames Rx LMI frames Rx ANSI frames Rx Transmitted Data Tx Frames Tx Bytes Tx Frames discarded DE set on Tx FECN set on Tx BECN set on Tx Description No of frames received No of total bytes received No of Frame Relay received packets discarded due to Received Frames are larger than size of PDU Received Frames Headers are smaller than the standard HDLC header size Validity of address bits settings in the HDLC header is incorrect Value of Checksum Field in header is incorrect The received DLCI number does not match the DLCI connections on the IAD Indicates Discard Eligibility is allowed on incoming frames based on congestion to maintain committed information rate Forward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initia
7. The IAD prompts for the name of the new file The IAD renames the file with the new file name When the operation is complete press any key to display the File System menu Deleting Files To permanently remove a file follow these steps 1 Type x on the File System menu The IAD prompts for the name of the file to delete Enter name of file to remove 2 Type the name of the file including the suffix and press Enter The IAD deletes the file When the operation is complete the IAD displays the File System menu CAUTION Deleting files is permanent and may render the IAD inoperative or unable to boot Formatting the File System Ant Reformatting the file system permanently removes all files in the IAD This command is reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers NOTE The Format File System command is reserved for use by Paradyne engineers Use of this command permanently erases every file in the IAD rendering it inoperative Displaying Free Space in the File System To display the amount of free space in the file system flash memory type S on the File System menu The IAD displays the free space Free disk space 338432 bytes 2000 A2 GB20 10 40 February 2004 Using the 2000 A2 GB20 10 The Debug menu contains commands to set various debugging options Debugging should only be enabled specifically during a debugging or monitoring session and disabled when the session is complete Enab
8. Type the committed burst size 11 The IAD displays the throughput prompt Enter the Circuit Throughput in bits second 2048000 Type the circuit throughput and press Enter 12 The IAD displays the excess burst prompt Enter the excess burst size Be in number of bits 8 Type the excess burst value and press Enter 13 The IAD displays the FR DLCI Options menu 14 Press Escape to return to the FR DLCI Config menu and continue Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation To configure FRF 12 fragmentation type 3 to display the End to End Fragmentation menu Figure 4 59 End to End Fragmentation Configuration Menu ck ck ck ockockockockckockckockck ck ckockck ok KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK kck ck ck ko ck kk End to End Fragmentation Configuration ck ckckckckckckckck ckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 1 Enable Disable End to End FRF 12 2 Set Fragment Size Type 1 to select End to End FRF 12 or type 2 to manually set the fragment size 15 If you type 1 the IAD displays the status and a prompt FRF 12 End to End Fragmentation is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable End to End fragmentation or type D to disable it 89 February 2004 Configuring Frame Relay Options 2000 A2 GB20 10 16 If you type 2 the IAD displays the fragment size prompt Enter maximum fragment size in bytes 100 1600 0 Type the fragment size in bytes
9. Type the option to select the proper SDSL speed 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting SDSL Speed Manually 1 Type 8 to set the SDSL speed manually 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter SDSL Data Rate kbps Type the rate 144 to 2320 kbps evenly divisible by 8 and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the following prompt Set Data to FRAMED mode Nokia Enter Y for framed mode or any other character if you are connecting to a DSLAM other than a Nokia DSLAM 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting SDSL Interface Mode 1 Type 9 to set the SDSL interface mode bit order 2 The IAD displays the current setting and a prompt SDSL Interface Mode Bit Order is currently Sign Magnitude Enter 1 to Magnitude Sign 2 to Sign Magnitude Type 1 to set interface mode to Magnitude Sign or type 2 to set interface mode to Sign Magnitude 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Configuring the SDSL Auto Cycle Speed Table 1 Type c to configure any of the 14 SDSL auto cycle speed table entries 2 The IAD prompts for an entry 63 February 2004 Configur ing the ADSL Inter face 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enter SDSL Auto Cycle Speed Entry to Configure 1 14 Type the value of the entry to configure 3 The IAD prompts for the data rate Enter SDSL Data Rate kbps Type
10. cssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 225 set dhcp server subnet ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 225 s tdhep Server NSi iarere eines a a Fed els Da iE 225 set dhcp server NEU OS os uuo ica pora porte Etes Futur tick see pus 225 set dhcp server domalrs auc re este de e Meee 225 set dhcp server TAN GS ices ccivecs een ein diei pre iei EO ecce 226 set dns server address sees 226 set ip default FOLIO ecce ud uon mero ce ene epe roa cu n 226 SOLID route ein DOR RO PRI Dp EE URS N 226 Ser dari DOGS nda dede i uh hu aie 227 SCAN OE Address cmendi TT 227 SB Tat FID our oin oru SA veu eUam M nne Doa Ears e ET Y 228 set lan stp bridge Meta IRL vd 228 set mgcp bracketing Mine EM AH 228 set mgep listening port nssessssssssssrrsrnnrnneeeeeeerrereeensssssnnnee 228 set tdep dhotlfied ehllbj edax eri prato ite rete Sprit prep eoe pta 229 set mgcp signaling connection eeeeseusss 229 set mgcp signaling DOELse iii rien Co P i qi Pr rr Eee 229 set mgcp signaling 08 5 Podere eb Lp tinet Leu erba 229 set mgcp voice connection eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 229 set MGCP VOICE 10S eterne ti raro ap LED LR FEE XE CER RAUS 230 SEU MAU do Sista scene ecce vt ub te take eh nee 230 SCESCSI SPOOC E 231 set system defaults ccs cmdline rbd nece FE ru 231 set wan atm ppp aulbruisuiceco iioc otv er rex ter ads eoe Eee 231 SGLANB BITE VO uae aaa aa a a
11. iia EE pe ipte ace 19 Connecting LAN WAN USI and Telephones 19 Ethernet LAN Connection eessssesseeeeeeeeeee 19 WAN ConnectionS sor posi ess Ded eara PAN eo rwn FRE EXE KRAVRSUN Ex 19 USI Connection 16 24 Port sueeeeesessssss 20 Telephone Connections eeeeeseessseeeeee 20 Confirming Proper Settlp iru atqiie be cie oda Fe FERE Ec u Te dap eaR 21 Chapter 3 Administration AD Securty ceo ico e teen eee cae en 23 RADIUS Server Settings sseeesseeessssssss 26 Setting Up SNMP eiat cut ee tien etree ernie ree ieee ree 28 Using the SNMP Configuration Menu 28 Upgrading the System enc orco o e teme dee 32 Setting up Your LAN Connection 34 Using System UHllllgs ecco roca decet e Se tens ea tahoe 35 Managing Configuration Files sseeeeesssesss 37 Using the File System eseeeeeeseeeseereee 39 Using the Debug Menl iib rt rna nahe checa 41 Performing File T FS BES ecce ting rie eate cb sat tri ner tea aae e 43 Using File Transfer Utilities 44 Setting Derived Timing Options ssssesesssesss 46 Verifying an IP Address eesseeeeseeessssssss 47 Verifying an IP Address for Windows Systems 47 Verifying the
12. network to transfer data along an optimum route to its destination 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling or Disabling STP Globally To enable or disable STP globally 1 On the Bridge Configuration menu type T to select Enable Disable Spanning Tree Globally The IAD displays the status of bridging and a prompt Spanning Tree is Globally DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable spanning tree globally or D to disable it globally 2 The IAD saves then displays the Bridge Configuration menu 3 Continue with other tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration Enabling or Disabling STP by Port To enable or disable STP by port 1 On the Bridge Configuration menu type o to select Enable Disable Spanning Tree by Port 2 The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port for which you want to enable STP 3 If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port 4 The IAD displays the status of this interface and port and a prompt Spanning tree over T1 E1 Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable STP on this port or D to disable it 5 The IAD saves then displays t
13. 2 The IAD displays the status and prompt Multicast Router is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable IP multicasting or type D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the new configuration and displays the Multicast Configuration menu 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 for changes to take effect You must enable Multicast Routing to send receive and route IP multicast packets Otherwise multicast packets are dropped automatically Type P to configure Protocol Independent Multicast PIM version dense mode by port and interface 1 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the interface 2 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the PIM status for this port and a prompt PIM DM over G2237 xDSL Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable PIM on this port or type D to disable it 4 The IAD saves the new configuration and displays the Multicast Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect 164 February 2004 Managing Multicast Route Source
14. 4 The IAD displays the FR DLCI Options menu Figure 4 58 Frame Relay DLCI Options Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck kk Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KK KKK KK Xx X FR DLCI Options KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ok ck ck ck ko ko Ck ck ck ko ck ock ck ko ko ck ko ko ko ko kx kx Current Encapsulation None 1 Configure Transmit CIR 2 Configure Receive CIR 3 Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation em NOTE To continue without configuring CIR or FRF 12 Fragmentation press Escape CIR is not required for bull bandwidth circuits Configuring Transmit CIR To set up Configure Transmit CIR type 1 to select Configure Transmit CIR 5 The IAD displays the Bc prompt Enter the committed burst size Bc in number of bits 0 Type the committed burst size 2000 A2 GB20 10 88 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 6 The IAD displays the throughput prompt Enter the Circuit Throughput in bits second 2048000 Type the circuit throughput and press Enter 7 The IAD displays the excess burst prompt Enter the excess burst size Be in number of bits 8 Type the excess burst value and press Enter 8 The IAD displays the FR DLCI Options menu 9 Press Escape to return to the FR DLCI Config menu and continue or proceed to the next section Configuring Receive CIR To set up Receive CIR type 2 to select Configure Receive CIR 10 The IAD displays the Bc prompt Enter the committed burst size Bc in number of bits 0
15. Enabling or Disabling Bridging by Port To enable or disable bridging by port 1 Type P on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Enable Disable Bridging by Port 2 The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort 121 February 2004 Setting the Bridge Aging Timer 2000 A2 GB20 10 10 11 12 Type the number of the port for which you want to enable bridging If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port The IAD displays the status of bridging on this interface and port and a prompt Bridging over T1 E1 Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable bridging on this port or D to disable it The IAD updates the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu Type v to confirm your changes or press Escape to cancel If you confirm the IAD saves the settings If bridging is enabled and an IP address is assigned on the WAN interface the IAD displays the IP Over Bridge prompt Both bridging and IP address are specified for this interface Currently IP over bridge is enabled Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable IP Over Bridge on the WAN port or D to disable it The IAD updates the configuration and displays the Brid
16. The IAD displays the IP interfaces on the port you re configuring IP interfaces on port 1 ID IPAddr IPMask Priority 0 91 1 8 255 255 255 0 NORMAL IP Over Bridge is enabled Enter the ID of the interface 0 7 to configure and press Enter The IAD displays the current IP address and prompts for a new one Enter new IP address for this interface 91 1 1 18 S Type the new IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompts for a new one Current subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Enter new subnet mask for this interface 255 255 255 255 gt Type the new subnet mask address and press Enter The IAD prompts you to determine traffic priority on this port Select priority Normal High N H N Do one of the following a Set the interface to high priority type H b Set the interface to normal priority type N 99 February 2004 Unconfig uring a Port IP Address 2000 A2 GB20 10 11 12 13 14 15 Configuration is complete The IAD displays the following prompt Save new IP Information gt Y Type Y to confirm your changes or press Escape to cancel If you confirm the IAD saves the settings If bridging is enabled and an IP address is assigned on the WAN interface the IAD displays the IP Over Bridge prompt Both bridging and IP address are specified for this interface Currently IP over bridge is enabled Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E
17. configuration Select quick configuration No Frame Relay Yes Define DLCIs Configure Define DLCIs Set ATM options maintenance protocol 0232 Yes Yes Define PVCs Configure Define PVCs ATM options Set maintenance protocol 2000 A2 GB20 10 49 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 2 T1 E1 WAN Configuration Flowchart T1 E1 Interface Set datalink protocol Set physical interface No Frame Relay Define DLCIs Define PVCs Configure ATM options Set maintenance protocol 50 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Identifying your WAN Interface and Datalink Protocol The sections you ll use to perform WAN configuration depend on the IAD model and the datalink protocol you choose Voice and data traffic are each carried in their own PVCs ATM protocol or DLCIs Frame Relay protocol You may define up to 8 PVCs or DLCls for voice and data For a voice circuit a single PVC or DLCI can carry the voice traffic for all voice ports on the IAD Voicepath configuration is described in a separate chapter Voice Path Configuration on page 127 To proceed identify your IAD and datalink protocol in the tables following and perform the listed tasks JF2004 ADSL with ATM ion Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 53 Configure ADSL page 64 Configure PVCs page 75 Configure ATM page 84 Configure the voice path page 127 oe qo cs J
18. 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 53 ATM PCR Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration XCkckckckckckck ck ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck OA A A A Ck Ck ko kok Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu 5 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish PVC configuration Deleting a PVC To delete a PVC 1 Type 3 to select Delete PVC 2 The IAD displays the port list and a prompt Type the port number to delete and press Enter 2000 A2 GB20 10 83 February 2004 Configuring ATM Options 2000 A2 GB20 10 To delete the PVC type v or cancel the deletion by typing any other character 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the PVC Configuration menu where you may continue with other PVC management tasks 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish PVC configuration Showing Current PVCs To display a list of current PVCs type 4 The IAD displays the port list with associate
19. Accelerated Alcatel and any af vmoa 0145 compliant gateway Softswitches MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 support Protocols Point to Point PPP 2000 A2 GB20 10 259 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Feature ATM Adaption Layers Encapsulation AAL2 Profiles Voice Data Security Voice QoS Data QoS Cell Delay Variation Buffer OAM Cell Handling Frame Relay Encapsulation Voice Data Data Link Format Data Link Control Data Internetworking Framing Table C 7 2 4 8 Port Transport Protocol Features Description AAL2 voice AAL5 data AAL5 layer 3 voice RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM RFC 2364 PPP over ATM ITU 366 2 AAL2 ATM 9 10 11 and ITU 1 Single AAL2 PVC Up to 8 AAL5 PVCs Software configurable payload scrambling CBR VBR rt CBR UBR Configurable 0 30 ms FAIF5 segment and end to end loopbacks RFC 1490 multiprotocol encapsulation over Frame Relay Single PVC 8 Data Link Identifiers DLCI Q 922 FRF 12 support adjustable jitter buffer FRF 5 FRF 8 support HDLC support Feature Upgrades Security Firewall Management Table C 8 2 4 8 Port Configuration and Management Features Description Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Telnet local and remote Multi level password protection IP Filtering SNMP 1 0 menu based configuration via Telnet local and remote console local 260 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 9 2
20. Adding a Multicast Routing Source 2000 A2 GB20 10 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks the IP address of the sender of the packet and then finds the best outgoing interface from its normal IP routing table Type S to add or change the Multicast Route Source The IAD displays the Multicast Routing Source menu Figure 10 2 Multicast Routing Source Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck kk KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck Multicast Routing Source Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck A Add a Multicast Routing Source R Remove a Multicast Routing Source S Show Multicast Routing Source Type A to add a Multicast Routing Source The IAD creates a multicast routing source and adds it to the Multicast Routing Source Table 1 The IAD displays the IP address prompt Enter IP address for the Source Type the source IP address and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompt Enter subnet mask for the source 255 255 255 0 gt Type the new subnet address and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the interface 4 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1
21. Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port for which you want to set the priority 3 If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation Ti 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port 4 The IAD displays a prompt Enter Priority for Slot 2 Port 1 0 255 Type the priority value and press Enter 5 The IAD updates the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu 6 Repeat these steps for each port on which you want to set the priority 7 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu 8 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration 124 February 2004 Configur ing Span ning Tree Hello Time Configur ing Span ning Tree Maximum Age Configur ing Span ning Tree Forward Delay Configur ing Span ning Tree Path Cost 2000 A2 GB20 10 To set the Spanning Tree hello time a value between 1 and 10 seconds default 2 follow these steps 1 2 Type H on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Hello Time The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Bridge Hello Time 1 10 2 Type the priority value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other config
22. CRC4 enabled Multi Frame CAS Multi Frame CAS CRC4 enabled enabled disabled Distance in feet 0 to 133 133 to 266 266 to 399 399 to 533 533 to 655 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB external internal 183 February 2004 Network Statistics Reports 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 1 Current Configuration Report Parameter HDB3 coding Payload Scrambling Port Sa4 Bit Sa5 Bit Sa6 Bit Sa7 Bit Sa8 Bit Rcv CIk Source PPP Auth Type WAN port Userid Password Peer Name DLCI Frame Relay Only VPI VCI ATM Only MTU IP Interfaces on Port ID IPAddr IPMask Priority Ethernet address Full duplex Description enabled disabled enabled disabled set cleared set cleared set cleared set cleared set cleared Internal External None PAP Client PAP Server CHAP Client CHAP Server PAP User ID PPP password PPP peer name RAW No Encapsulation Proprietary Voice DLCI RFC 1490 ATM RFC 1483 Tunneling AAL5 None AALO None Proprietary Voice RFC 1483 using VC Muxing RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoATM with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing AAL1 CES AAL2 LES maximum transmission unit per port host ID IP Addresses for the ID maximum 8 no of bits reserved for host ID max 8 NORMAL HIGH Ethernet address Ethernet Enabled Disabled Ethernet The Network Statistics menu
23. DHCP Server Unassigned Addresses The IAD displays the following information about the DHCP Server assigned addresses Table 9 3 DHCP Server Assigned Addresses Field Description IP IP address of the device assigned by the IAD Client ID Ethernet MAC address for the device Status How the IP address is assigned to the device via DHCP or manually For the IAD to display this information you must attach DHCP Client devices that use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the IAD 161 February 2004 Displaying DHCP Entry Details Deleting a DHCP Cli ent Entry Deleting a DHCP Assign ment Entry 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type D to display DHCP entry details The IAD displays the following information about the DHCP entries Table 9 4 DHCP Entry Details Value Description IP address IP address of the device Client ID Ethernet MAC address for the device Status how the IP address is assigned to the device via DHCP server or manually Subnet IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for host ID Gateway IP address of packets sent to destination DNS P address of the DNS server Lease length of time to keep the Internet connection active Type type of IP address static or dynamic Name name of the device For the IAD to display this information you must attach DHCP Client devices that use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the IAD Type x to delete a DHCP client entry 1 The IAD displays
24. Discarded transmitted packets due to other reasons such as lack of packet buffer Total octets bytes received from interface No of Unicast Packets received from interface No of Multicast Packets received from interface No of Broadcast Packets received from interface Total octets bytes sent from interface 2000 A2 GB20 10 195 February 2004 Table 12 9 Interface Statistics Report Parameter Description unicast sent No of Unicast Packets sent from interface multicast sent No of Multicast Packets sent from interface broadcast sent No of Broadcast Packets sent from interface 2000 A2 GB20 10 196 February 2004 Bridge Statistics Report To display the Bridge Statistics report type B on the Interface Statistics menu This report provides details about all packets sent and received on the IAD bridge Table 12 10 Bridge Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information bridge packets received Total of bridge packet received from interface bridge octects received Total bridge octets bytes received from interface discarded for lack of Discarded received packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory or packet buffers bridge packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of packet and discarded buffers or Spanning Tree packets arrived on an interface when Spanning Tree is not enabled bridge packets sent to one No of bridge packets sent to a proper low level other
25. Type I to enable or disable idle CAS refreshing You can only enable idle CAS refresh when CAS refresh is enabled immediately preceding Type E to enable Idle CAS refresh or D to disable Idle CAS refresh The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu and indicates in the message section that the change in the Idle CAS refresh will take place when the IAD is reset Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Changing the Maximum CPS SDU Size 1 2 3 Type s to switch the maximum CPS payload size between 45 and 64 octets The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a payload size message indicating 45 or 64 octets Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Setting the Combined Use Timer 1 2 3 Type T to modify the combined use timer in 5 ms increments The IAD displays this prompt New Combined Use timer period in 5ms increment Type the new timer period and press Enter The IAD updates the setting and displays the menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Enabling and Disabling User State Control 1 2 3 Type U to enable or disable user state control by toggling the state The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a USC message indicating that it is enabled or disabled Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configur
26. con iguranon opuons When you select Frame Relay the IAD displays the Frame Relay options on the WAN Configuration menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 53 February 2004 Setting Up TDM Voice 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 6 WAN Configuration Menu Frame Relay ck ckckckckckckckckckckck ckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk WAN Configuration Menu ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckockockockock ckck ck ck ck ck kck Configuring G2237 xDSL Configure Datalink Protocol Options 3 and 4 Configure Physical Interface display Frame Relay Configure DLCIs I configuration options Configure FR Options g P PUNE 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish WAN configuration TDM Voice allows you to set up data and voice circuits on channelized T1 circuits You may set up TDM Voice only or TDM Voice ATM or TDM Voice Frame Relay To set up TDM voice on channelized IADs Option E TDM Voice is displayed only on channelized IADs 1 On the WAN Configuration menu type 1 to select Configure Datalink Protocol 2 The IAD displays the WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration menu identifying the current datalink protocol just below the banner Figure 4 7 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckck ck kckck ck ckockockockck ck ck ckck ck ck ckck ckck ckck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KK KKK WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu KEK KKK KKK
27. loading 43 BRI 2 4 20 BRI Diagnostics menu 243 BRI Statistics report 216 Bridge Aging Timer setting 122 Bridge Configuration Menu 120 Bridge Configuration menu 120 Bridge Forwarding Database report 217 Bridge Statistics report 197 Bridge Status report 218 bridging bridge aging timer setting 122 configuration task flowchart 119 enabling and disabling 120 enabling or disabling by port 121 enabling or disabling globally 121 IP over 120 setup basic tasks of 119 Spanning Tree Bridge Priority setting 124 STP enabling 123 STP enabling by port 123 C CE mark xvi Channel Configuration menu 69 73 Cisco 258 supported DSLAM 258 CODEC testing 239 command line interface reference 223 command line interface generally 221 Compander Mode Selection menu 132 Compander Mode setting 132 Conexant 61 configuration files managing 37 configuration basic steps 19 Configure CPE CO Mode 58 Configure G SHDSL RATE Mode 58 Configure xDSL Interface Type 56 congestion parameters setting in FR 93 connecting systems 19 console port 4 7 setting baud rate February 2004 setting timeout period 36 contents described xi conventions described xiii Copper Mountain 2 5 258 Auto Sense in Quick Configuration 95 Auto Sense setting 61 Auto Sense setting in SDSL configuration 61 fragmentation setting 92 supported DSLAM 258 Copper Mountain CMCP setting in Frame Relay options 90 CopperCom 258 CopperCom Call Control menu 142 Copp
28. ssssessss 116 Chapter 6 Bridge Configuration Basic Bridge Setup TaSks 2 5 2 o Rara os to FL OE RISE 119 Bridge Configuration Menu seeeeeeeeeeeee 120 Enabling and Disabling Bridging 120 IP Over Bridging sesaran ei tese he eid 120 Enabling or Disabling Bridging Globally 121 Enabling or Disabling Bridging by Port 121 Setting the Bridge Aging Timer suse 122 Enabling and Disabling STP esssssss 123 Enabling or Disabling STP Globally 123 Enabling or Disabling STP by Port 123 Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Priority 124 Configuring Spanning Tree Port Priority 124 Configuring Spanning Tree Hello Time 125 Configuring Spanning Tree Maximum Age 125 Configuring Spanning Tree Forward Delay 125 Configuring Spanning Tree Path Cost sss 125 Deleting a Bridge Forwarding Database Entry 126 Chapter 7 Voice Path Configuration Basic Voice Path Setup Tasks cccccccccceceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 127 2000 A2 GB20 10 iv February 2004 Voice Path Configuration Menu seeeeeeeeeeeese 12
29. 162 displaying settings 160 enabling and disabling 156 setup tasks basic 155 statistics displaying 161 DHCP Server Configuration menu 156 Diagnostics menu 237 diagnostics generally 237 dialup test 238 239 DLCI adding 88 deleting 90 displaying current 90 FRF 12 Fragmentation configuring 89 modifying 87 Receive CIR configuring 89 Transmit CIR configuring 88 DLCI Statistics report 197 DLCIs configuring for Frame Relay generally 86 DNS cache and statistics displaying 107 DNS Client configuring 106 DNS Client menu 106 DNS Server IP address setting 106 timeout setting 106 DSLAMs supported 2 5 258 E E1 switching to 66 E1 Configuration menu 66 71 E1 Frame Mode menu 72 E1 interface configuring 71 echo cancellation setting 134 EIA 530 20 interface for USI 20 EmptyCells configuring 86 Encapsulation setting in PVC 78 setting proprietary voice 79 End to End Fragmentation Configuration menu 89 equipment list 254 error dumps displaying 42 ESF Frame Mode 67 Ethernet connecting to IAD 19 full duplex option 34 Ethernet MAC address setting 41 Ethernet port 4 6 setting IP address 12 Ethernet Statistics report 212 event log displaying 38 exit CLI command 223 F F4 OAM configuration displaying 86 F4 OAM Type Configuration menu 85 F4 OAM Type configuring 85 February 2004 F4 OAM VPI configuring 85 FCC Notice xiii fers 43 file copying 40 file directory displaying 39 file system formatting 40
30. 4 8 Port Security Features Feature Firewall NAT Management Security Authentication Description IP Filtering in and out RFC 1631 Port Translation exported services multiNAT up to 16 public IP addresses Multi level userID and password protection Radius client support RFC 2865 Table C 10 JF2008 JF2004i JF2104i and JF2104 8 Environmental and Physical Specifications Interface Power Supply Power Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Humidity Safety Emissions LEDs Physical Dimensions Weight Mounting Description External 120VAC 60 Hz or 220 240VAC 50 Hz JF2008 JF2104 8 9 W nominal 16 W maximum JF2004i JF2104i 16 W nominal 16 W max OC to 40C 10 C to 70C 526 9096 non condensing humidity UL 60950 Third Edition CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 95 EN 60950 2000 IEC 60950 1999 JF2008 JF2104 8 FCC Part 15 Class A EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 Voice WAN link LAN Rx LAN Tx Power LXWxH 211 8 X8 3 X 1 8 1 8 Ibs Stackable and wall mountable Table C 11 2 4 8 Port Network Interfaces 1 of 2 Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet xDSL ADSL IAD Description Shielded RJ 45 JF2100 JF2000 261 February 2004 16 24 Port 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 11 2 4 8 Port Network Interfaces 2 of 2 Interface SDSL T1 E1 Voice Ports IAD Description JF2304 2 Wire SDSL shielded RJ11 connector JF2308 Symmet
31. 9 configuration basic steps 19 2000 A2 GB20 10 274 connecting systems 19 connecting to a PC 10 installing 9 obtaining Return Material Authorization for 9 package components 9 powering up 10 providing password security for 23 reporting damage to 9 resetting 14 saving system settings 38 setting system defaults 37 System Utilities 35 troubleshooting 243 244 unpacking 9 upgrading system 30 verifying operation 247 verifying software version 33 IAD system updating 44 ICMP Statistics report 185 idle voltage mode setting 133 IGMP group displaying 166 IGMP querier displaying multicast IGMP querier displaying 167 IGMP Statistics report 186 IMAS 63 Industry Canada Notice xv Innovia 258 supported DSLAM 258 installing the IAD 9 Interface Statistics report 195 interface statistics reports 193 IP address configuring 98 unconfiguring 100 verifying on IAD 47 verifying on pc 47 IP filtering 154 configuring 109 filter parameters 112 filter deleting 115 filter details 114 filters deleting by type 115 filters displaying 111 filters editing 114 filters enabling or disabling 111 filters managing 112 setting a port for 110 statistics clearing 115 statistics displaying 115 IP Filtering Configuration menu 110 IP Header Compression configuring 116 IP Header Compression Statistics report 203 IP Over Bridging 120 IP Statistics report 188 IPCP IP Address Type menu 80 ISDN connecting to IAD 20 voice configuration menu f
32. 90 Displaying Current DLCIS esses 90 Configuring Frame Relay Options us acciaio rte be acto tiet 90 Quick GOonfIQubaliolis aeree ern rar c PUE GE ies 95 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Basic Router Setup TASKS 1 5 REEL oso EGRE eotuade 97 Router Configuration Menu eesseeeeeeeeeree 98 Configuring a Port IP AdUesS cu piii ilse tien Ere qubn erbe bR CR b xad 98 Unconfiguring a Port IP Address seeesssssss 100 Setting the Port Maximum Transmission Unit 101 Enabling and Disabling BIB iiem do cce i e etc 101 Enabling and Disabling RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port 101 Setting the RIP Version seeseeeeeeeeesseese 102 2000 A2 GB20 10 iii February 2004 Managing Static and Default Routes ss 103 Setting the Default Route esessseesseeeee 105 Configuring DNS Client eeseeeeeeseeeese 106 Configuring DACP Gent enero tete poe crt res 107 Configuring DHCP Relay centinaia nens 108 Configuring the Telnet Server Port ssssse 109 Configuring IP Filtering oan ee tc a cin eie Sa peb ates cete 109 Configuring IP Header Compression IPHC 116 Configuring the LAN IP Broadcast Destination 116 Displaying the Route Table
33. Alcatel Cisco Lucent Nortel CopperCom Paradyne Jetstream TdSoft Tollbridge BLES General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 MGCP 1 0 support Point to Point PPP ADSL Annex A B JF2004i WAN Port Standards Transport DSLAMs Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols RJ45 ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 ITU T G 992 2 G 992 1 ATM Cisco Coppermountain Novae Lucent Nokia CopperCom Paradyne Jetstream AAL2 LES PSAX TdSoft Zhone Tollbridge General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel and any af vmoa 0145 compliant gateway MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 MGCP 1 0 support Point to Point PPP G SHDSL TCPAM SDSL JF2104i JF2104 JF2108 WAN Port Standards Transport DSLAMs Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols RJ11 ITU T G 991 2 ATM Cisco Coppermountain Innovia Lucent Nokia CopperCom Paradyne Jetstream AAL2 LES PSAX TdSoft Zhone Tollbridge General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel and any af vmoa 0145 compliant gateway MCCP VO 1 NCS 1 0 MGCP 1 0 support Point to Point PPP SDSL JF2304 JF2308 WAN Port Line Rate Standards Transport RJ11 144 kbps to 2 3 mbps to 25 000 ft ITU T G 991 2 ATM I Frame Relay 258 February 2004 Table C 6 2 4 8 Port WAN Interface Features 2 of 2 Feature Description DSLAMs Cisco Coppermountain Innovia Lucent Nokia Voice Gateways CopperCom Paradyne AAL2 LES PSAX TdSoft Zhone Tollbridge General Bandwidth
34. Configuration menu Figure 3 5 LAN Configuration Menu ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckck ckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck kk LAN Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK Ck CA Ck kA CA A kA kA X Xx X 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex Auto Negotiate the Speed Full Duplex Auto Negotiate the Speed Half Duplex Auto Negotiate Speed amp Full Half Duplex Mode Display MII amp FEC Registers ooN oca 4 CO PO ES Selecting the Connection If more than one connection is defined the IAD prompts you to specify the port number Type the number of the port select enable or disable and press Enter Establishing LAN Speed and Duplex Mode 1 Type the option number of the speed and duplex mode 2 The IAD saves the configuration Press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect NOTE Full duplex Ethernet operation is controlled by the switch If the switch is set to full duplex you may enable it in the IAD If you enable full duplex Ethernet in the IAD when the switch is operating in normal half duplex mode your IAD will not communicate on the LAN int You can display the current LAN settings using the Display Current Configuration command in the Reports menu page 182 2000 A2 GB20 10 34 February 2004 Using Sys
35. Configure NAT Alias Entry Display NAT Statistics Display NAT Connection Table Display NAT Connection Details Display NAT Local Server Table Delete IP Address from NAT Tables Delete NAT Local Server Entry Delete NAT Alias Entry P VoicePath Configure norcsc Set Voice Gateway Set Jitter Delay Display Jitter Delay Set Start Mode Loop Start Ground Start Set SLIC Control Mode Set Compander Mode u Law A Law Set On Hook Transmission Mode of Ground Start Lines Set Idle Voltage Mode of Ground Start Lines M Set Debug Mode Configure Echo Cancellation Default Settings Set Loop Gain Set Country Mode February 2004 Country Codes Tables B Country Codes values are set automatically This appendix specifies the settings for each country code setting supported by the IAD When you select a specific country mode the Table B 1 Country Code Settings USA Australia 1 and 2 and Germany Parameters Min Flash Hook ms Max Flash Hook ms Ring Frequency Hz Receive Gain dB Transmit Gain dB Ref Input Impedance Ohms Load Impedance Ohms USA 300 1550 20 Australia1 40 140 25 0 7 200 820 120nF 200 820 120nF Australia2 40 140 25 0 7 600 600 Germany 90 130 25 0 7 220 820 115nF 220 820 115nF Table B 2 Country Code Settings France ETSI United Kingdo
36. DHCP Server Proceed to Step 1 in the next section When the IAD boots the internal DHCP server may be configured to check for additional DHCP servers on the LAN and disable IAD based DHCP service To enable or disable checking for external DHCP servers 1 Type p to select Enable Disable Checking for Additional DHCP Servers 2 The IAD displays this prompt Checking for additional DHCP Servers is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable checking or D to disable checking Proceed to Step 1 in the next section To configure DHCP Server parameters type 1 on the DHCP Server Configuration menu or continue from the previous section 1 The IAD displays the gateway address and prompt Current Gateway address 0 0 0 0 Enter new Gateway IP address Type the IP address of the gateway and press Enter If there is no gateway available type the address of the Ethernet port 2 The IAD displays the current DNS Server address and a prompt Current DNS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255 to use the DNS Server assigned from another port Enter new DNS Server IP address Type the new DNS Server address or type 255 255 255 255 to use a DNS Server assigned from another port Press Enter to continue 3 The IAD displays the current NetBIOS Server address and prompt Current NetBIOS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NetBIOS Server IP address 4 Type the IP address of the new NetBIOS Server and press Ent
37. F to select Add Change the Default Route The IAD prompts for the default gateway address You may press 0 for a list of interfaces Enter Default Gateway address or 0 to pick an Interface Type the default gateway address and proceed to step 3 Or Type 0 to display the port table Select default IP interface Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to select and press Enter The default route is set and the Route Table is updated Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration Removing the Default Route To remove the default route from the Route Table 1 2 On the Router Modification menu type T to select Remove the Default Route The default route is immediately deleted and the Route Table is updated Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration 105 February 2004 Configur ing DNS Client 2000 A2 GB20 10 DNS Client allows the IAD to use fully qualified domain names for example www paradyne com To configure the IAD as a DNS Client type N on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the DNS Client menu
38. Figure 5 4 DNS Client Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckockckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck DNS Client Menu ck ckckckckck ck ckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk Ck Ck Ck Ck KKK CA kA kA A kA A Ax X X A Set DNS Server IP Address T Set DNS Server Timeout S Display DNS Cache and Statistics The tasks in this section originate at the DNS Client menu Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the corresponding section Setting the DNS Server IP Address To set the IP address of the DNS Server 1 On the DNS Client menu type A to select Set DNS Server IP Address 2 The IAD displays the current address and a prompt Current DNS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new DNS Server IP address Type the new DNS server address and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the configuration and displays the DNS Client menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration Setting the DNS Server Timeout To set the DNS Server Timeout 1 Onthe DNS Client menu type T to select Set DNS Server Timeout 2 The IAD displays the prompt and current value Enter DNS Server Timeout in seconds 5 20 5 Type the new timeout value default 5 and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the configuration and displays the DNS Client menu 4 Continue with other con
39. IAD and power it back on forcing it to reboot CAUTION Rebooting the IAD terminates all telephone calls in process and data sessions in process Ensure that there are no services being rendered before you reset the IAD Description Removes the LAN IP address If you do not enter any optional parameters the IAD locates and removes the first available slot interface port and connection remove lan ip address IP address netmask slot interface port connection IP address IP address to remove in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 connection Index of this IP address associated with the port 0 7 Description Enable or disables bridging globally set bridge global lt on off gt on off Keyword to enable on or disable off bridging globally 224 February 2004 set bridge stp global set dhcp server enable set dhcp server gateway set dhcp server subnet set dhcp server dns set dhcp server netbios set dhcp server domain 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Enables or disables Spanning Tree Protocol globally set bridge stp global on off on off Keyword to enable on or disable off STP globally Description Enables or disables DHCP server on the IAD set dhcp server enabl
40. IGMP Querier page 167 Displaying the Multicast Routing Table page 167 Displaying PIM Neighbor page 168 99999 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter int Configur Type M to display the Multicast Configuration menu ing Multi Figure 10 1 Multicast Configuration Menu cast ck ckckckckckckckckckck ckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck Multicast Configuration Menu Ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckckckockckock ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA A KA AG KB MX Enable Disable Global IP Multicasting Config PIM Dense Mode by Port Add Change Multicast Route Source Show IGMP Group Show IGMP Querier Show Multicast Routing Table Show PIM Neighbor Zi mIO QU r jtl 2000 A2 GB20 10 163 February 2004 Enabling and Dis abling Glo bal IP Multicast Configur ing PIM Dense Mode by Port 2000 A2 GB20 10 The Multicast Configuration menu contains commands to configure IP Multicast Routing The IAD only displays the Multicast Configuration menu when DHCP Server is enabled and the IAD has been reset When you have completed multicast configuration reset the IAD for the changes to take effect To enable or disable global IP Multicasting follow these steps 1 Type E to select Enable Disable Global IP Multicasting
41. IP address IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets a static IP route set ip route IP Route netmask Gateway IP Address IP Route IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 Gateway IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 226 February 2004 set lan bridge set lan ip address 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Enables or disables bridging on a LAN port set lan bridge on off slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off bridging on the specified port IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 Description Sets the LAN IP address If you do not enter any optional parameters the IAD sets the address on the first available slot interface port and connection If connection is omitted the first is used set lan ip address IPaddress netmask slot interface port connection IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 connection Index of this IP address associa
42. IP filtering may significantly affect IAD performance To configure IP Filtering type F on the Router Configuration menu The 2000 A2 GB20 10 IAD displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 109 February 2004 Wi 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 5 6 IP Filtering Configuration Menu ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ock ko KKK ck Sk ko ck ck ko ko ck ck Sk ko ck ck ck ko ko ko ko ko kx MX Status IP Filtering Configuration Menu Messages KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE ck ck ck kk for IP Filtering Editing Unselected Port Input filters display P Choose port for IP filtering here F Globally enable disable input or output filters T Toggle input or output type filters to view edit D Display all filters of the chosen type I Insert new or buffered filter of chosen type A Append new or buffered filter to end of list E Edit a filter of the chosen type C Copy filter operations menu X Delete one filter of the chosen type Z Delete all filters of the chosen type S Show IP filtering statistics Y Clear IP filtering statistics NOTE Directly below the banner on the IP Filtering Configuration menu is a message line The IAD uses the message line to alert you that you are working with the input or output filters To toggle between them use option T Toggle input or output type filters to view edit Each of the tasks in this section originate at the IP Filtering Configuration menu Type the option for the
43. KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ckck ck ck ck ko kck Current Compander Mode u Law U u Law Mode A A Law Mode 1 Type the option of the Compander mode to set 2 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration NOTE If you are unsure which mode to use check with your telephone service provider Normally u Law is used in North America and a Law is used in Europe 132 February 2004 Set On Hook Transmis sion Mode Setting Idle Voltage Mode 2000 A2 GB20 10 To set On hook Transmission mode POTS only for groundstart lines type o to display the Ground Start OHT Mode Selection menu Figure 7 7 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection Menu XACkCkCck kcko kockokock kock kckckockock kock ckockckockockockckock ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck k kk Ground Start OHT Mode Selection XOACkCkCk kckockockockock kock kockckock ck ckck ckock ckockckockockocko ko kck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk On Hook Transmission for a Ground Start Line is DISABLED E ENABLE Ground Start On Hook Transmission D DISABLE Ground Start On Hook Transmission 1 Type E to enable onhook transmission mode or D to disable it The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to th
44. KKK KKK kockock ck kockock ck ko ckock ck ck k kk Channel Configuration Menu ck ck ck ockockockckokockockockockockockockok kockckocko ck ckockckock ck ckckck ck ck ko kk 1 Enable All Channels 2 Disable All Channels 3 Select Individual Channels 4 Select Channel Range xoxo OF Esc To Return To Previous menu KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK ck ck k ck k kk For each option proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling All Channels 1 Type 1 to enable all channels Type 2 to disable all channels 2 The IAD makes the change and resets the interface The menu and reset messages may conflict press any key to refresh the menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 73 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling or Disabling Specific Channels 1 5 6 Type 3 to enable or disable specific channels If all channels are disabled this option enables specific channels Conversely if all channels are enabled this option disables specific channels The IAD displays this prompt Select Channel to Enable Disable then press Enter For each channel type the number and press Enter When you have entered all channels to enable or disable press Enter The IAD makes the change and saves the configuration and displays the E1 Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish E1 configuration Selecting a Channel Range 1 2 4 5 6 Type 4
45. Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 25 5 TCP OH 0 65535 92 100 1 1 295 255 255 255 0 2000 A2 GB20 10 111 February 2004 Inserting Appending and Editing Filters To edit an existing filter add a new filter in a specific location in the filter table or append a filter to the bottom of the table follow these steps NOTE At any time during the creation or editing of a filter you can press Escape to abort the process The IAD displays the IP Filter Configuration menu and the filter table is unchanged m 1 Use the Toggle command option T to select input or output filters Next choose one of the following and proceed to step 2 A To edit an existing filter type E to select Edit a filter of the chosen type B To insert a new filter type I to select Insert a new or buffered filter of the chosen type C To append a new filter at the bottom type A to select Append a new or buffered filter of the chosen type 2 Follow the IAD messages to enter values for the following parameters Table 5 1 Filter Parameters Parameter Description Filter state Idle Active Filter action Pass Discard Filter protocol IP ICMP IGMP TCP UDP Filter Source IP Low Address IP address Filter Source IP High Address IP address Filter Source Port Low Port number Filter Source Port High Port number Filter Destination IP Low Address IP address Filter Destination IP High Address IP Address Filter Destination Port Low Port nu
46. Local Area Network Privately owned network connecting devices over a limited geographic area usually limited to an office or office complex Often connected to the Internet via IADs with firewall software to limit access to the LAN by authorized users May use TCP IP or one of several other protocols LMI Local Management Interface A set of the following enhancements to the basic Frame Relay specification Called LMT in ANSI terminology akeep alive mechanism that verifies that data is flowing amulti cast mechanism which provides the network server with its local DLCI and the multi cast DLCI Global addressing this gives DLCIs global rather than local significance in Frame Relay networks amechanism that provides an on going status report on the DLCIs known to the switch MAC Media Access Control Lower of the two sub layers of the data link layer defined by the IEEE MAC address Standardized data link layer address that is required for every port or device that connects to a LAN Other devices in the network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the network and to create and update routing tables and data structures MAC addresses are six bytes long and are IEEE controlled Also known as a hardware address a MAC layer address or a physical address MPEG Moving Pictures Expert Group Notified Entry IP address of the MGCP Call Agent controls the call setup and teardown for all call features under M
47. Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk SNMP Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck Ck Ck ck Ck Ck kCkCk kCk ck ck ck ck ck oko E Enable Disable SNMP via IP Enable Disable SNMP via EOC Enable SNMP via both IP and EOC Disable SNMP via both IP and EOC Configure System Contact Configure System Name Configure System Location Configure SNMP Community Configure SNMP Trap Host IP Address Enable Disable SNMP Traps via EOC Configure Restart Trap Max Delay Ocddudot Zz t g u p tu When you are done updating SNMP settings you must reset the IAD for the new settings to take effect NOTE The strings you enter in SNMP are not case sensitive Wi 2000 A2 GB20 10 28 February 2004 Enabling and Disabling SNMP via IP Type E to enable or disable SNMP via IP 1 The IAD displays the current status of SNMP and a prompt SNMP via IP is currently DISABLED To enable SNMP type E To disable SNMP type D 2 The IAD saves the configuration if changed Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Enabling and Disabling SNMP via EOC Type F to enable or disable SNMP via EOC 1 The IAD displays the current status of SNMP and a prompt SNMP via EOC is currently DISABLED To enable SNMP type E To disable SNMP type D 2 The IAD sav
48. Multicast Configuration on page 163 describes the steps to configure the IAD to perform Network Address Translation NAT Chapter 11 NAT Configuration on page 169 describes the steps required to configure the IAD to perform Network Address Translation NAT Chapter 12 IAD Reports on page 181 describes each report you can run Chapter 13 Command Line Interface on page 221 describes how to enter and exit CLI mode and how to use each command in the command line interface You may use these commands instead of using the corresponding commands in the menu interface Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics on page 236 shows you how to troubleshoot and diagnose your IAD configuration when abnormal symptoms occur in the voice or computer network Chapter 15 Verification on page 247 describes the steps you take to verify normal operation once you ve installed connected and configured the IAD It also covers maintenance and how to display the current configuration Appendix A Menu Map on page 250 provides a graphic view of the IAD menu interface illustrating its navigation and organization Appendix B Country Codes on page 252 lists the specifications for each country code supported in the IAD Appendix C JetFusion IAD Specifications on page 254 lists the specifications for each IAD Appendix D Connector Pinouts on page 265 provides interface pinout information for each type of port on the IADs You should read and u
49. RFC 2453 IPCP for IP Packet Processing Server Client RFC 2131 Relay Agent PPPoA PAP CHAP IPCP SNMP MIB1 MIB2 Enterprise MIB Console Telnet local remote EIA 530IRS449 V 35 DB25 Table C 14 16 24 Port WAN Features 1 of 2 Feature Interface WAN Standards Transport Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols ATM Adaption Layers Encapsulation AAL2 Profiles Voice Data Security Voice QoS Data QoS Description JF2216 JF2224 T1 UNI RJ45 JF2316 JF2324 SDSL 2B1Q RJ45 ITU T G 992 2 G 992 1 ATM I Frame Relay CopperCom Paradyne TdSoft Tollbridge BLES General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel Zhone Lucent MCCP VO 1 NCS 1 0 support Point to Point PPP AAL2 voice AAL5 data AAL5 layer 3 voice RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM RFC 2364 PPP over ATM ITU 366 2 AAL2 ATM 9 10 11 and ITU 1 Single AAL2 PVC Up to 8 AAL5 PVCs Software configurable payload scrambling CBR VBR rt CBR UBR 268 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 14 16 24 Port WAN Features 2 of 2 Feature Cell Delay Variation Buffer OAM Cell Handling Frame Relay Encapsulation Voice Data Data Link Format Data Link Control Data Internetworking Framing Description Configurable 0 30 ms FAIF5 segment and end to end loopbacks RFC 1490 multiprotocol encapsulation over frame relay Single PVC 8 Data Link Identifiers DLCI Q 922 FRF 12
50. TCP Statistics report 190 TDM Voice setting up channels for 54 TdSoft 258 telephone devices connecting to IAD 20 Telephones connecting 19 Telnet connecting 15 server port configuring 109 Telnet Server configuring port for 109 terminal emulator settings 11 terminal emulator connecting 10 TFTP to transfer files 43 used to upgrade 32 using to upgrade IAD system 32 tftp receive CLI Command 235 TFTP Server Menu 45 TFTP Servers LAN or WAN 32 timeout period setting 36 timeout default session setting 10 Tollbridge 258 trace route using 36 transmit and receive channels configuring for E1 73 transmit and receive channels configuring for T1 69 Transmit CIR configuring for DLCI 88 transmit clock source configuring for E1 74 Transmit Clock Source configuring for T1 70 troubleshooting generally 243 244 Tx Clock Source menu 74 U UART port 35 UDP Statistics report 192 UL statement xv u Law 132 Uninterruptible Power supply see UPS Universal Serial Interface 5 7 Universal Serial Interface port 20 Universal Serial Interface connecting 20 UPS 9 user ID changing 25 2000 A2 GB20 10 278 limits of 24 using with RADIUS Server 26 User IDs 11 USI connecting to IAD 20 module UART port 35 port pinouts 267 serial statistics report 207 setting up port 36 Utilities menu 32 Utilities menu 16 24 port 35 V V 35 5 7 20 interface for USI 20 setting for USI port 36 USI port pinouts 267 Voice Configuration menu 128 voi
51. a Phone Detect test 1 Type P on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Phone Detect Test 2 The IAD tests for the presence of a POTS device on each port and reports the status 3 Continue with other tests or press Escape twice to return to the Main menu Performing a Ring Test The ring test rings all voice port lines either simultaneously or individually in sequence To perform a ring test 1 Type R on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Ring Test 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Ring all lines YN or ESC y Type Y to test all lines or Type N to test a specific line The IAD prompts you for the port number 239 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 The IAD prompts you to perform the test sequentially or concurrently Ring lines concurrently or sequentially CS or ESC s Type S to perform the test sequentially or type C to perform the test concurrently The IAD displays information about the test progress Press a key to Ringing onhook Line 123 45 6 7 8 Line 123 45 top ringing all Ring test compl end ring test lines lines 6 7 8 ete Press any key to terminate the test The IAD displays the POTS Diagnostics menu Continue with other menu tests or press Escape twice to return to the Main 240 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Performing an On Off Hook Test The On Off Hook test reports the hook state of each voice port line To perform an On Off Hook t
52. access using a Security single user ID and password which you can set at the following levels User Network Administrator Supervisor The user ID at the User security level may be modified but the user ID at the Network Administrator and Supervisor level may not be modified The password for each security level may be changed Although you may use the same password for all security levels Paradyne recommends that you use a different one for each level Table 3 2 lists the privileges available at each security level Table 3 1 Security Level Privileges Security level Privileges Supervisor This user level is the highest level Users who log in as Supervisor have full access to all IAD features menu and command line interface including changing User security level user ID and any level passwords plus complete IAD configuration capability Network Administrator This user may perform tasks that alter the network settings of the IAD plus has access to all of the data networking configuration menus and can update routing and bridging information and status This user can change this level password and the User level user ID and password and has access to all display only menus This user may not modify WAN or LAN settings alter derived timing use command line interface or modify voicepath settings User This user has access to display only menus and may view the current configuration interface and media statis
53. adaptation layer CCS ELCP is defined by ETSI EN 300 LES CCS 432 1 and ETSI EN 300 347 1 ELCP When the voice gateway is specified as AAL2 LES CCS ELCP also known as V5 2 signaling type E on the Main menu to display the AAL2 LES CCS ELCP menu Figure 7 26 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Menu XACkCkCck kCcko kcko kocko kockokockockockock ck ck ckock ckockck ck ckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Menu XOACkCkCck kCckckocko kock kck kockck ckock ko ko kocko ck ckockockockock kockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk C Configuration D Debugging S Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Configuring for AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Type c to display the Manual Configuration menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 150 February 2004 Y 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 7 27 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Configuration Menu XA CckCcACkockockockockockcko kock kockckck ck ko kockock ck ckockock ck ko kockck ck ck k ck ck ck k ck k kk Configuration KEKE KK KKK KKK KKK ko ko ck ck KKK KKK ko ck ck ck ko ko ko ck ko ko ko ko ko Ak ko ko kx Xx Variant and Interface Management PSTN NPL Parameters Static CID Allocation User State Control Manual ATM Pace Control dur Configuring Variant Interface Management Type v to display the Variant Interface Management menu Figure 7 28 Variant Interface Management Menu ACckckCckockockockock kock kockockockck ckck kckckck ckckckck ck ck ck
54. and PS2 powering for ISDN phone 10 power consumption units pcu port Table C 4 2 4 8 Port Digital Voice Features Feature Description Compression G 711 64 kbps PCM G 726 32 kbps ADPCM Encoding A law u law Echo Cancellation G 168 compliant single reflector Fax Support Digital G3 G4 for JF2004i and JF2104i and analog V 17 V 29 with external adapter Protocol Support CopperCom ELCP af vmoa 0145 Paradyne LES af vmoa 0145 MGCP SIP capable Modem Support V 34 V 90 support Calling Features caller ID flash hook three way calling distinctive ringing stutter dial tone call forwarding call waiting 256 February 2004 Table C 5 2 4 8 Port Data Features Feature Description LAN Interface 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ45 Bridging IEEE 802 1d including spanning tree Routing Default Static RIP1 RFC 1058 RIP2 RFC 2453 IPCP for IP Packet Processing DHCP Server Client RFC 2131 Relay Agent PPP PPPoA PAP CHAP IPCP RFC 1332 HDLC Support Management SNMP RFC 1157 MIB1 MIB2 RFC 1213 AAL2 LES MIB Enterprise MIB Configuration Console Telnet local remote 2000 A2 GB20 10 257 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 6 2 4 8 Port WAN Interface Features 1 of 2 Feature Description ADSL G lite G dmt JF2004 WAN Port Standards Transport DSLAMs Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols RJ45 ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 ITU T G 992 2 G 992 1 ATM
55. and press Enter 17 The IAD displays the End to End Fragmentation Configuration menu Press Escape to return to the FR DLCI Config menu 18 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish DLCI configuration Deleting a DLCI To delete a DLCI 1 Onthe Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu type 3 to select Delete DLCI 2 The IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation Select Port 1 8 Type the port number corresponding to the DLCI you want to delete a To permanently remove the DLCI configuration type y b To cancel the operation type n 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish DLCI configuration Displaying Current DLCIs To display a list of the current DLCIs type 4 on the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu The IAD displays the port list Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation 4 Press any key to display the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu To configure Frame Relay options type 4 on the WAN Configuration menu The IAD displays the Frame Relay menu Figure 4 60 Frame Relay Options Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Frame Relay Options KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kockockock ck ckck ck ck ko ko kock Configure Fragmentation Configure Maintenance Protocol Configure Congestion Parameters Enable Disable Coppermountain CMCP BUNE To perform these tasks type
56. cells for transmit Internal cell buffer could not be allocated for transmitting cells Discarded Transmitted Cells because the connection is not established disconnected closed Discarded Received Cells because connection not established disconnected closed AALS5 only CRC 32 header checksum in is wrong No of SAR reassembly timeouts Frames could not be reassembling and discarded Frame size is larger than the max size of PDU 202 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 IP Header Compression Statistics Report This report is available when ATM PVC Encapsulation Type RFC 1483 is selected an IP address is assigned and IP Header Compression is enabled on the ATM Interface Table 12 16 IP Header Compression Statistics Report Parameter Missed TCP contexts Missed RTP context Sent Packet Information Compressed TCP packets sent Compressed UDP packets Sent Compressed RTP packets Sent FULL HEADER packets Sent CONTEXT STATE packets sent Description No of times search didn t find a TCP stream No of times search didn t find an RTP stream No of compressed TCP packets sent No of compressed UDP packets sent No of compressed RTP packets sent No of FULL_HEADER packets sent No of CONTEXT TATE packets sent Received Packet Information Compressed TCP packets received Compressed UDP packets received Compressed RTP packets received FULL_HEADER packets received CONTEXT_STA
57. ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Main Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk 1 Reports Menu 8 Configure Login 2000 A2 GB20 10 17 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Navigating the IAD Menu Interface Menus in the IAD configuration system are arranged hierarchically That is you select single key options to navigate down to display specialized menus and specific tasks and press the Escape key successively to return back to menus higher in the interface The specific menus submenus and commands that display depend on the interfaces for the specific IAD the options configured and the security level that you use to log in To select a menu item just type the option displayed to the left of the item Although character options are displayed in upper case the IAD accepts both upper and lower case options It is not necessary to press Enter after typing the selection to execute it the IAD immediately responds with a request for input or another menu for more options For a hierarchical map of the Main menu its menus and commands see Appendix A Menu Map on page 250 Entering Settings and Values When the IAD requests input for a setting or configuration value type it at the prompt Press the Enter key to terminate the input and proceed to the next step The IAD responds with error messages if a value is incorrect or it displays the
58. ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ko 1 Enable Disable FRF 12 2 Enable Automatic Fragment Sizing 3 Set Manual Fragment Size Type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling FRF 12 1 Type 1 to enable or disable FRF 12 The IAD displays the status and a prompt FRF 12 Fragmentation is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable End to End fragmentation or type D to disable it 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish Frame Relay configuration 91 February 2004 m 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling Automatic Fragment Sizing 1 Type 2 to enable automatic fragment sizing 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Setting the Fragment Size Manually 1 Type 3 to manually set fragment sizing The IAD displays the fragment size prompt Enter maximum fragment size in ms 0 50 or bytes 100 1600 0 Type the maximum fragment size and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish Frame Relay configuration CopperMountain Fragmentation Configuration NOTE With CMCP enabled the D
59. ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck T1 Configuration Menu ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA A KA KA KB MX Select Frame Mode D4 or ESF Select Transmit Line Build Out Select B8Z2S or AMI Configure Loopback Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Transmit Clock Source Change to El Mode 000 10 YU1 i PO S 2000 A2 GB20 10 65 February 2004 Configur ing the T1 Interface 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 23 E1 Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck oko E1 Configuration Menu KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck kk Select Frame CRC4 Mode Configure S Bits Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Clock Source Change to T1 Mode Display Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log U ONAHDU SE Switching from T1 to E1 If your IAD is set for T1 and it is being deployed in an E1 environment 1 Type 9 to switch from T1 to E1 2 The IAD displays this prompt T1 E1 mode is currently T1 Change T1 E1 mode to E1 Y yes Type Y to confirm 3 The IAD resets the interface and saves the configuration When the interface is reset the IAD displays the WAN Configuration menu Switching from E1 to T1 If your IAD is set for E1 and it is being d
60. current menu so you can continue with related tasks Using Default or Current Values The IAD displays a default or current value in parentheses immediately to the right of each message just to the left of the command prompt To accept this value just press the Enter key For example when the following message displays Enter a new subnet mask for this interface 255 255 255 0 You may press Enter to cause the IAD to set 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask value Using the Enter key to skip through default or current values often speeds the process of proceeding through a family of input steps to quickly get to the input step where you want to change a value 18 February 2004 Basic IAD Configur ation Connecting LAN WAN USI and Telephones int 2000 A2 GB20 10 Exiting the Menu Interface To exit the menu interface return to the Main menu using the Escape key and press Escape one more time The IAD asks you to confirm press Y to exit or press Return to accept the default value N to cancel the exit After exiting you can quit the terminal emulator or Telnet application If you made changes to the configuration that require resetting the IAD be sure to do so before exiting Each IAD has a default configuration when it is shipped from the factory At a minimum you should view the configuration and check the following settings for probable update for each customer installation 1 Configure the LAN IP a
61. current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter When DHCP is enabled it dynamically assigns an IP address to each device assigned to the DHCP server on the IAD You must identify the Ethernet Interface to correctly implement DHCP Server on your IAD You must complete at least these tasks to configure the DHCP server Enable DHCP default is disabled Configure the DHCP server parameters Configure the DHCP address range pool 155 February 2004 The DHCP Server Configur ation Menu m Using DHCP Debugging Messages Enabling and Dis abling DHCP Server 2000 A2 GB20 10 The DHCP Server commands are all displayed on the DHCP Server Configuration menu displayed by typing D on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are all described beginning at this menu Figure 9 1 DHCP Server Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckck ck ckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK DHCP Server Configuration Menu ck ck ckckckckckckckckckck ckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck Enable Disable DHCP Enable Disable Checking Additional DHCP Servers Enable Disable DHCP Debug Messages Configure DHCP Server Parameters Configure DHCP Address Range Pool Configure DHCP Client Entry Display DHCP Configuration Display DHCP Server Statistics Display DHCP Server Assigned Addres
62. factory use only 42 February 2004 Performing The File Transfer menu allows you to transfer groups of files to or from the File IAD To display the File Transfer menu type X on the Utilities menu Transfers Figure 3 10 File Transfer Menu KEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKEKKKKKK CK CK CK CK CK KKK KKK KKK KE KKK KKK ko ko kk File Transfer Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK C A KA KG KA A KA A KA ko ko ko ko ko kk Load Boot ROM Update ACOS acos bin Update Entire System File Transfer Utilities TFTP Server Menu Ho xMOtU To perform a specific task type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Loading a Boot ROM File Type B to download the Boot ROM to the file system on the IAD Figure 3 11 File Transfer Method Menu XCkckckckckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK E A A KA KA KR KR A KA Kk ko ko ko kk ok File Transfer Method Ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK C E A KG KA KA KR KR KA KA ko ko ko ko ko kk 1 Receive via TFTP 2 Receive via XMODEM 1 Type 1 to use TFTP or 2 to use XMODEM to transfer the file to the IAD If you select XMODEM proceed to step 4 2 The IAD displays the prompt for the IP address of the TFTP server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the fol
63. follow these steps 1 Onthe ATM PVC Configuration menu type 2 to select Modify Existing PVC 2 The IAD displays the following port table and a prompt Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 3641 UBR 2 100 39 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 4 CBR Total 3645 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 4830 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 3 The IAD displays a prompt for the VPI Enter Virtual Port Identifier VPI Type a VPI value between 0 and 255 default 0 and press Enter 4 The IAD displays a prompt for the VCI Enter Virtual Circuit Identifier VPI Type a VCI value between 32 and 65535 the default is 38 for data and 39 for voice and press Enter 5 The IAD displays the ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu Figure 4 40 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu ck ckckckckck ck ckck ckckckockock kockck ck ck kck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckock ckckck ck ck ck ck k kc kk ATM Encapsulation Configuration ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockockockckck ckck ckck ckck ckckck ck ckck ckckck ckck ck ck kk kk Current Encapsulation NONE 1 AAL5 None 2 AALO None 3 Proprietary Voice 4 RFC 1483 using VC Muxing 5 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 6 RFC 2364 PPPOATM with LLC Encapsulation 7 RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing 8 AAL1 CES 9 AAL2 LES NBT Select the encapsulation you want to assign to t
64. for bridging to function You must also disable RIP poisoned reverse The order in which you perform the procedures is irrelevant To enable routing globally Chapter 4 Router Configuration on page 96 you must disable bridging globally However you may enable routing on some ports and bridging on others depending on your requirements NOTE When bridging is disabled globally or on an interface port or an IP address is unconfigured IP Over Bridge is disabled automatically IP Over Bridging IP Over Bridging is intended for use then the IAD is in full bridged mode but remote access Telnet and or user authentication RADIUS are required 120 February 2004 Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 To implement IP Over Bridging enable bridging globally and by port on the WAN connection At least one DLCI PVC must be configured and assign an IP address to the WAN interface When these conditions exist either in Routing or Bridging configuration the IAD will prompt you to enable or disable IP Over Bridging When the IP address is unconfigured IP Over Bridging is disabled automatically The IAD will also prompt you to enable or disable IP Over Bridging when bridging is being enabled on an interface that already has an IP address assigned When an IP address is unconfigured or when bridging is disabled globally or on an interface port IP Over Bridging is disable automatically When IP Over Bridging is enabled the IAD examines all Et
65. free space determining 40 using generally 39 File System menu 39 File Transfer menu 33 43 File Transfer Method menu 43 file transfers performing 43 files deleting 40 renaming 40 firewall configuration 154 fragmentation selecting in FR 91 frame mode setting for T1 67 frame relay configuring generally 90 congestion parameters setting 93 CopperMountain CMCP setting 94 CopperMountain fragmentation setting 92 fragmentation selecting 91 FRF 12 configuration 91 in Quick Configuration 95 maintenance protocol configuring 93 Frame Relay Congestion Configuration menu 93 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu 86 Frame Relay DLCI Options menu 88 Frame Relay Encapsulation Configuration menu 88 Frame Relay Fragmentation Configuration menu 91 Frame Relay FRF 12 Configuration menu 91 Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol menu 93 Frame Relay Options menu 90 Frame Relay Statistics report 206 Frame CRC4 mode selecting 71 FRF 12 Fragmentation configuring 89 FRF 12 configuration in FR 91 G G SHDSL connecting to IAD 20 interface configuring 56 G2237 xDSL Configuration Menu 57 G2237 xDSL Configuration menu 56 G2237 xDSL interface type selecting 56 G2237 xDSL Statistics report 210 G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration menu 64 G7070 ADSL Statistics report 214 General Bandwidth 258 ground start setting all ports 131 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection menu 133 H hard reset conducting 37 hotline test 238 l IAD clearance requirements 9 components
66. is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 10 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 81 February 2004 Setting up AAL1 CES 1 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile Format menu Figure 4 48 AAL2 Audio Profile Format Menu ck ckckckckckckckck ckckockockock ckck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck AAL2 Audio Profile Format ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ko kc Current Audio Profile Format NONE 1 ITU 2 ATM Forum To select ITU type 1 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile menu with available options Figure 4 49 AAL2 Audio Profile Menu ck ckckckckckckckck ckckckockckockckck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc ko kc AAL2 Audio Profile ACkCk ck okCckcko ckockockocko ck KKK KKK kockck ck kockock ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Current Audio Profile NONE 1 ITU 1 40 octets G 711 64 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 50 ATM PCR Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration XCkckck
67. local foreign Description IP address of the foreign device IP address of the local LAN device Port number assigned by NAT which is translated by NAT to from the local port Port number of the local LAN device zero if ICMP protocol Port number of the foreign device zero if ICMP protocol Packets sent from the local device to the foreign device packets sent from the foreign device to the local device TCP or UDP Idle time in seconds for the connection TCP sequence number TCP ack number TCP state number TCP only local TCP retransmissions from local device to foreign device foreign TCP retransmissions from foreign device to local device local packets with bad TCP checksums from local device foreign packets with bad TCP checksums from foreign device 178 February 2004 NAT Local Server Table NAT Alias Table Deleting IP Addresses from NAT Tables 2000 A2 GB20 10 When NAT is enabled you can display the entries in the local server table To display the table type o on the NAT Configuration menu Entry Local IP Address Local Port Internet Port Protocol 1 1435 3 3 T 2 3 TCP Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 5 NAT Local Server Table Report Report Entry Description Entry Table entry number Local IP Address IP address in use Local Port local port number Internet Port Internet port number Protocol The protocol used TCP or UD
68. network layer information A router generally improves overall efficiency for a complex network but a bridge provides better speed and flexibility for the overall network This chapter contains the following topics Basic Router Setup Tasks page 97 Using the Router Configuration menu page 98 Configuring an IP Address page 98 Configuring Port Maximum Transmission Units page 101 Adding and Removing Static Routes page 103 Enabling and Disabling RIP page 101 Configuring RIP Version by Port page 102 Configuring RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port page 101 Configuring DNS Client page 106 Configuring DHCP Client page 106 Configuring DHCP Relay page 108 Configuring Telnet Server Port page 109 Configuring IP Filtering page 109 Configuring IP Header Compression page 116 Configuring LAN IP Broadcast Destination page 116 Displaying the Route Table page 116 9 99 999 9 99 99 9 9 9 9 99 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter Y 2000 A2 GB20 10 96 February 2004 Basic To configure the IAD as a router you should complete the following tasks Router Configure IP addresses on the LAN and WAN ports page 98 Setup Enable RIP poisoned reverse recommended page 101 add a static Tasks route page 103 or add a default route page 105 Disable bridging globally page 121 or by po
69. or CO Mode 1 Type 1 to display the Configure CPE CO Mode menu Figure 4 17 Configure CPE CO Mode menu Ck ckckckckckck ckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK Configure CPE CO Mode ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Current Mode CPE 1 CPE 2 CO 2 Type 1 to select CPE or type 2 to select CO 3 The IAD sets the mode and displays the menu Setting Auto Cycle Nokia DSLAM Type 2 to set the SDSL speed to Auto Cycle for connecting to a Nokia DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting Auto Sense Coppermountain DSLAM Type 3 to set the SDSL speed to Auto Sense for connecting to a Coppermountain DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Enabling Autobaud Mode Conexant DSLAM 1 Type 4 to enable or disable Conexant Autobaud mode 61 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 2 3 The IAD Displays the current setting and a prompt Conexant AutoBaud Mode is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable Autobaud mode and Sync Delay The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu When you enable Autobaud mode you automatically enable Sync Delay Conversely disabling Autobaud mode automatically disables Sync Delay Setting Sync D
70. port output port bridge packets sent to all No of bridge packets sent to all other bridge ports other ports Sent Packet Information bridge packets sent Total bridge packets sent bridge octects sent Total octets bytes of bridge packets sent discarded for lack of Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Packets Received by Type spanning tree config No of Spanning Tree Configuration packets packets received received spanning tree topology No of Spanning Tree Topology Change packets change packets received __ received spanning tree invalid No of invalid Spanning Tree packets such as packets received Wrong LSAP Control Protocol ID Version Length and Message Type value spanning tree config No of Spanning Tree Configuration packets sent packets sent spanning tree topology No of Spanning Tree Topology Change packets change packets sent sent DLCI Statistics Report To display the DLCI Statistics Data Link Connection Identifier report Type D on the Interface Statistics menu This option is only displayed when Frame Relay is selected as the data link protocol 2000 A2 GB20 10 197 February 2004 Table 12 11 DLCI Statist Parameter Committed Burst Excess Burst Throughput Rx Frames ics Description No of committed info rate bytes per measurement interval No of excess info rate bytes per measurement interval E
71. port to stay off hook Type the value in seconds and press Enter Displaying Ring Test Parameters Type D to display the current ring test parameters The IAD displays the following information port 2 onhooktime 5 offhooktime 8S Starting and Stopping the Ring Test Type S to start the ring test The IAD displays the menu and begins the ring test on the specified port The ring test continues until you stop the test by pressing option Displaying the IAD State Type S to display the on hook state for each port The IAD displays the following information Attempting to Connect to CPX counter 0 Port 01 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 02 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 03 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 04 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 05 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 06 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 07 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Port 08 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Received Segmentation Layer CRC failures since powerup 0 Configuring Trace Settings T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled These commands are reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers 145 February 2004 Selecting Insufficient Bandwidth Sound Type V to select the type of dial tone heard by the telephone user if there is insufficient WAN bandwid
72. report displays basic serial HDLC transport statistics on the Universal Serial Interlace port Table 12 19 Serial Statistics Report Parameter bytes rcvd packets rcvd discarded RX Busy Available Buffers PCB Entries discarded RX error Rx Clock glitch PLL error Frame too long Non octet aligned Abort seq CRC error Rx overrun CD lost Out Of Buffers PCBs Lack of resources Description Total data received in bytes No of Serial packets received No of discarded received packets due to packets Overrun Current available internal PCB Packets Buffers entries No of discarded due to the following reasons Could not allocate packet buffers Total frames discarded on this port due to receives clock glitch errors Total frames discarded on this port due to receives phase lock loop errors Total frames discarded on this port because the received frame was too long Total frames discarded on this port because the received frame was not an integral no of octets No of frames aborted on the port due to receiving an abort sequence since system re initialization and the port state was up or test Total frames discarded on this port due to received CRC errors Total frames discarded on this port due to receiver overruns errors Total frames discarded on this port due to lost Carrier Detect No of times that could not allocate a packet buffer for received packets Discarde
73. section describes connecting via the LAN For information about setting the IP address of the WAN port see Chapter 6 WAN Configuration on page 48 If you configure a RADIUS server you must use a RADIUS authenticated User ID password for Telnet access If the RADIUS server or the connection to the RADIUS server goes down Telnet access will not work For information about configuring a RADIUS server see RADIUS Server Settings on page 26 Ant Running Telnet Before you use Telnet to log in to the IAD make sure that the IAD and your PC are connected to the same network via straight through Ethernet cables or directly connected via a cross over cable and you know the IP address of the IAD Both devices must be on the same subnet Follow these steps to log in 1 Run Telnet on your PC 2 Type the IP address of the Ethernet port page 12 click Connect and then press Enter to gain the attention of the IAD 3 The IAD responds by displaying the log in message Enter Login ID gt 4 Type your user ID and press Enter NOTE After a period of inactivity three minutes by default the IAD automatically terminates console based and Telnet sessions to maintain security To change this value see Configuring the Console Timeout Period on page 36 Wi Default user IDs and passwords are listed in Table 2 2 on page 11 For information on security levels and user ID and password management see IAD Security on page 23 5 The IA
74. subnet as the IAD 7 Observe that the LINK indicator on the IAD front panel lights to verify that the IAD is connected to the LAN 8 Run Ping on the PC to ping a known good address on the IAD and verify the acknowledgement If a timeout occurs troubleshoot the LAN path to the IAD 9 Ping a known good address on the network and wait for acknowledgement If a timeout occurs troubleshoot the LAN path to the IAD 10 Disconnect the Ethernet cable between the PC and the IAD 11 Using a straight through cable connect the Ethernet LAN port on the IAD to your local LAN patch panel or hublswitchlrouter 12 Connect the IAD telephone ports to the local distribution frame or patch panel The IAD is ready for service The IAD menu interface contains utilities reserved for factory maintenance and development Before running any System Utilities call your service provider To display the current configuration and data transmission status 1 On the Main menu type 1 to display the Reports menu Figure 15 1 Reports Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckck ckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk kk KKK KKK ck ck ck ck oko Reports Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck kk Ck Ck KKK KKK ck ck ck kc ko C Display Current Configuration N Display Network Statistics I Display Interface Statistics M Display Media Statistics R Display Route Table A Display ARP Table B Display Bridge Forwarding
75. task to perform and proceed to the corresponding section Choosing a Port for IP Filtering To set the port on which to use IP filtering follow these steps 1 Onthe IP Filtering Configuration menu type P to select Choose Port for IP Filtering 2 If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to set 3 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to set for IP filtering and press Enter 4 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 110 February 2004 5 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish IP filtering configuration Globally Enabling and Disabling Filters Use these commands to enable and disable the input and output filters for all installed interfaces You must globally enable the filters for the associated filtering to function properly To enable or disable the input and output filters follow these steps 1 Onthe IP Filtering Configuration menu type F to select Globally enable disable input or outp
76. the ARP cache table No of ARP packets discarded due to Destination IP address of the packet is not found in the ARP cache table Error in allocating ARP packets or ARP entries of the cache table Interface Statistics Report To display the Interface Statistics report type I on the Interface Statistics menu The Interface Statistics report provides details about all packets sent and received on the selected interface Table 12 9 Interface Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons Packets Received by Type octects rcvd unicast rcvd multicast rcvd broadcast rcvd Packets Sent by Type octects sent No of packet received from this interface Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors such as lack of packet buffer Discarded received packets due to other reasons such as lack of packet buffer No of packet sent from this interface Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors such as lack of packet buffer
77. the IAD displays the following message Invalid UserID or Password Try again Press any key to continue 11 February 2004 9 Press any key and repeat the log in sequence If you cannot log in call your support provider for assistance When you first log in the IAD displays the Main menu The menu may vary depending on the IAD Figure 2 1 Main Menu ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Main Menu KEKE KKK KKK KKK KEKE KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckck ck ck ckck ck ck k kk Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure WAN Configure LAN Configure SNMP Configure Login System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure Multicast Configure NAT Options E A and O Telephony Clock Recovery vary depending on the Diagnostics Menu voice gateway selected Command Line Interface in the Voice Path Reset System Configure command Voice Path Configure A O CopperCom Call Control HUDAANHARZVOODWINADAUWNE Setting the Ethernet Port IP Address Before you configure the Ethernet IP address you should know the IP address and subnet mask that is to be assigned to this port It may be displayed on the work order or you may obtain or determine the appropriate IP address by consulting with the network administrator The IAD is shipped with a null IP address and subnet mask To configure a port IP address 1 On the Main menu type 2
78. the IAD is able to determine the reason the IAD was reset This information is stored and displayed when the IAD reboots and also displayed on the Current Configuration screen Main menu 1 C when known After the reset reason is noted you can delete the currently stored reset reason from the IAD To do so follow these steps 1 Type Aon the Utilities menu The IAD deletes any existing reset reason and displays the Utility menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 38 February 2004 Using the File System 2000 A2 GB20 10 The File System menu contains commands to manage files on the IAD To display the File System menu type r on the Utilities menu Figure 3 7 File System Menu ckckckckckckckckck ckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA KK KA KA KA A A A o File System Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK KK KK KA KA KA KA ko Directory of all files Copy file Rename File Remove File by name Format File System drive Space left in File System nxa To perform a task type the option and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying the IAD File Directory To display the files stored in flash memory type D on the File System menu The IAD displays the files and size Page down the list by pressing any key The IAD displays the amount of free memory at the end of the list Figure 3 8 IAD Fil
79. the Interface Statistics menu This option is only displayed when ATM is selected as the data link protocol Several associated reports are available depending on the specification of the PVC CA e e e E a AAL1 CPCS Statistics Report page 199 AAL2 page 200 Cumulative CPCS 2 page 201 Common AAL page 201 IP Header Compression page 203 PPP page 204 AAL1 CPCS Statistics Report This PVC Report displays when an AAL1 LES PVC is configured Table 12 12 AAL1 CPCS Statistics Report Parameter Reass Cells Tx Cells Har Errors Ptr Reframes Ptr Parity Errors Ptr Errors Rx Seq Errors Lost Cells Misinserted Cells CellLossStatus Description Total Cells received Total Cell sent The header of the Cell is incorrect such as wrong Sequence Segment Number SN SNP Number AAL1 Pointer Reframes cells Value in CSI field of the header is incorrect Value of Pointer field in the header is incorrect Sequence number is incorrect for cells received No of lost cells base on current sequence number No of mis inserted cells the sequence number of the cell is out of sequence 2 Current Status is out of sequence 1 Current Status has no problem 199 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 AAL2 Statistics Report This PVC Report displays when an AAL2 LES PVC is configured Table 12 13 Common CPCS 2 Statistics Report Parameter Transmit overflows Receive STF parity errors Receive sequenc
80. the data rate 144 kbps to 2320 kbps evenly divisible by 8000 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Using the Debug Menu NOTE Commands in option D SDSL Debug Menu are reserved for Paradyne network engineers The tasks described in this section all begin on the ADSL Configuration menu You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the ADSL interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the ADSL Configuration menu JF2004 This section is only for configuring the ADSL WAN interface JF2008 on the JF2004 JF2008 and JF2004i JF2004i Figure 4 19 G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckck ckckckckockockock kockck ck ck ckck ck ck ckckck ck ckck ckck ck ck ck ck ck kc k kk G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration Ck ckckckckckckckck ckckckck ck ckckckock ck ck ckckck ck ckckck ck ckckckck ckck ck ck ck kc kk 1 Set ADSL Standard D Enable Disable ADSL Debug Messages 5 Type 1 to select Set ADSL Standard The IAD displays the ADSL Standard menu Figure 4 20 ADSL Standard to use for Startup Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckck ck ckock kockck ck ck ckck ck ck ckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc k kc ADSL Standard to use for Startup ck ckckckckckck ck kckckock ck ck kockckck ck ckck ck ck ckck ck ck ckock ckckck ck ck ck ck kk kk Current ADSL Sta
81. the frames transmits on the control plane The terms datagram frame message and segment describe logical information groupings at various layers of the OSI reference model and in various technology circles PPP Point to Point Protocol a successor to SLIP that provides router to router and host to network connections over synchronous and asynchronous circuits Poisoned Reverse RIP Feature to set routes learned on the same port as the transmitted RIP message an infinite distance Prevents the propagation of routes from crashed routers through the network PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit PVCs save bandwidth associated with circuit establishment and tear down in situations where certain virtual circuits must exist all the time RFC Request for Comments Documents that detail operation of the Internet To obtain these document go to www rfc editor org RIP Routing Information Protocol Internet protocol used to exchange routing information within a system RIP uses hop count as a routing metric 270 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Router Network layer device that uses one or more metrics to determine the optimal path to forward network traffic Routers forward packets from one network to another based on network layer information a router may connect networks using various protocols by encapsulating data within another network s packet format or by removing layers of packet formatting SNMP Simple Network Management Pro
82. the option number 1 2 or 3 to enable or disable Outward Payload Outward Line and Inward Line Loopback Inward Loopback is valid only when the IAD is in Master Mode 3 The IAD makes the change and resets the interface Press any key to display the menu Type 4 to enable or disable receipt of ESF loopback commands This option is valid only when framing mode is set to ESF The IAD saves the changes and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration GT x Configuring the Transmit and Receive Channels Type 6 to select Configure Transmit Channels or 7 to select Configure Receive Channels The IAD displays a message indicating the number of channels enabled and displays the Channel Configuration menu Figure 4 28 Channel Configuration Menu kCckckckckckckckck ck ck ckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk Channel Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc kc 1 Enable All Channels m 2 Disable All Channels x 3 Select Individual Channels 4 Select Channel Range Esc To Return To Previous menu ckckckckckckck ck ck ck ckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k kc kk For each option proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling All Channels 1 Ty
83. to 50 and press Enter 4 You must reset the IAD page 14 before this change takes effect Setting the Minimum Signaling Bit Rate 1 Type M to set the audio bit rate margin 2 The IAD displays Minimum signaling bit rate 0 3 Enter the new bit rate margin and press Enter 4 You must reset the IAD page 14 before this change takes effect Debugging AAL2 LES Gateways NOTE The commands in option D Debug Control are reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers only Displaying AAL2 LES Statistics Type S to display the AAL2 LES Statistics menu 149 February 2004 Figure 7 25 AAL2 LES Statistics Menu KKKEKKKKKKEKKKKEKKEKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK AAL2 LES Statistics ACkCkCckckckckck kockockockockockck ck ck ckck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc KKK D Display Audio CAS Alarm Statistics C Clear Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying Audio CAS Alarm Statistics Type D to display transmitted and received audio CAS dropped and alarm statistics by line Press Escape to return to the menu or any other key to refresh the statistics and display the table Clearing Statistics Type C to clear all statistics The IAD resets the values to zero and displays the menu Configur ATM Adaptation Layer 2 Loop Emulation Services AAL2 LES is a ing AAL2 broadband local loop emulation service specifically telephony that uses the ATM AAL2
84. to the LAN type B on the Reports Menu The IAD displays the following information Table 12 28 Bridge Forwarding Database Report Parameter Description Ethernet Address Ethernet address of the device assigned by the manufacturer Interface Interface for the Ethernet address 217 February 2004 Bridge Sta tus Report PPP Autho rization Entries Report 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 28 Bridge Forwarding Database Report Parameter Description Port Port for the Ethernet interface Timer No of seconds until this entry deletes from the database The time counts down from the bridge database aging time value in one second intervals at zero the entry deletes from the database You must enable bridging for this table to display For more information on enabling bridging see Bridge Configuration on page 118 To display information about bridging type s on the Reports Menu The IAD displays a record for each interface Table 12 29 Bridge Status Report Parameter Description Interface interface for the active slot for bridging Port port for the preceding interface Spanning Tree Protocol STP enabled disabled State Spanning tree state disabled blocking listening llearning forwarding Root root port for the bridge yes no Designated designated port for the bridge yes no Timers current values of the spanning state timer first value and the hello timer Second value The spanning st
85. uses an RJ48 connector for the connection SDSL uses an RJ45 connector for the connection 6 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Universal Serial Interface USI Port The USI port is configurable for RS 530 or V 35 When configured as an RS 530 port you may use a straight through DB25 serial cable for connection to your leased line DSU CSU equipment When configured for use as V 35 Black Box Corporation provides a cable FA058 for conversion purposes To convert from RS 530 to RS 449 Black Box provides a cable EDN57J By notifying you of their availability Paradyne neither endorses or recommends these products For USI port pinouts when configured as RS 530 V 35 or RS 449 see Table D 9 on page 267 RS 232 Console Port Connects the IAD to a PC using a straight through 9 pin serial DB9 RS 232 cable for the purpose of using a terminal emulator for configuration and management Telephone Interfaces Each 16 24 Port IAD supports 16 or 24 analog telephones via an RJ11 jack 7 February 2004 2 Quick Start Guide This chapter describes the steps to install connect and set the IP address of the JetFusion IAD It introduces the menu interface and describes how to perform basic configuration for common LAN and WAN environments It also describes basic operations resetting the IAD and logging off In many cases all the information you need to get an IAD up and running in a customer s premises is contained in thi
86. varies based on the configuration interfaces and ports on the IAD Table 12 1 Current Configuration Report Parameter Software version Serial Number Contains DSP chip s Routing Information Protocol Bridging Bridge Database Aging Time Spanning Tree Spanning Tree bridge priority Spanning Tree hello time Spanning Tree max age Spanning Tree forward delay Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP IP and EOC SNMP System Contact SNMP System Name SNMP System Location SNMP Community SNMP Trap Host IP Address Multicasting Description version of IAD firmware serial number of the IAD no of DSP chips in the IAD Status enabled disabled globally Status enabled disabled globally 1 3600 seconds default 300 seconds enabled disabled globally 1 65 535 default 32 768 1 10 seconds default 2 seconds 6 40 seconds default 20 seconds 4 30 seconds default 15 seconds Status enabled disabled user defined maximum 39 characters user defined maximum 39 characters user defined maximum 39 characters name must match the SNMP host maximum 39 alphanumeric characters If SNMP is enabled and the SNMP Community Name is null SNMP goes into read only mode IP address of the SNMP trap host Status enabled disabled 182 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 1 Current Configuration Report Parameter Telnet Server Port DNS Server IP Address DNS Server Timeout Application Informa
87. you will see the boot sequence progress Log in via a Terminal Emulation Program With a serial cable connected follow these steps to log in to the IAD 1 Open a terminal emulation program Hyperterminal for example 2 Select the COM port to which the IAD is connected 3 Type or select the following settings and save your changes Table 2 1 Terminal Emulator Settings Setting Value Setting Value Bits per second 19 200 Stop bits 1 Data bits 8 Flow control None Parity None Emulation ANSI or VT100 4 Press Enter The IAD displays the log in message Enter Login ID gt NOTE If the IAD does not respond make sure the IAD is powered up check the cable and connections and review the settings 5 Type the default supervisor level user ID Supervisor or your user ID if changed and press Enter Note that both the user ID and password are case sensitive Table 2 2 below lists the default user IDs and passwords Table 2 2 Default IAD User IDs and Passwords Security Level User ID Password User lt enter gt lt Enter gt Network NetMan lt Enter gt Administrator Supervisor Supervisor supervisor 7 8 For information on security levels and user ID and password management see IAD Security on page 23 6 The IAD displays the password message Enter Password gt Type the default password supervisor or your password if different and press Enter If log in is not successful
88. 0 10 Figure 7 2 Voice Configuration Menu POTS Telephone Interface KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Voice Gateway Selection kkkkkkkkkxkk kkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Current Voice Gateway is MGCP 1 0 0 No Voice Gateway MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 CopperCom Currently selected Jetstream voice gateway AAL2 LES CAS AAL2 LES ELCP MGCP 1 0 OU PWN PP JF2004i Figure 7 3 displays the list of valid gateways for IADs with an JF2104i ISDN telephone interface Figure 7 3 Voice Configuration Menu ISDN Telephone Interface XACkCckCckockockockockockock kocko ck ckckockockock kockockock ko ko ko ck ko ko k ck ck ck ck k ck k ck k k kk Voice Gateway Selection XA CKCACckckck kckockock kockokockckockockock ck ckockock kck kock koko ko k ck ck ck k ck ck ck k k kk Current Voice Gateway is MGCP 1 0 Currently selected 0 No Voice Gateway voice gateway 1 Jetstream 2 AAL2 LES ELCP Type the option number of the voice gateway to set NOTE If you select option MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 or MGCP 1 0 the IAD an option to manage MGCP NCS Embedded Client option O on the Main menu Otherwise option O is not displayed 2 The IAD saves the voice gateway you ve selected and displays the Voice Gateway Selection menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configurati
89. 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter 5 The IAD saves the new configuration and displays the Multicast Configuration menu 6 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect 165 February 2004 Removing a Multicast Routing Source Displaying the Multi cast Rout ing Source Displaying the IGMP Group 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type R to remove a Multicast Routing Source 1 The IAD displays the IP address prompt Enter IP address for the Source Type the source IP address and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompt Enter subnet mask for the source 255 255 255 0 gt Type the new subnet address and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the interface 4 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to delete and press Enter 5 The IAD The IAD permanently removes the multicast routing source from the Multicast Routing Source Table and displays the Multicast Configuration menu 6 Reset
90. 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Configuring the Maintenance Protocol To configure the maintenance protocol 1 On the Main menu select Configure WAN to display the WAN Configuration menu 2 Select Configure FR Options to display the Frame Relay Options menu page 90 3 Select Configure Maintenance Protocol to display the Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol menu Figure 4 64 Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK ckckck ko kockckock ck ckck ck ck ko ko kock None CCITT Q 933 Annex A Network CCITT Q 933 Annex A User CCITT Q 933 Annex A Both D D D ANSI T1 617 Annex Network ANSI T1 617 Annex User ANSI T1 617 Annex D Both LMI Network FRF 1 1 LMI User FRF 1 1 LMI Both FRF 1 1 vO000 10Y U1 i C PO ID CO 4 Type the number that corresponds to the protocol on your network and press Enter 5 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Configuring the Congestion Parameters To configure the congestion parameters 1 Onthe WAN Configuration menu 2 Select Configure FR Options to display the Frame Relay Options menu page 90 3 Select Configure Congestion Parameters to display the FR Congestion Configuration menu Figure 4 65 F
91. 14 when you finish configuring NAT 2000 A2 GB20 10 171 February 2004 Configuring NAT Local Server 2000 A2 GB20 10 To configure the NAT local server entry follow these steps 1 2 4 Type N on the NAT Configuration menu to select Configure NAT Local Server Entry The IAD displays the following Enter NAT Local Server Entry to Configure 1 10 1 Type the number of the local server entry and press Enter The IAD displays the current IP address and prompts for a new one Current NAT Local Server Translated IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NAT Local Server Translated IP address Type the local server translated IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the Protocol Configuration menu Figure 11 2 NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK A KA A KR KR KA KA KA ko ko ko ko ko kk NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckck ckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK A KK A KA KR KA AR KA Kk ko ko ko ko kk Current NAT Local Server Protocol is TCP 1 TCP 2 UDP 3 ESP IPSec 4 AH IPSec 5 Both TCP and UDP The protocol may be unknown or it may be set Type the option number of the protocol usually TCP or UDP to use The IAD displays the menu with the new status message Press Escape to continue The IAD prompts for the translated port number En
92. 166 Displaying the IGMP Querier sseseeeeseeeess 167 Displaying the Multicast Routing Table 167 Displaying the PIM Neighbor esses 168 Chapter 11 NAT Configuration The NAT Configuration MSI iioii ci ee e gn o Re Re p Ue rere bee di ub n an Re EKA 170 Enabling NAT Translatio cu tcc irre costo et rrr Ert rires 171 Configuring NAT Local Server uiu eei teer idest ke Drei eU 172 Configuring NAT TIMEOUTS cic o ree Eb pea Toe hrs tue 173 Configuring tha NAT Port Range o e ache Ro rara apis 174 Configuring the NAT Alias Enlby eie retro EO HI ai ER 175 NAT Statistics ei deci Gaede tuk etc ant bet Eneas 176 2000 A2 GB20 10 Vi February 2004 NAT Connection Table esee 177 NAT Connection Details cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 177 NAT Local Server Table sin rnerk npin a E Enina 179 NAT Allas TADIG oce op oar ma d eeu ries a e e t bis 179 Deleting IP Addresses from NAT Tables 179 Deleting a NAT Local Server Entry ssssssse 180 Deleting a NAT Alias Entry eeeeeeeeeees 180 Chapter 12 IAD Reports The Report MODU o CR EP E RARE Erro es 181 Current Configur ation Report ssssseee 182 Network Statistics RepOrts ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 184 Interface Statistics REPOrts
93. 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 1 Onthe ATM Configuration menu type 1 to select Configure Payload Scrambling 2 The IAD displays the status and a prompt Payload scrambling is DISABLE Enter E to Enable D to Disable To enable payload scrambling type E or type D to disable payload scrambling 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM Configuration menu where you may continue with other ATM tasks 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish ATM configuration Configuring the F4 OAM VPI One one F4 OAM VPI may be configured at a time When you are configuring an F4 OAM VPI if one is not configured the IAD displays the message F4 OAM not configured otherwise the current configuration is displayed To configure the F4 OAM VPI 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 2 to select Configure F4 OAM VPI This value must match one of the WAN PVCs For more information see Configuring ATM PVCs on page 75 2 The IAD displays the status and a prompt F4 End to end OAM VPI 0 Enter Virtual Port Identifier VPI Type the VPI on which to configure F4 OAM 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM Configuration menu where you may continue with other ATM tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish ATM configuration Configuring the F4 OAM Type To configure the F4 OAM type 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 3 to select Configure F4 OAM Type The IAD displays this menu Figure 4 55 ATM Conf
94. 256 257 258 260 261 262 263 Network Statistics report 184 Nokia 258 Auto Cycle in Quick Configuration 95 Auto Cycle setting in SDSL configuration 61 Auto Cycle G SHDSL rate mode 60 Framed mode in SDSL 63 setting Auto cycle for SDSL 61 Speedlink System 2 5 supported DSLAM 258 Nortel 63 0 OAM loopback sending 86 on off hook test 241 On hook Transmission mode setting 133 P Paradyne 258 call control settings 144 GranDSLAM 2 5 in Quick Configuration 95 part numbers 254 passwords 11 changing 24 default 24 limits of 24 payload scrambling configuring 84 phone detection test 239 2000 A2 GB20 10 physical interface selecting for WAN 55 PIM Dense Mode configuring by port 164 PIM neighbor displaying 168 PIM Statistics report 189 ping CLI command 223 ping using 35 Port IP address configuring 98 unconfiguring 100 POTS 262 specifications 262 POTS Diagnostics menu 237 POTS Statistics report 215 POTS diagnostics 237 power consumption for ISDN telephones 20 DC adapter 4 power supply testing 239 PPP Authorization Entries report 218 PPP debug mode enabling and disabling 41 PPP Statistics report 204 precautions regarding use of IAD xii product warranty xiii Promatory IMAS 2 5 proprietary voice encapsulation setting in PVC 79 PSAX 258 PVC adding 75 deleting 83 displaying list of 84 modifying 78 RFC 1483 79 setting proprietary voice encapsulation 79 setting RFC 2364 80 setting up AAL1 CES 82 setti
95. 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu Enabling and Disabling Adaptive Rate Mode 1 Type 3 to display the GSHDSL Rate Mode menu Figure 4 12 Configure CPE CO Mode Menu Ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CR CK CK CA CA A KA KA KB MX Configure G SHDSL Rate Mode ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Current Rate Mode FIXED 1 Fixed 2 Adaptive Type 1 to select Fixed or type 2 to select Adaptive 2 The IAD sets the rate mode and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu Selecting the Line Rate 1 Type 4 to display the current line rate and a prompt Line Rate is currently 88 Kbps Enter xDSL Line Rate Type a line rate value between 64 Kbps and 2320 Kbps which must be a value evenly divisible by 8 2 The IAD sets the rate and displays the xDSL Configuration Menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish WAN configuration Enabling and Disabling xDSL Debug Messages NOTE Wi Option D Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages is reserved for Paradyne network engineers 2000 A2 GB20 10 58 February 2004 Configur ing the SDSL Inter face JF2100 2000 A2 GB20 10 The tasks described in this section all begin on the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu The tasks are described so you can proceed through them sequentially
96. 8 Setting the Voice Gateway ssseeesssseseseee 128 Setting Jitter Delay rr ee prece Pre tiers pprev priae ceps 130 Displaying Jitter Delay eeeseeeeeeeesssssss 130 Setting Start Mode oodd tb bad he eh 130 Setting SLIC Control Mode cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 132 Setting Compander Mode eese 132 Set On Hook Transmission Mode uessessss 133 Setting Idle Voltage Mode sseeeseessseee 133 Setting Debug Mode rr rre EO er t 134 Configuring Echo Cancellation eeessssse 134 Setting Loop raise TENE M eh Seat 135 Setting Country Mode ssi ioo eL IDEE ERE We 137 Managing MGCP Embedded Client 138 Managing Copper Com Call Control sss 142 JetStream Call Control Settings ssssssussss 144 Configuring AAL2 LES CAS sse 146 Configuring for AAL2 LES CAS 146 Configuring AAL2 LES CCS ELCP esee 150 Chapter8 Firewall Configuration Creating a Firewall via IP Filtering ssssssss 154 Chapter 9 DHCP Server Configuration Basic DHCP Server Setup Tasks ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 The DHCP Server Configur ation Menu 156 Using DHCP Debugging Messages
97. 8 NC Table D 9 USI Port for RS 530 V 35 and RS 449 Signal RS 530 V 35 RS 449 Shield Ground A 1 Transmit Data A 2 P 4 Receive Data A 3 R 6 Request to Send A 4 C 7 Clear to Send A 5 D 9 DCE Ready A 6 E 13 Signal Ground 7 B 19 Receive Line Signal A 8 F 11 Receive DCE Clock B 9 X 26 Receive Line Signal B 10 29 Transmit DTE Clock B 11 W 35 Transmit DCE Clock B 12 AA 23 Clear to Send B 13 27 Transmit Data B 14 S 22 Transmit DCE Clock A 15 Y 5 Receive Data B 16 T 24 Receive DCE Clock A 17 V 8 18 Request to Send B 19 25 DTE Ready A 20 H 12 21 DCE Ready B 22 31 DTE Ready B 23 30 Transmit DTE Clock A 24 U 17 25 2000 A2 GB20 10 267 February 2004 Glossary 2000 A2 GB20 10 E Glossary 10 100BaseT 10 Mbps baseband Ethernet specification that uses two pairs of twisted pair cabling one pair for transmitting data and the other for receiving data 10 100BaseT has a distance limit of approximately 100 meters per segment 100BaseT 100 Mbps baseband Fast Ethernet specification that uses UTP wiring Like 10 100BaseT 100BaseT sends link pulses over the network segment when no traffic is present These link pulses contain more information than those used in 10 100BaseT ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ARP Address Resolution Protocol Enables routers to obtain the Ethernet address for a known IP address See also Inverse ARP ATM Asynchronous Transfe
98. ABLED 3 DISABLED 4 DISABLED Press any key to return to the Port Administration menu Configuring Admin State per port 1 Type 3 to enable or disable the admin state for a specific port The IAD displays the port prompt Select Line 1 8 Type the port number to set 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable the admin state or D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to return to the Port Administration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Restarting an Endpoint Type 4 to reset the connection between the Voice Port phone and the MGCP voice gateway You use this option if one side of the link incorrectly identifies a call as up and the other side thinks the call as down To reset the connection type the number of the port and press Enter Configuring Default Packet Size 1 Type P to configure the packet size default 5 5 ms 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter packet size in ms 5 5 gt Type the packet size value and press Enter 3 The IAD saves the new packet size and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to return to the MGCP menu and continue with other voice path configuration 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration 141 February 2004 Managing When your IAD is configure
99. AM Operation And Maintenance cells received No of cells received with EFCI Explicit Forward Congestion Indication bit is on No of RM Resource Management cells received No of received packets discarded due to Unknown VPI VCI numbers Bad Cell headers Size of cells received is larger than PDU size other reasons as required No of valid ATM cell sent No of cells transmitted with CLPI Cell Loss Priority Indication bit is on No of OAM Operation And Maintenance cells transmitted 208 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 20 ATM Statistics Report Field EFCI Tx RM Tx Rx HEC Errors Lost Cell Delineation OCD Time in OCD ATM Sync Description No of cells transmitted with EFCI Explicit Forward Congestion Indication bit is on No of RM Resource Management cells transmitted No of cells receives with HEC errors in the header No of times cell delineation was lost Amount of time in OCD condition Current ATM Synchronization status Established or Lost 209 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Table 12 21 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Parameter Operational State Start Progress Operational Seconds Up Down Counter Received SNR Mean SQ Error Initial Received SNR Loop Attenuation Actual PSD Mask Framer Sync LOSW Status Total Seconds Errored Seconds CRC Count LOSW Defect Count FEBE Count T
100. Configuration 3 The IAD displays the Quick Configuration menu Figure 4 67 Quick Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckck ck ckckck ck ckockockckckck ck ckck ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck kc k kk Quick Configuration Ck ck ck cock KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK kck ck ck ck ko kok ck System will reset after changing configuration Current configuration Differs from listed configurations 1 Lucent Stinger Conexant Autobaud Payload Scrambling 2 Nokia Auto Cycle Coppermountain Auto Sense Paradyne Unframed 784kbps Payload Scrambling AccessLan CPE ATM Unframed 1152kbps fixed Frame Relay 784kbps fixed OY UB WwW 4 Type the option corresponding to the DSLAM to which the IAD is connected The IAD automatically resets 6 To continue configuration log back on to the IAD gi 95 February 2004 5 Router Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the IAD as a router You may configure the IAD as a router or a bridge depending on your application Optionally you may also configure some ports for routing and some ports for bridging For example you might set up PPP for Internet connections using routing and set up a management connection using bridging A router is a network layer device that uses one or more metrics to determine the optimal path along which network traffic should be forwarded Routers forward packets from one network to another based on
101. D displays the password message Enter Password gt 2000 A2 GB20 10 15 February 2004 int Using the Menu Interface 2000 A2 GB20 10 4 Type your password and press Enter to display the Main menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Main Menu XACkCckCckockockockock kockokock kock kckock ck ck ck k ck ckockockock ck ck kckck ck ck ck ck k kk kk Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure WAN Configure LAN Configure SNMP Configure Login System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure NAT Telephony Clock Recovery Diagnostics Menu Command Line Interface Reset System Voice Path Configure HuUO00NHZUY0 1o Urt NN H NOTE The user ID and password transmit as clear text which may be captured by unauthorized individuals If you are concerned with network security you may not want to use Telnet to configure the IAD The JetFusion IAD provides an ANSI terminal based menu interface for system configuration and monitoring When you log in the IAD displays the Main menu The commands displayed in some menus including the Main menu differ depending on the level at which you log in Figure 2 4 on page 17 displays the Main menu when you log in at the Supervisor security level Figure 2 5 on page 17 displays the Main menu when you log in as Network Administrator and Figure 2 6 on page 17 displays the Main menu when yo
102. Database S Display Bridge Status P Display PPP Authorization Entries U Display System Uptime O Display Memory Statistic Select Display Current Configuration 248 February 2004 2 Type c to display the current configuration For more information see Current Configuration Report on page 182 2000 A2 GB20 10 249 February 2004 A Menu Map Menu Map This appendix provide a map of the menu interface for the JetFusion family of IADs E EL User ID Password pu off Requires a Supervisor password 1 Reports Menu 2 Configure IP Router 3 Configure Bridge C Display Current Config C Configure Port IP Address t G Enable Bridging Globally MN Display Network Stats U Unconfigure Port IP Address P Enable Bridging by Port tl Display Interface Stats M Configure Port Max Xmt Unit A Configure Bridge Aging Timer M M Display Media Stats S Add Remove a Static Route MT Enable Disable Spanning Tree Globally p R Display Route Table R Enable Disable RIP tO Enable Disable Spanning Tree by Port MA Display ARP Table V Configure RIP Version by Port M R Configure Spanning Tree Bridge Priority B Display Bridge Forwarding P Configure RIP Poisoned MQ Configure Spanning Tree Port Priority Database Reverse by Fort I H Configure Spanning Tree Hello Time S Display Bridge Status N Configure DNS Client L S Configure Spanning Tree Max Age rP e PPP Author
103. Enter connection to configure Type the ID number of the connection that you want to configure in this case 0 and press Enter 5 Type the new IP address and press Enter or press Enter to retain the current IP address 6 The IAD displays the following information Current subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Enter new subnet mask for this interface 2000 A2 GB20 10 13 February 2004 Type the new subnet mask usually 255 255 255 0 and press Enter 7 The IAD displays the following instructions Select priority Normal High N H N Give the interface normal priority type N or press Enter 8 Type v or Enter to save the new IP address and subnet mask 9 To exit press Escape then type v to terminate the session 10 Quit the terminal emulator program 11 Reset the IAD following for the new IP address to be in effect NOTE When you configure the IAD you must restart the IAD each time you change the settings for those changes to take effect You may make several configuration changes before resetting if you choose for efficiency Ant If you plan to use Telnet for configuration tasks this is a good time to disconnect the serial cable from the PC and IAD Resetting Many configuration tasks require that you reset or restart the IAD before the IAD the new settings or configuration will take effect When you use the menu interface or the Command Line Interface on page 221 to make changes or change the physica
104. F2208 T1 with Frame Relay uF 2210 Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 53 Configure T1 page 66 Configure DLCIs page 86 Configure Frame Relay options page 90 Configure the voice path page 127 T1 with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 53 Configure T1 page 64 Configure PVCs page 75 Configure ATM page 84 Configure the voice path page 127 E1 with Frame Relay m ss Igel toe DUE Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 53 Configure E1 page 64 Configure DLCIs page 86 Configure Frame Relay options page 90 Configure the voice path page 127 E1 with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 53 Configure E1 page 64 Configure PVCs page 75 Configure ATM page 84 Configure the voice path page 127 ee pu TOM mop pc 51 February 2004 Using the WAN Con figuration Menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 JF2304 JF2308 JF2316 JF2304 JF2104 JF2104i JF2108 SDSL with Frame Relay 1 Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 53 2 Configure SDSL page 64 3 Configure DLCIs page 86 4 Configure Frame Relay options page 90 5 Configure the voice path page 127 SDSL with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 53 Configure SDSL page 64 Configure PVCs page 75 Configure ATM page 84 Configure the voice path page 127 eee IIS To configure the physical interface of the IADs you may also use the Quick Configurati
105. GCP OSI Reference Model Network architectural model developed by ISO and ITU T The model consists of the following seven layers each of which specifies particular network functions 269 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 The lowest layer is closest to the media technology and the highest layer is closest to the user The hardware and software implement the lower two layers while only the software implements the upper five layers Physical layer the actual wires and connections in the network Data link layer responsible for physical addressing network topology error notification and ordered delivery Network layer responsible for connectivity path selection and routing Transport layer responsible for network communication virtual circuit management fault detection and flow control Session layer manages sessions between applications Presentation layer responsible for data structures used by networked applications Application layer networked software applications such as e mail Telnet and FTP Packet Logical grouping of information that includes a header containing control information and usually user data Packets refer to network layer units of data with messages divided into several packets Some networks use fixed packet sizes others use variable packet sizes Packets typically have standard header information that identifies the packet In contrast frames contain only data information about
106. I Diagnostics menu Figure 14 4 BRI Diagnostics Menu BRI Diagnostics Menu Ck Cckckck ck ckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK AK A A KR KG KA KA A ko ko ko ko kk ok Select BRI Line Send D Channel Test Pattern Enable Internal Digital Loop Enable Internal Analog Loop Enable Remote Loop Enable SSP Enable SCP Disable All Test Modes Send B1 Channel Test Pattern Send B2 Channel Test Pattern Enable Disable BRI L1 debug messag Enable Disable BRI Dch debug message Disable BRI PS Enable BRI PS Activate L1 Deactivate L1 Manufacture Loop Back Test Burning Loop Back Test 7 E Q utmduotJ tuo Iou UN mPo Before conducting any test or enabling an option type O to select the BRI line to on which to operate 1 4 Next perform the test or enable disable options by typing the option When testing is complete type 8 to disable all test modes 2000 A2 GB20 10 243 February 2004 Trouble shooting the IAD 2000 A2 GB20 10 This section provides information for troubleshooting symptoms associated with the operation of the IAD Table 14 1 describes symptoms probable causes and suggested corrective action to correct the problem Table 14 1 Troubleshooting Symptoms and Causes Symptom Power indicator is not lit LAN Link indicator is not lit No dial tone is present Probable Cause Power is not available to the IAD Incorrect Ethernet connection
107. IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration 100 February 2004 Setting the Port Maxi mum Transmis sion Unit Enabling and Dis abling RIP int 2000 A2 GB20 10 The MTU setting controls IP fragmentation of packets transmitted through the specified port Packet whose size is greater than the MTU value are fragmented to fit into the MTU size limit To set a maximum transmission unit value for a port follow these steps 1 Type mon the Router Configuration menu to select Configure Port Max Transmission Unit 1 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 O 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the current configuration and a prompt Current MTU configuration for SDSL Port 1 is 1500 Enter New MTU for this Port gt Type the new MTU value 100 1500 and press Enter When set at 1500 IP fragmentation is disabled 3 The IAD saves the changes 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration When you enable RIP the IAD sends routing data to adjacent routers and dynamically learns the associated network topology Enabling RIP Globally To enable or disable RIP globa
108. IAD IP Addresses eeeeeeeseessss 47 2000 A2 GB20 10 Chapter 4 WAN Configuration Basic WAN Setup Tasks uade dec ve per p Fa n eeuses 48 Using the WAN Configuration Menu eeeeeeeeeess 52 Selecting the Datalink Protocol sseeeeseesesss 53 Setting Up TDM Voice diccre reae deu heri pei Eee 54 Selecting the Physical Interface ssssssssssss 55 ii February 2004 Configuring the G SHDSL Interface ssss 56 Configuring the SDSL Interface JF2100 59 Configuring the SDSL Interface sussessss 60 Configuring the ADSL Interface sseessssessss 64 Setting the Interface to T1 or E1 seeeeessssssss 65 Configuring the T1 Interface ssssessssseeeee 66 Configuring the E1 Interface eseseesessssseess 71 Configuring ATM P VOS piter ette hr bts per popu techo yoetd 75 Adding PV nic tasa a A 15 M difVing e P MO ence aas otete to eerte o tees 78 Deleting a PMO concinit bl a Odo pa ei E ies 83 Showing Current PVCS esses 84 Configuring AIM ODUODS itio icon st eb aet ah tue 84 Configuring Frame Relay DEG I Sigs it Heo RE DR ERE 86 Modifying a DECOM 25 ceto dee vitet 87 Adding a DLG NETT SEAE 88 Deleting a DEC rrari x cates esta s eie
109. Interface Statistics M Display Media Statistics R Display Route Table A Display ARP Table B Display Bridge Forwarding Database S Display Bridge Status P Display PPP Authorization Entries U Display System Uptime O Display Memory Statistics Z Zero All Statistics 181 February 2004 m Current Configur ation Report 2000 A2 GB20 10 Most options on the Reports menu generate a specific report However the Network Statistics Interface Statistics and Media Statistics options display a menu of several related reports and commands to reset accumulated statistics To display a report or group of reports or to clear statistics for a particular protocol or interface select the option and proceed to the appropriate section NOTE When viewing a report press any key to display the next page or return to the Reports menu at the end of the report Press Escape to return to the Reports menu at any time To display the Current Configuration report enter C on the Reports menu The Current Configuration report displays configuration settings and information about the installed interfaces on your IAD For each port on the IAD details are displayed For each interface configured on a port details are also displayed The parameters are repeated and not described again in the table The information displayed in the Current Configuration report is listed in Table 12 1 The contents of this report
110. JF2324 Description T1 E1 16 ports POTS NA T1 E1 24 ports POTS NA SDSL 4 ports POTS NA SDSL 8 ports POTS NA SDSL 16 ports POTS NA SDSL 24 ports POTS NA Part Number 2902 30428 001 2902 30425 001 2902 30179 001 2902 30170 001 2902 30427 001 2902 30424 001 Table C 2 2 4 8 Port Analog Voice Features Feature IAD Description Voice Ports 4 8 POTS ports FXS RJ11 based on last number of IAD model Lifeline Support Baseband failover JF2004 Integrated on Line 4 JF2008 Integrated on Line 8 Signaling JF2004 Loop start JF2304 8 JF2008 Loop start Ground Start JF2104 8 Dialing DTMF tone Ring Source Internal Impedance JF2004 600 Ohms JF2304 8 JF2008 600 900 Ohms JF2104 8 REN JF2004 2 5 REN per port JF2304 8 JF2008 5 REN per port JF2104 8 Loop Current JF2004 25 mA typical JF2304 8 JF2008 23 20 mA typical JF2104 8 255 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 2 2 4 8 Port Analog Voice Features Feature IAD Description Idle State Voltage gt 21V Ring Voltage JF2004 240 vrms at 2 5 REN load JF2304 8 JF2008 gt 40 vrms at 5 REN load JF2104 8 Ring Frequency 20 25 Hz Gain System Loss Programmable 3dB to 9dB Table C 3 JF2004i and JF2104i ISDN Voice Features Feature Description Ports 4 BRI SO ports RJ45 Line 4 wire Tx and Rx pair Operating Mode Full Duplex Data Rate 2B D ISDN B 64 kbps D 16 kbps 128 kbps available Power PS1
111. JetFusion Integrated Access Device User s Guide Document No 2000 A2 GB20 10 February 2004 KANADINA S Copyright O 2004 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation trainin
112. KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk P POTS Diagnostics S SDSL Diagnostics B ISDN BRI Diagnostics NOTE Option S SDSL Diagnostics is available only on SDSL equipped IADs JF2304 and JF2308 Option B ISDN BRI Diagnostics is available only on the JF2004i and the JF2104i You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to perform diagnostics tasks Options that display in the Diagnostics menu are the same for both security levels Type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Y POTS A WAN uplink is not required to perform POTS testing To perform POTS Diagnostics diagnostics type P on the Diagnostics Menu The IAD loads and configures the DSP software module and displays the following menu Figure 14 2 POTS Diagnostics Menu ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck POTS Diagnostics Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CA CK CK CK CA KA A KA AG KB MX Dialup Test Hotline Test Ring Test Power Supply Test Phone Detect Test Ring Test On Off Hook Test Infineon Codec Test HODAVHNA HY 2000 A2 GB20 10 237 February 2004 NOTES am Pots diagnostics are intrusive tests Any active calls will be terminated You should terminate all voice gateway activity prior to continuing with any POTS diagnostic testing The Infineon CODEC test is reserved fo
113. KK ck ck kk Variant Interface Management KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckckckck ck ckock ck k kk Display Variant Configure PSTN Port Configure ISDN Port Load Variant Unload Variant Save Variant Delete Saved Variant Restart Interface Shut Down Interface NQAxXSEQCHFHDWY NOTE Use of commands in the Variant Interface Management menu is reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers only Debugging for AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Type D to display the Debugging menu Figure 7 29 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Debugging Menu XA CckCcACckockckockock kock kock kckckckock ck ck ckock ck ckockocko ko ck ckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk Debugging kkkkkkkk xkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk D Set Debugging Options S Display V5 FSM States Setting Debugging Options Type D to display debugging information for AAL2 LES CCS ELCP and set debugging options 151 February 2004 NOTE a The use of these debugging options is reserved for Paradyne network engineers only Enabling debug options may significantly affect IAD performance Displaying V5 FSM States Type S to display V5 FSM states PSTN FSM States AN side L3 Signaling Port Control Port Status 1 AN6 port blockedANO out of serviceAN1 0 blocked 2 AN6 port blockedANO out of serviceAN1 0 blocked 3 AN6 port blockedAN0 out of serviceAN1 0 blocked 24 AN6 port blockedAN0 out of serviceAN1 0 blocked Viewing AAL2 LES Statistics Type S to disp
114. KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kckck ck ck ko kk Current DataLink Protocol Frame Relay 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay This option applies only to ADs E TDM Voice q with channelized T1 WAN ports 3 Type E to select TDM Voice 4 The IAD displays the current channel configuration and prompts you for the number of voice channels to allocate Current configuration table is Ch Configuration nC VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 1 2 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 2 3 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 3 24 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 24 54 February 2004 Selecting the Physi cal Inter face 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enter number of voice channels desired for this chunk 10 11 12 13 14 Type the number of voice channels The IAD asks you for the starting channel Enter the starting channel of this voice channel chunk Type the starting channel number for this chunk of circuits The IAD asks if you want to allocate more circuits Do you want to continue allocating new chunks y n Type Y to repeat these steps or N to continue The IAD asks you for the number of data channels to allocate Enter the number of data channels desired Type the number of voice channels The IAD asks you for the starting channel Enter starting channel of this voice channel chunk Type the starting channel number for this chunk of circuits The IAD asks if you w
115. Max Delay 2000 A2 GB20 10 250 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 D Configure DHCP HE Enable Disable Checking for Enable Disable DHCP Add l DHCP Servers Enable Disable DHCP Debug Messages Configure DHCP Server Parameters Configure DHCP Address Range Pool Configure DHCP Client Entry Display DHCP Configuration Display DHCP Server Statistics Display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses Display DHCP Server Unassigned Addresses Display DHCP Entry Details Delete A DHCP Client Entry Delete A DHCP Assignment Entry P POTS Diagnostics M Configure Multicast E Enable Disable Global IP Multicasting P Config PIM Dense Mode by Port S Add Change Multicast Route Source G Show IGMP Group Q IGMP Querier M Show Multicast Routing Table N Show PIM Neighbor C Command Line Interface gt Command See Chapter 13 Command Line Interface 251 N Configure NAT r B FE R Reset System R Reset System Configure NAT Configure NAT A rS re FD EO Display NAT Alias Table PX H Y GZ Enable Disable NAT Debug Messages Enable Disable NAT Translation by Port Configure NAT TCP Timeout UDP Timeout Port Range Configure NAT Local Server Entry T Telephony Clock Recovery 1 Enable Disable Derived Timing 2 Enable Disable Dervied Timing Debug Messages
116. OEP Ol usi oce tc latex oc qus de oc e debes 255 2000 A2 GB20 10 idx February 2004 16 24 POR 5 eR ED HO pP e PUDE iE 262 Appendix D Connector Pinouts Connector PINOUIS 2a cinematic pubes phon atem erede cag 265 Appendix E Glossary Glossary coste ode oM ee dett it uud LM SCA tees 268 2000 A2 GB20 10 Index X February 2004 Audience Contents 2000 A2 GB20 10 Preface The JetFusion Family IAD User Guide contains the information you need to install connect and configure each JetFusion IAD in a customer s premises This guide is intended for network engineers and other professionals in the telecommunications industry who are engaged in the installation configuration management and support of telephone and computer networks network access products and related equipment The guide contains the following chapters and appendixes This preface describes the audience how this guide is organized safeguards you should always observe and warranty and regulatory notices Chapter 1 Introduction on page 1 introduces the features of the IADs including the hardware indicators and ports Chapter 2 Quick Start Guide on page 8 describes the process of getting an IAD up and running in a typical customer premises This chapter is helpful if you are new to IADs because it lists each step beginning with unpacking the IAD It also provides information about logging on using the menu interface setting the IP a
117. P When NAT is enabled you can display the entries in the NAT alias table To display the table type E on the NAT Configuration menu Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 6 NAT Alias Table Report Entry Description Entry number Table entry number 1 to 7 Local IP Address Local or LAN IP address Internet IP Address Internet IP address assigned To delete an entry from the NAT Tables 1 Type x on the NAT Configuration menu 2 The IAD prompts for the IP address Type the IP address to delete and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the table and displays the NAT Configuration menu 179 February 2004 Deleting a To delete a local server entry NAT Local 1 Type v on the NAT Configuration menu Server 2 The IAD prompts for the entry number to delete E t Enter NAT Local Server Entry to Delete 1 20 1 ntry Type the number of the table entry and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the following Deleting NAT Local Server entry 1 Translated IP address 115 3 3 1 Translated Port 2 Standard Port 3 4 The IAD updates the table and displays the NAT Configuration menu Deleting a To delete a NAT alias entry NAT Alias 1 Type z on the NAT Configuration menu Entry 2 The IAD prompts for the alias entry to delete Type the number of the entry and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the table and displays the NAT Configuration menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 180 February 2004 The Report M
118. P Multicast Traceroute messages sent No of other IGMP type messages sent IP Statistics Report To display the IP Statistics report type 1 on the Network Statistics menu The IP Statistics report displays details about all IP Internet Protocol packets sent and received on the network Table 12 4 IP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received packets delivered to upper layer packets forwarded discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons with header errors with an illegal source With an illegal destination bad versions bad checksums with headers too small packets smaller than header packets larger than frame with unrecognized protocol Total IP packets received No of incoming IP packets delivered to upper layer Layer 4 or higher such as ICMP IGCMP PIM TCP and UDP packets No of incoming IP packets forwarded to other route interface Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to other reasons listed in the following Bad IP header format Illegal Source IP address in the IP header Illegal Destination IP address in the IP header Version field value in IP header is incorrect Value of Checksum field in IP header is incorrect
119. P menu are reserved for Paradyne network engineers Removing a Connection Type R to remove a lost connection Type the number of the Connection ID to delete and press Enter Port Administration Type A to display the Port Administration menu Figure 7 13 Port Administration Menu XA CA CACckockckockockockockockockokockockockockockockockock ckockockockockock ckockckckck ck ck ck ck k k k kc kk Port Administration Menu Ck ck oko ko ok ok ck ko ko Sk ck ck ck Sk ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ko ck ck Ck ck ko ck ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko Xx X 1 Set Admin State for all ports 2 Display current Admin State 3 Configure Admin State per portS 4 Restart Endpoint em NOTE These options are only available when you log in at the Network Administrator or Supervisor levels 2000 A2 GB20 10 140 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Setting Admin State Globally 1 Type 1 to enable or disable the admin state for all ports 2 The IAD displays this prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable the admin state or D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to return to the Port Administration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Displaying the Current Admin State Type 2 to display the current admin state by port number The IAD displays the following report 1 DISABLED 2 EN
120. PP Debug Mode When you enable PPP debugging the IAD displays PPP debug messages To enable or disable PPP debugging follow these steps 1 Type E on the Debug menu The IAD displays the PPP debug status PPP Debug Mode is currently DISABLED 2 Type E to enable PPP debugging or type D to disable it The IAD sets PPP debug mode to the setting you entered and displays the Debug menu 41 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling and Disabling STP Debug Mode When you enable STP debugging the IAD displays STP debug messages To enable or disable STP debugging follow these steps 1 Type S on the Debug menu The IAD displays the STP debug status STP Debug Mode is currently DISABLED 2 Type E to enable STP debugging or type D to disable it The IAD sets STP debug mode to the setting you entered and displays the Debug menu Enabling and Disabling DHCP Client Debug Mode When you enable DHCP Client debugging the IAD displays DHCP Client debug messages To enable or disable DHCP Client debugging follow these steps 1 Type 1 on the Debug menu The IAD displays the DHCP Client debug status DHCP Client Debug Mode is currently DISABLED 2 Type E to enable DHCP Client debugging or type D to disable it The IAD sets DHCP Client debug mode to the setting you entered and displays the Debug menu Displaying Error Dumps This option displays the most recent error encountered during the active session This option is for
121. Remove a connection Port Administration Configure Default Packet Size UPIJA Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the appropriate section All tasks in this section begin at the MGCP NCS Management menu Configuring MGCP Parameters Type C to set the Transmit and Receive parameters for MGCP The IAD can support up to 4 call agents These may be specified via IP address or DNS name 1 The IAD displays the Notified Entity prompt for the first call agent Enter the DNS Name or the IP address for the first Notified Entity Type the DNS name mg1 acme com for example or the IP address of the call agent and press Enter 2 The IAD updates the IP address of the MGCP Call Agent which controls call setup and teardown for all call features under MGCP for the entity increases the entity index by one and displays the prompt Complete entries for call agents 2 3 and 4 or press Enter to leave the agent unconfigured 3 The IAD displays the listening port prompt Enter the listening port of the Notified Entity Type the port number usually 2427 or 2727 that the call agent is listening on and press Enter 4 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt MGCP Signaling parameters ATM VPI VCI 0 40 Connection 0 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the signaling interface for MGCP to use typica
122. Rx Bytes Rx Error Cells Rx Error Frames Tx Frames Tx Cells Tx Bytes Tx Discarded Tx OverFlow Tx UnderFlow Tx Inactive Rx Inactive CRC 32 Errors The size Reassembly Timeouts Frames too Long Description Max PDU size limitation for this AAL connection No of frames received No of AAL cells received Total data in bytes received No of received cells are dropped due to Connection is not established closed Could not allocation internal cell buffer Value of STF Start Field in header is incorrect Cells Overflow the internal queue for storing the cell reaches it maximum size Cells Re Assembly Errors CRC checksum errors No of received frames are dropped due Could not allocation internal cell buffer Cells Overflow the internal queue for storing the cell reaches it maximum size Frames re assembly errors Re assembly timeout CRC checksum errors Total frames transmitted Total cells transmitted Total data transmitted in bytes No of discarded transmitting cells due to Could not allocation internal cell buffer Cells Overflow the internal queue for storing the cell reaches it maximum size Connection is not established closed Transmitting frame is empty size of frame is larger than the PDU size Transmitted Cells Overflow The internal SAR transmitting queue for storing the cell reached its maximum size 64 so it can not hold more outgoing cell Out of
123. SLAM controls fragmentation settings and IAD configuration is not required If you selected Configure CopperMountain Fragmentation the IAD displays the CopperMountain FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Figure 4 63 FRF 12 Configuration Menu for CopperMountain Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CA CA PA KA KA KA AG KA X FR FRF 12 Configuration ck ckckckckckck ckckckckckockckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk 1 Enable Disable CuMtn Fragmentation 2 Set Real Time DLCI Type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling Coppermountain Fragmentation 1 Type 1 to enable or disable CopperMountain fragmentation The IAD displays the status and a prompt CuMtn Fragmentation is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable CopperMountain fragmentation Type D to disable it 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Setting Real Time DLCI 1 Type 2 to set up the IAD for real time DLCI 2 The IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation Select Port 1 8 92 February 2004 Type the port number corresponding to the DLCI you want to set to real time 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF
124. Signal Frames No of Seconds of CRC Errors counts No of Minutes of CRC Errors counts Total Overall Failure Frames Count of Local Near End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Local Near End LOS Loss of Signal Frames Count of Remote Far End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Remote Far End LOS Loss of Signal Frames Current status of the ADSL standard in use 2000 A2 GB20 10 214 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 POTS Statistics Report Table 12 24 POTS Statistics Report Parameter Line X Active Inactive Buffers Rcvd Buffers Sent Discarded Underrun Description Current status of line X Active Phone line connection is up Inactive Phone line connection is down No of packets received from this POTS line No of packets sent to this POTS line Discarded packets due to Jitter Buffer Overrun The internal Jitter Buffer is full and could not allocate a new free packet buffer Discarded packets due to there are no packets waiting in the Jitter buffer 215 February 2004 BRI Statistics Report Table 12 25 BRI Statistics Report Parameter D Channel Active Inactive Frames Rcvd Frames Sent Rx Overflow RFO Rx Invalid Frames Rx Overflow RDO Rx CRC Errors Rx Aborted Tx Underrun Tx Collision B Channel Buffers Rcvd Buffers Sent Discarded Underrun Description The status of this D Channel Active The connection is up Inacti
125. Size of the IP header is less than 20 bytes Size of IP header is larger than packet size IP packet size is larger than internal packet buffer Value of Protocol Type field in IP header is unrecognized 188 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 4 IP Statistics Report Parameter with zero TTL fragments received fragmented packets reassembled fragments discarded Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors destinations found unreachable fragments sent packets fragmented fragmentation failures Description Value of TTL in the IP header reaches zero Value of Fragment field in the IP header is on No of reassembled fragmented packets No of discarded fragmented packets Total IP packet sent Total transmitted IP packet discarded due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffer etc Total transmitted IP packet being discard due to internal errors Destination IP address could not be reached for outgoing packet Total fragmented sent Total outgoing IP packet being fragmented Total fragmentation failures for outgoing IP packets PIM Statistics Report To display the PIM Statistics report type P on the Network Statistics menu The PIM Statistics report displays detailed information about PIM Protocol Independent Multicast packets sent and received Table 12 5 PIM Statistics Report Parameter Descriptio
126. Supervisor Password 5 Change Primary RADIUS Server Address 6 Change Primary RADIUS Encryption Secret 7 Change Secondary RADIUS Server Address 8 Change Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret 9 Display RADIUS Configuration 2 Type 2 3 or 4 to change the password for the selected level 3 Enter the password for the current level 4 Enter the new password after the prompt or press Enter to enter a null password 5 Enter the new password or Enter again to confirm the change The IAD immediately updates the password The next time you log in at that level the new password will be in effect NOTE You cannot use the Escape key to exit the password update command To exit deliberately enter an incorrect password at the confirmation step or reset the IAD 2000 A2 GB20 10 24 February 2004 mm 2000 A2 GB20 10 Changing the User Level User ID To change the user ID for the User security level the only security level that allows the user ID to be changed follow these steps 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu 2 Type 1 to change the user ID for the User security level Enter new User ID up to 17 characters gt 3 Type the new User ID and press Enter The IAD informs you that the user ID has been updated 4 Reset the IAD page 14 Including User ID and Passwords in Config Files If you create master configuration files for distribution to multiple IADs you m
127. T Timeouts page 173 Configuring the NAT port range page 174 Configuring the NAT Alias Entry page 175 Displaying NAT Statistics page 176 Displaying the NAT Connection Table page 177 Displaying NAT Connection Details page 177 Displaying the NAT Local Server Table page 179 Displaying the NAT Alias Table page 179 Deleting an IP Address from NAT Tables page 179 Deleting a NAT Local Server Entry page 180 Deleting a NAT Alias Entry page 180 2000 A2 GB20 10 169 February 2004 The NAT Configuration Menu int 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling and managing NAT involves several tasks These are all displayed and accessed on the NAT Configuration menu which you display by typing N on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the NAT Configuration menu Figure 11 1 NAT Configuration Menu Ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK KKK KKK KKK NAT Configuration Menu ck ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA A KA KA KB MX Enable Disable NAT Debug Messages Enable Disable NAT Translation by Port Configure NAT TCP Timeout Configure NAT UDP Timeout Configure NAT Port Range Configure NAT Local Server Entry Configure NAT Alias Entry Display NAT Statistics Display NAT Connection Table Display NAT Connection Details Display NAT Local Server Table Display NAT A
128. TCP UDP ICMP or TCP only Filter Destination Port Low Filter Destination Port High Filter Destination IP Low Address Filter Destination IP High Address Editing a Filter in the Buffer To edit a filter currently stored in the buffer follow these steps 1 On the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu type E to edit the filter 2 Follow the IAD messages to enter values page 112 3 When you enter the last parameter the IAD displays the summary information and saves the configuration The IAD displays the IP Filter Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish IP filter configuration Deleting a Filter from the Buffer To delete a filter currently stored in the buffer type x The IAD deletes the filter from the buffer and displays the IP Filter Configuration menu 114 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Deleting an IP Filter To delete a filter from the IP Filter table toggle input or output filters Option T on the IP Filtering Configuration menu and follow these steps 1 Onthe IP Filtering Configuration menu type x to select Delete one filter of the chosen type 2 The IAD displays the filter table for this interface and prompts for a filter number to delete T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low
129. TE packets Received No of compressed TCP packets received No of compressed UDP packets received No of compressed RTP packets received No of FULL_HEADER packets received No of CONTEXT_STATE packets received Incorrect Sequence Numbers by Packet Type TCP packets with wrong sequence number UDP packets with wrong sequence number RTP packets with wrong sequence number Average Header Sizes Ave sent TCP header Ave sent UDP header Ave sent RTP header Ave received TCP header Ave received UDP header Ave received RTP header No of compressed TCP packets received with bad sequence number No of compressed UDP packets received with bad sequence number No of compressed RTP packets received with bad Sequence Number The average size of the TCP header sent The average size of the UDP header sent The average size of the TCP header sent The average size of the TCP header received The average size of the UDP header received The average size of the RTP header received 203 February 2004 Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 PPP Statistics Report This report is available when ATM PVC Encapsulation Type RFC 2364 is selected Table 12 17 PPP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received Total PPP packets received discarded for various Discard received packets due to reasons Could not allocate PPP packet from internal ueue Discarded all non LCP
130. You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the SDSL interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu JF2104 This section is only for configuring the SDSL WAN interface JF2104i on the JF2104 JF2104i and JF2108 JF2108 Figure 4 13 G2237 xDSL Configuration Menu XCkCckckckckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CA KA A A KA KA KA A Kk kx ok ok G2237 xDSL Configuration ck ckckckckckck ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ACA ACA Ck ck ck ck kk Current Interface Type is SDSL Mode CPE Rate Mode NOKIA AUTO CYCLE Line Rate 88K Debug DISABLED Select xDSL Interface Type Select CPE CO Mode Enable Disable Adaptive Rate Mode Select Line Rate Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages Du 0 NP Selecting CPE or CO Mode 1 Type 2 to display the Configure CPE CO Mode menu Figure 4 14 Configure CPE CO Mode Menu ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckockockockck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CA A A KA AG X MX Configure CPE CO Mode ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Current Mode CPE 1 CPE 2 CO Type 1 to select CPE or type 2 to select CO mode 2 The IAD sets the mode and displays the me
131. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Xiv February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could effect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with the IAD please contact your service provider for information on obtaining service or repairs The Telephone Company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning No user serviceable parts are contained in this equipment This equipment may not be used for coin service provided by the Telephone Company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs Contact the state Public Utilities Commission or Corporation for information Do not attempt to repair this equipment yourself Industry Canada Notice NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure tha
132. a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not in stalled and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not xiii February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Paradyne could void the user s authority to operate this equipment The JetFusion models below comply with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the bottom of the base of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number REN for the equipment You must upon request provide this information t
133. a JetFusion on direktiivin 1999 5 EC keskeisten vaatimusten ja sen muiden tata koskevien s nn sten mukainen D claration de conformit Par la pr sente Polyspan Ltd d clare que ce JetFusion est conforme aux conditions essentielles et toute autre modalit pertinente de la Directive 1999 5 CE Dichiarazione di conformit Con la presente Polyspan Ltd dichiara che il JetFusion soddisfa i requisiti essenziali e le altre disposizioni pertinenti della direttiva 1999 5 CE Xvi February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Verklaring van overeenstemming Hierbij verklaart Polyspan Ltd dat diens JetFusion voldoet aan de basisvereisten en andere relevante voorwaarden van EG richtlijn 1999 5 EG Declarac o de Conformidade Atrav s da presente a Polyspan Ltd declara que este JetFusion se encontra em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposic es relevantes da Directiva 1999 5 CE Declaraci n de conformidad Por la presente declaraci n Polyspan Ltd declara que este JetFusion cumple los requisitos esenciales y otras cl usulas importantes de la directiva 1999 5 CE verensst mmelsef rklaring Polyspan Ltd f rklarar harmed att denna JetFusion verensst mmer med de v sentliga kraven och vriga relevanta stadganden i direktiv 1999 5 EG Xvii February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 1 Introduction This chapter introduces the JetFusion Integrated Access Devices IAD and describes their ha
134. a prompt Enter Client entry number to delete 1 10 gt Type the number of the client entry to delete and press Enter The IAD deletes the client entry from the table and saves the new configuration Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Type y to delete a DHCP Assignment Entry 1 The IAD prompts you for the DHCP entry index number to delete Enter DHCP entry index number 1 4 gt Type the index number to delete and press Enter The IAD deletes the assigned IP address from the Display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses command and saves the new configuration 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect 162 February 2004 10 Multicast Configuration Multicast point to multipoint is a communication feature that allows a source host to send a message to a group of destination hosts Multicasting reduces traffic on the local network by sending only one multicast packet out to a higher bandwidth relay point Multicasting differs from broadcasting in that a receiver must join a multicast group in order to receive group messages Each multicast group has its own group address which is a Class D IP address 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 This chapter contains the following topics Enabling and Disabling Global IP Multicasting page 164 Configuring PIM Dense Mode by Port page 164 Adding and Changing the Multicast Route Source page 166 Displaying IGMP Groups page 166 Displaying the
135. addresses as well as two port numbers The addresses specify the two routers at each end while the two port numbers ensure the unique identification of each router pair When the IAD sends TCP or UDP connection from a local port to an Internet port it changes the sent IP address to the address of the Internet port Similarly it changes the TCP or UDP connection port number to a unique value within the NAT port range You can display the NAT settings with the Display NAT Local Server Table command am NOTE Ensure that the NAT port range does not include any ports that use applications such as HTTP TFTP and so on To configure the NAT port range 1 Type R on the NAT Configuration menu to select the Configure NAT Port Range 2 The IAD displays the low end port range prompt Enter Low End of NAT Port Range 5000 65534 50000 Type the low end value and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the high end port range prompt Enter High End of NAT Port Range 50000 65534 50000 Type the high end value and press Enter 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the NAT Configuration menu 5 Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish configuring NAT 2000 A2 GB20 10 174 February 2004 Configuring Each NAT alias entry allows a device on the LAN inside of NAT to be accessible from the Internet via a unique IP addres
136. age 53 Selecting the Physical Interface page 55 Configuring the GSHDSL Interface page 56 Configuring the SDSL Interface page 60 Configuring the ADSL Interface page 64 Setting the Interface to T1 or E1 page 65 Configuring the T1 Interface page 66 Configuring the E1 Interface page 71 Configuring ATM PVCs page 75 Configuring ATM Options page 84 Configuring Frame Relay DLCIs page 86 Configuring Frame Relay Options page 90 Using the Quick Configure Option page 95 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input it displays the default or current value in parentheses To conveniently accept this value just press Enter To set up the IAD for voice and data operation you must perform at least these basic tasks Select ATM or Frame Relay as the datalink protocol page 53 For ATM protocol configure ATM PVCs page 75 and ATM options page 84 For Frame Relay protocol configure Frame Relay DLCIs page 86 and Configure Frame Relay options page 90 Configure the WAN interface for your IAD following For channelized T1 set up voice and data circuits page 54 Configure the voice path Voice Path Configuration on page 127 Use the flowcharts below to plan your tasks for configuring either xDSL or T1 E1 based on your wide area networking requirements 48 February 2004 Figure 4 1 xDSL WAN Configuration Flowchart Changing factory
137. al LAN connection on the Ethernet port LAN ACT Flashes when there is activity on the Ethernet port WAN LINK Flashes as the IAD is establishing a link and illuminates solid when there is a proper connection on the DSL WAN port and synchronization has been achieved VOICE Illuminates when there is activity on the voice ports When connected to a Jetstream Voice Gateway it remains lit and blinks when there is activity DCE LINK Illuminates when there is a link between the IAD and data communications equipment DCE DCE ACT Illuminates or blinks when there is activity on the DCE link Rear Panel Connectors On the rear panel the IAD contains several connectors The WAN connectors vary by IAD both are present but one has a permanently attached metal shield to prevent use Figure 1 5 16 24 Port IAD Back Panel On Off Ethernet Switch RJ 45 Jack Universal Serial Interface DB 25 AC Power WAN Console Line Telephone Lines Input Modules DB 9 RJ 21X Jack RJ 45 or RJ 48C Jack AC Power Connects the IAD to an AC outlet of 108 130 volts via an AC power cord 10 100Base T Ethernet Port Connects the IAD to the local area network using a CAT 5 straight through Ethernet cable or directly to a PC for accessing via Telnet using a cross over cable customer supplied WAN Interfaces Depending on the IAD WAN interfaces include the following 11 E1
138. ame on a particular interface The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt DMA underrun Discarded outgoing packets because there are no packets waiting in the buffer No of transmitted packets after an error occurred 213 February 2004 G7070 ADSL Statistics Report Table 12 23 G7070 ADSL Statistics Report Parameter Operational Seconds Downstream SNR Margin Downstream Attenuation Upstream Attenuation Near End FEC i Near End CRC i Near End SEF Near End LOS Far End FEC f Far End CRC f Far End SEF Far End LOS Near End CRC Last Near End CRC Last Failure Counters Overall Local SEF Local LOS Remote SEF Remote LOS ADSL Standard Description Total kernel time link went operational in Seconds Current rate of the Downstream SNR Signal to Noise Ration Margin Current rate of the Downstream Attenuation Current rate of the Upstream Attenuation Count of the Near End FEC Forward Error Correction Count of Near End Interleaved symbols with CRC errors Count of Near End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Near End of LOS Loss of Signal Frames Count of Far End FEC Forward Error Correction Count of Far End Interleaved symbols with CRC errors Count of Far End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Far End of LOS Loss of
139. ant to allocate more circuits Do you want to continue allocating new chunks y n Type Y to repeat these steps or N to continue The IAD asks you to select the signaling protocol for voice Enter the signaling protocol on voice channels 1 Loop Start 2 Ground Start Opt Selection Not Implemented 3 Immediate Start Opt Selection Not Implemented 4 Wink Start Opt Selection Not Implemented Enter Selection Type the option for the signaling protocol and press Enter If you assigned one or more data channels the IAD asks you to select the datalink protocol for those channels Enter the protocol on the selected data channels 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay Enter Selection Type 6 for ATM or 7 for Frame Relay The IAD displays the current datalink protocol saves the selection and displays the current channel settings Press Escape to return to the menu and continue WAN configuration On all IADs except the JF2100 series the WAN interface is fixed On JF2100 IADs you may select G SHDSL or SDSL as the interface JF2104 This section is for selecting either G SHDSL or SDSL as the JF2104i WAN interface on the JF2104 JF2104i and JF2108 JF2108 55 February 2004 Configur ing the G SHDSL Interface 2000 A2 GB20 10 1 Type 1 Configure Physical Interface to display the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu Figure 4 8 G2237 xDSL Configuration menu ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck
140. arger than frame unopen ports Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal destination port Total UDP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resource kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to other reasons listed in the following Destination Port field value in UDP header is zero Checksum field value in UDP header is incorrect Size of UDP header is less than 8 bytes Packet size is less than the UDP header size Packet is larger than the internal packet buffer Total UDP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Destination Port field value in UDP header is illegal Clearing Network Statistics To clear network statistics type Z on the Network Statistics menu The IAD displays the Clear Network Statistics menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 192 February 2004 Interface Statistics Reports am 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 12 3 Clear Network Statistics Menu Clear ICMP Statistics Clear IGMP Statistics Clear IP Statistics Clear PIM Statistics Clear TCP Statistics Clear UDP Statistics CHUHQA To permanently reset statistics for a specific protocol type the option The IAD
141. arranted to be free from manufacturer s defects for the period of one year from the date of original purchase Some paragraphs display a symbol in the margin These paragraphs contain important notes or warnings or information that is specific to one or more IADs NOTE Information in this style of paragraph is special information you should be aware of as you proceed with the task at hand CAUTION Information in this style of paragraph indicates important personal safety information you should heed or voice operations that may be interrupted if you continue JF2104 This paragraph alerts you to information that is specific to one or more IADs listed immediately to the left of the text FCC Notice All JetFusion products except the JF2004 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a Commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The JF2004 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
142. ate timer value is for listening or learning states and counts down from the forward delay time to zero The hello timer value is valid only if the active port is the Root Bridge of the network It counts down from the hello time to zero Root priority priority of the root bridge on the network ID Ethernet MAC address of the root bridge on the network Press any key to return to the Reports menu Type P on the Reports menu to display information about PPP authorization entries If no PPP authorization entries have been created the IAD advises you by displaying this message No PPP Authorization Entries Configured 218 February 2004 System Uptime Report Memory Statistics Reports 2000 A2 GB20 10 Otherwise the following information is displayed for each entry Table 12 30 PPP Authorization Report Parameter Description Authorization type None Password Authentication Protocol PAP Client PAP Server IChallenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP Client CHAP Server Slot Interface Port active slot for the PPP interface Userid Password Peer Name values for the PPP interface Press any key to return to the Reports menu Type U on the Reports menu to display the amount of time elapsed since the IAD was reset The system has been running for 11 hours 45 minutes 26 seconds Press any key to return to the Reports menu Type O on the Reports menu to display the Memory Sta
143. ation Enabling and Disabling Dialed Digit 1 Type D to enable or disable dialed digit by toggling the state 148 February 2004 Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a message indicating that dialed digit will be enabled or disabled after reset 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Setting ATM Pace Control Manually Type A to set ATM Pace Control manually The IAD displays this menu Figure 7 24 Manual ATM Pace Control Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKK ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK Manual ATM Pace Control A CACACckCckCckckckockockockockockockckckck ck ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Manual ATM pace control is disabled Audio bit rate margin is 0 Minimum signaling bit rate is Obps P Manual ATM Pace Control A Audio Bit Rate Margin M Minimum Signaling Bit Rate Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Manual ATM Pace Control 1 Type P to enable or disable pace control 2 The IAD displays Manual ATM pace control disabled E D 3 Type E to enable pace control or D to disable pace control 4 You must reset the IAD page 14 before this change takes effect Setting the Audio Bit Rate Margin 1 Type A to set the audio bit rate margin 2 The IAD displays Audio bit rate margin 0 3 Enter the new bit rate margin 0
144. ation menu type 6 to select Configure EmptyCells 2 The IAD displays the following instructions Empty Cells are currently IDLE Enter 1 for IDLE cells or 2 for UNASSIGNED cells Type 1 to select Idle cells or type 2 to select Unassigned cells 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish ATM configuration To configure Frame Relay DLCIs type 3 on the WAN Configuration menu The IAD displays the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu Figure 4 56 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk FR DLCI Config Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Add New DLCI Modify Existing DLCI Delete DLCI Show Current DLCIs BUNE To perform these tasks type the option and proceed to the corresponding section The tasks in this section are described beginning at the FR DLCI Configuration menu Adding a New DLCI Adding a DLCI on page 88 86 February 2004 am 2000 A2 GB20 10 Modifying an Existing DLCI Modifying a DLCI on page 87 Deleting a DLCI Deleting a DLCI on page 90 Showing Current DLCIs page 90 You may configure up to 8 DLCIs on the IAD NOTE Before you configure DLCIs you must first set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay If option 3 on the WAN Configuration menu displays Configure PVCs instead of Configure DLCIs your datal
145. ault setting per port Type the option for the task to perform Proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Echo Cancellation Globally 1 Type 1 to enable or disable echo cancellation for all ports 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable echo cancellation for all ports or D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Displaying Echo Cancellation Settings Type 2 to display the echo cancellation setting on each port The IAD displays the following report 134 February 2004 Setting Loop Gain Y 2000 A2 GB20 10 1 DISABLED 2 ENABLED 3 DISABLED 4 DISABLED Press any key to return to the Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configuration menu Enabling and Disabling Echo Cancellation for all Ports 1 Type 3 to enable or disable echo cancellation for a specific port 2 The IAD displays the port prompt Select Line 1 8 Type the port number to set 3 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable echo cancellation or D to disable it 4 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration If the IAD feeds telephone circuits into a legacy PBX or other eq
146. ay include the userid and passwords directly in the configuration file to reduce configuration tasks NOTE When the user ID and passwords are stored in a configuration file the IAD saves the configuration file immediately upon rebooting without requiring the log on process The userid and passwords are stripped from the configuration file before saving to prevent a security risk Using a text editor update the config file by adding the following attributes in the user category userid string password string netman password string support password string The password parameter is for user level access netman password is for network administrator level access and support password is for supervisor level access 25 February 2004 RADIUS Server Settings int int 2000 A2 GB20 10 You can use a RADIUS server to determine the validity of unknown user ID password pairs in your IAD To use a RADIUS server set the following options Change the primary or secondary RADIUS Server Address Change the primary or secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret Display RADIUS Configuration NOTE Paradyne does not provide a RADIUS server You must provide a RADIUS server to use this feature For more information on RADIUS servers see RFC 2865 If you configure a RADIUS server the IAD must be able to successfully connect to the RADIUS Server This requires WAN configuration IP configuration static or default routes a
147. ay is enabled the IAD displays this report 215 Client requests forwarded to DHCP server 1 Client requests dropped 190 Server responses forwarded to DHCP clients 0 Server responses dropped 2 Unknown server responses 7 Server requests timed out Press any key to return to the DNS Client menu when you re done reviewing the information When using NAT on the IAD it is often desired to configure a host behind NAT as a Telnet Server In this case Telnet requests are passed to the host and not handled by the IAD By changing the Telnet port both the host and IAD may be accessed via Telnet To set the port for the Telnet Server follow these steps 1 On the Router Configuration menu type T to select Configure Telnet Server Port 2 The IAD displays the current IP address and a prompt Enter Telnet Server Port 23 Type the new Telnet Server port the default is 23 3 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration IP filtering allows for selective deletion of incoming and or outgoing packets The IAD inspects each packet and based on configured filters allows them to pass or deletes them This feature may be used as a firewall to only allow known good packets to pass though the IAD NOTE Because each packet must be tested against one or more Wi filters
148. ays this prompt for the receive loop Enter Receive Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 4dB 5 Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter The IAD saves the loop gain values and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration 136 February 2004 Setting Country Mode m 2000 A2 GB20 10 Displaying Loop Gain Settings To display information about Loop Gain settings type 2 The IAD displays the loop gain values for each telephone port on the IAD sample shown Port Rx Tx 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 Press any key to return to the menu Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Configuring Loop Gain Setting by Port To set Transmit and Receive Loop Gain values by port follow these steps 1 Type 3 to select Configure Loop Gain setting per port The IAD displays a prompt for the line to configure Select Line 1 8 Type the line number and press Enter 2 The IAD displays this prompt for the transmit loop Enter Transmit Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 2dB Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter 3 The IAD displays this prompt for the receive loop Enter Receive Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 4dB 5 Type the value include a dash
149. bers 1 of 2 Model Description Part Number JF2002 ADSL 2 ports POTS Other Europe 2902 60227 122 JF2002 ADSL 2 ports POTS NA 2902 60227 001 JF2004 ADSL 4 ports POTS Other Europe 2902 30168 122 JF2004 ADSL 4 ports POTS NA 2902 30168 001 JF2004 ADSL 4 ports POTS UK 2902 30168 102 JF2008 ADSL 8 ports POTS Annex B Other 2902 60321 122 Europe JF2008 ADSL 8 ports POTS Annex A NA 2902 60320 001 JF2008 ADSL 8 ports POTS Annex A UK 2902 60320 102 JF2104 SHDSL 4 ports POTS Other Europe 2902 60340 122 JF2104 SHDSL 4 ports POTS NA 2902 60340 001 JF2104 SHDSL 4 ports POTS UK 2902 60340 102 JF2108 SHDSL 8 ports POTS Other Europe 2902 60323 122 JF2108 SHDSL 8 ports POTS NA 2902 60323 001 JF2108 SHDSL 8 ports POTS UK 2902 60323 102 JF2002i ADSL 2 ports BRI Annex A Other Europe 2902 60306 122 JF2004i ADSL 4 ports BRI Annex A Other Europe 2902 60302 122 JF2004i ADSL 4 ports BRI Annex A UK 2902 60302 102 JF2004i ADSL 4 ports BRI Annex B UK 2902 60303 102 JF2004i ADSL 4 ports BRI Annex B Other Europe 2902 60303 122 JF2104i SHDSL 4 ports BRI Other Europe 2902 60301 122 JF2104i SHDSL 4 ports BRI UK 2902 60301 102 JF2208 T1 E1 8 ports POTS NA 2902 60308 001 254 February 2004 2 4 8 Port 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 1 JetFusion IAD Part Numbers 2 of 2 Model JF2216 JF2224 JF2304 JF2308 JF2316
150. bling Spanning Tree by Port page 123 Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Priority page 124 Configuring Spanning Tree Port Priority page 124 Configuring Spanning Tree Hello Time page 125 Configuring Spanning Tree Max Age page 125 Configuring Spanning Tree Forward Delay page 125 Configuring Spanning Tree Path Cost page 125 Deleting a Bridge Forwarding Database Entry page 126 OAR A A A A A A A A A A AR G NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter Y 2000 A2 GB20 10 118 February 2004 Basic Bridge Setup Tasks 2000 A2 GB20 10 Although the IAD is pre configured with bridging enabled you should perform these tasks for your network Enable bridging globally page 121 or by port page 121 Setthe bridge aging timer page 122 Disable RIP poisoned reverse globally page 101 or by port page 101 Enable STP globally page 123 or by port page 123 Use this flowchart to plan your tasks based on your requirements Figure 6 1 Bridge Configuration Task Flowchart Enable bridging by port Enable bridging globally Enable Using spanning tree spanning by port Enable spanning tree globally priority 119 February 2004 Bridge Configura tion Menu int Enabling and Dis abling Bridging m 2000 A2 GB20 10 Configuring the IAD as a bridge invol
151. by typing help at the prompt To display the parameters for a specific command type command followed by a question mark For example set wan ip address Command Line Syntax The command line interface supports the following syntax command required parameters optional parameters For example set wan ip address 192 3 4 5 255 255 255 0 2001 The required parameters are IP address lt 192 3 4 5 gt and netmask lt 255 255 255 0 gt The optional parameters are the slot 2 interface 0 port 0 and connection 1 The command and its parameters are NOT case sensitive Command Example For each command in the interface the following information is provided Description This section describes the command in general Immediately following the description is the command itself along with its required and optional parameters set wan stp bridge on off slot interface port If a command has parameters they are listed individually and described Keywords are listed separated by an OR bar I to indicate one keyword is allowed as well as upper and lower parameter value limits 221 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 on off Keywords to enable on or disable off STP slot Numeric value identifying the connection 0 3 interface Always 0 Discussion This optional section contains detailed descriptions examples if necessary and any limits exceptions or warnings you should be aware of when usi
152. cal Layer Stats and Alarm Log 1 Type P to display the physical layer statistics and the alarm log Error Count Rates Errors s Framing Bit Error Count Rate 4000 CRC Error Count Rate 0 Line Code Violation Count Rate 0 Far End Block Error Count Rate 1000 Rx Loss of Frame Count Rate 0 Change Of Frame Alignment Rate 0 Severely Errored Frame Rate 3 ALARM LOG Last 10 Items Current Time is 1 1 5 elapsed time alarm 0 0 10 RALOS RLOS RLOF SIGFRZ Enter any key to continue paging through the report press Escape to cancel and return to the menu You may configure up to 8 ATM PVCs on the IAD To configure create and manage PVCs type 3 on the WAN configuration menu The IAD displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Figure 4 36 ATM PVC Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck ck Ck Ck kk Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck KKK ATM PVC Config Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc ko Add New PVC Modify Existing PVC Delete PVC Show Current PVCs BUNE Type the option to perform a task Proceed to the corresponding section Adding a New PVC page 75 Modifying an Existing PVC page 78 Deleting an existing PVC page 83 Displaying the Current PVCs page 84 NOTE Before you configure PVCs you must first set the datalink protocol to ATM If option 3 on the WAN Configuration menu displays Configure DLCIs ins
153. ce gateway selecting 128 supported 258 Voice Gateway Selection menu 129 voice path configuration generally 128 setup basic tasks 127 Ww WAN connecting 19 connecting to IAD 19 WAN Configuration menu 52 54 65 WAN Configuration menu ATM 53 WAN configuration flowchart for T1 50 WAN configuration flowchart for xDSL 49 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration menu 53 54 WAN interface identifying 51 setting to T1 or E1 65 WAN setup ADSL with ATM 51 basic tasks of 48 E1 with ATM 51 E1 with Frame Relay 51 G SHDSL with ATM 52 SDSL with ATM 52 SDSL with Frame Relay 52 T1 with ATM 51 T1 with Frame Relay 51 warnings regarding use of IAD xii warranty limits of xiii X xDSL configuration flowchart 49 XMODEM to transfer files 43 Z Zero suppression setting for T1 68 Zhone 258 February 2004
154. ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ok kk G2237 xDSL Configuration XCkckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck C Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck A A A A A A A AK kk Current Interface Type is G SHDSL A Mode CPE Rate Mode FIXED Line Rate 88K Debug DISABLED Select xDSL Interface Type Select CPE CO Mode Enable Disable Adaptive Rate Mode Select Line Rate Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages Oi U0NNPDP Selecting the xDSL Interface Type 1 Type 1 to display the G2237 xDSL Interface Type menu Figure 4 9 G2237 xDSL Configuration menu KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ko ko ko ck ok ko ko ck ck ck ko ck ck ck ko ko ko ko ko A kx x Configure xDSL Interface Type ck ck ck ck ckckck ck ckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Current xDSL Interface Type G SHDSL 1 G SHDSL Annex A U S 2 G SHDSL Annex B Europe 3 SDSL Type the option to select G SHDSL Annex A for operation in U S Annex B for operation in Europe or SDSL 2 The IAD sets the interface type and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the xDSL Configuration menu 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish WAN configuration e The tasks described in this section all begin on the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu The tasks are described so you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finis
155. ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck AAL2 LES Manual Configuration OACkCkCckckckckckockockockockockockckckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck kk P Enable Disable Ports Set CAS refreshing rate Enable Disable idle CAS refreshing Change Max CPS SDU Size 45 64 Octets Set Combine Use Timer Enable Disable User State Control Enable Disable Dialed Digit Manual ATM Pace Control PUGHHNHYW Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Ports 2000 A2 GB20 10 147 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 3 4 Type P to enable and disable ports The IAD displays the port control prompt Port Control x 10011001 Enter a zero 0 in each port location to disable the port enter a 1 in each port location to enable the port Press Enter to complete the step The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Setting the CAS Refresh Rate 1 2 3 4 Type R to set the CAS refresh rate The IAD displays this prompt New CAS refreshing rate in seconds 0 to DISABLE Enter a zero 0 to disable CAS refresh or enable CAS refresh by entering a non zero refresh rate value The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu You must reset the IAD page 14 before enabling Idle CAS refresh Enabling and Disabling Idle CAS Refreshing 1 4
156. ckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ckckck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ACA A A A KC k ko kok Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu 5 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish PVC configuration 2000 A2 GB20 10 82 February 2004 Setting up AAL2 LES 1 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile Format menu Figure 4 51 AAL2 Audio Profile Format Menu KEKKEKKKKKKKKKKEKKEKKKEKKKKKKKKEKKK ck ck KKK AAL2 Audio Profile Format ck ckckckck ck ck ckckckckckockckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK Current Audio Profile Format NONE 1 ITU 2 ATM Forum To select ITU type 1 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile menu with available options Figure 4 52 AAL2 Audio Profile Menu ck ckckckckck ck ckck ckckckockckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck AAL2 Audio Profile ACkCckck Kockckocko ckockockock ck kockockock ck KEK KKK kockock ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Current Audio Profile NONE 9 ATM Forum 9 44 octets G 711 64 A ATM Forum 10 44 octets G 711 64 G 726 32 B ATM Forum 11 40 octets G 711 64 G 726 32
157. contains commands to display statistical information about the packets handled by the IP routing engine and to clear network statistics for specific protocols Type N on the Reports menu to display the Network Statistics menu 184 February 2004 Figure 12 2 Network Statistics Menu C Display G Display I Display P Display T Display U Z Display Clear a ICMP Statistics IGMP Statistics IP Statistics PIM Statistics TCP Statistics UDP Statistics Network Statistic To display a specific report enter the option For detailed information about each report in the Network Statistics menu or to clear network statistics proceed to the appropriate section 99999 ICMP Statistics Report ICMP Statistics Report Table 12 2 following IGMP Statistics Report Table 12 3 on page 187 IP Statistics Report Table 12 4 on page 188 PIM Statistics Report Table 12 5 on page 189 TCP Statistics Report Table 12 6 on page 190 UDP Statistics Report Table 12 7 on page 192 Clearing Network Statistics Clearing Network Statistics on page 192 To display the ICMP Statistics report type C on the Network Statistics menu The ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Statistics report displays details about ICMP received packets sent packets and queries reports and messages sent and received Table 12 2 ICMP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information pack
158. cs 242 SDSL auto cycle speed table 63 SDSL Configuration menu 61 SDSL Diagnostics menu 242 SDSL interface mode setting 63 SDSL interface configuring 59 SDSL speed setting for IMAS DSLAM 63 SDSL speed setting manually 63 security level default passwords for 24 privileges 23 Select Tx Clock Source menu 70 Serial Statistics report 207 set bridge global CLI command 224 set bridge stp global CLI command 225 set dhcp server dns CLI command 225 set dhcp server domain CLI command 225 set dhcp server enable CLI command 225 set dhcp server gateway CLI command 225 set dhcp server netbios CLI command 225 set dhcp server range CLI command 226 set dhcp server subnet CLI command 225 set dns server address CLI command 226 set ip default route CLI command 226 2000 A2 GB20 10 277 set ip route CLI command 226 set lan bridge CLI command 227 set lan ip address CLI command 227 set lan rip CLI command 228 set lan stp bridge CLI command 228 set mgcp bracketing CLI command 228 set mgcp listening port CLI command 228 set mgcp signaling connection CLI Command 229 set mgcp signaling port CLI Command 229 set mgcp signaling tos CLI Command 229 set mgcp voice connection CLI Command 229 set mgcp voice tos CLI Command 230 set nat CLI Command 230 set sds speed CLI Command 231 set system defaults CLI Command 231 set wan atm ppp auth CLI Command 231 set wan atm vc CLI Command 232 set wan datalink CLI Command 233 set wan framerelay CLI Command 233 set wa
159. cs and the alarm log Error Count Rates Errors s Framing Bit Error Count Rate 1000 CRC Error Count Rate 333 Line Code Violation Count Rate 0 Rx Loss of Frame Count Rate 0 Change Of Frame Alignment Rate 0 Severely Errored Frame Rate 3 ALARM LOG Last 10 Items Current Time is 1 1 5 elapsed time alarm 0 0 10 RYEL RALOS RLOS RLOF SIGFRZ Enter any key to continue paging through the report press Escape to cancel and return to the menu Configur The tasks described in this section all begin on the E1 Configuration ing the E1 menu The tasks as described so you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as Interface necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the E1 interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the E1 Configuration menu Figure 4 30 E1 Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck El Configuration Menu KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK okckockock ck ckckckock ok ckckck ck kckck ck ko ck ck ck ck kk Select Frame CRC4 Mode Select Transmit Line Build Out Configure S Bits Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Clock Source Change to T1 Mode Display Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log Dornan WE Selecting Frame CRC4 Mode 1 Type 1 to select Frame CRC4 Mode and di
160. d PVCs Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 3 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 3641 UBR 2 100 39 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 4 CBR Total 3645 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 4830 cps When you re done viewing the list press any key to return to the ATM PVC Configuration menu To configure ATM options type 4 to display the ATM Configuration menu Figure 4 54 ATM Configuration Menu Xkckckckckckckckckckockckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ATM Config Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Configure Payload Scrambling Configure F4 OAM VPI Configure F4 OAM Type Display F4 OAM Configuration Send OAM Loopback Configure EmptyCells Au PWN EP To perform these tasks type the option and proceed to the corresponding section The tasks in this section are described beginning at the ATM Configuration menu Configuring Payload Scrambling following Configuring F4 OAM VPI page 85 Configuring F4 OAM Type page 85 Displaying F4 OAM Configuration page 86 Sending OAM Loopback page 86 Configuring EmptyCells page 86 C e e e E a Configuring Payload Scrambling You must enable payload scrambling which is disabled by default for the IAD to connect to a DSLAM that uses payload scrambling To enable or disable payload scrambling 84 February
161. d for connection to a Coppercom Voice Copper Gateway option V on the VoicePath Configuration menu P V type E on C Call the Main menu to display the CopperCom Call Control menu om ca Control Figure 7 14 CopperCom Call Control Menu XACkCkCck kck kcko kockokock kockockock ck ckock ckockockockock ko cko ck ckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk CopperCom Call Control XACkCkCk kCckockocko kockokock kckock ckock ckock kock ckockockock ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck k ck k k k kk S Statistics C Configure D Debug Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying CopperCom Statistics Type S to display the CopperCom Statistics menu Figure 7 15 CopperCom Statistics Menu XOACkCkCk kCck kckokock kock kckckock ck ck ck ck ko kockock ck ckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck k kk CopperCom Statistics KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckck ck ck ck ck k KEKE D Display Statistics C Clear Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying CopperCom Statistics Type D to display CopperCom statistics The IAD displays the following error statistics report HEC Errors 10 CID Errors za Timer Errors 0 Clearing CopperCom Statistics Type c to reset CopperCom statistics The IAD sets the statistics to zero and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the CopperCom Call Control menu CopperCom Conf
162. d press Enter The IAD informs you that the lines are connected and the test is started Lines 1 and 2 are connected together Lines 3 and 4 are connected together 2000 A2 GB20 10 238 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Lines 5 and 6 are connected together Lines 7 and 8 are connected together Hotline test started 6 Press Escape to terminate the test The IAD terminates the test and displays the POTS Diagnostics menu Performing a Ring Test The ring test verifies that POTS device attached may be ringed by the IAD To perform a ring test 1 Type R on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Ring Test 2 The IAD displays this prompt Ring all lines YN or ESC Enter Y to proceed or N or Escape to abort and return to the menu THe IAD displays this prompt Ring lines concurrently or sequentially CS or ESC Enter C concurrent S sequential or Escape Listen for the rings to occur and press Escape to terminate the test The IAD terminates the test and displays the menu Performing a Power Supply Test The power supply test checks the IAD power supply SLIC and CODEC To perform a power supply test 1 Type S on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Power Supply Test 2 The IAD tests each POTS line and reports the status 3 Continue with other tests or press Escape twice to return to the Main menu Performing a Phone Detect Test The Phone Detect test detects POTS devices on each of the voice ports To perform
163. d received packets because a PCB for Transmitted Received Pool Buffers could not be allocated 207 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 19 Serial Statistics Report Parameter bytes sent packets sent discarded TX ring full discarded bad pkt or link not ready discarded TX error Tx Clk glitch Tx underrun CTS lost Description No of Data sent in bytes No of packets sent No of packets discarded because Transmitted Ring Pool is full Discarded received packets due to The status of the interface is not Online Transmitted packet length is larger than interface No of outgoing packet being discarded due to Clock glitch and other transmission errors Total frames discarded on this port due to transmitter clock glitch errors No of times that there are no packets waiting in the Transmitted Ring Buffer Total frames discarded on this port due to transmitter CTS lost errors ATM Statistics Report This report displays basic ATM transport statistics at the cell level for all ports and PVCs Table 12 20 ATM Statistics Report Field The link has been up for X hours X minutes X seconds Cells Rx CLPI Rx OAM Rx EFCI Rx RM Rx Rx Cells Discarded Cells Tx OAM Tx CLPI Tx Description Total time for the current time has been established No of valid ATM cells received No of cells received with CLPI Cell Loss Priority Indication bit is on No of O
164. d trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners 2000 A2 GB20 10 A February 2004 Table of Contents Preface PUCNSN CS ERAT xi COnLGING T HU xi Salegl alls coim aba eee tento xii Product Waafily esie toten rt eitis haresuiceza ra cran etus xiii CC OMVONILIONS ce M E NUS xiii Regulatory Notices ic ciciss teoria ope rta c o doimaceenes xiii Chapter 1 Introduction Dale INICWACES e ea D ante c ta on acf sU eU 2 JetFusion 2 4 8 Port IAD Family esses 2 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators 3 Rear Panel GOMMECIONS lt 4 secca ch oe Rcs eco 4 JetFusion 16 24 Port IAD Family ssseeseesssssss 4 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators 5 Rear Panel COnnectOrS icceeceso ad Rea a nana ged qae eer perse 6 Chapter 2 Quick Start Guide Unpacking the IAD sie p ror io b o EL ena teens 9 Installing the TAD issia uou n Dt 9 Connect via Terminal Emulator esssssssss 10 Setting the Ethernet Port IP Address 12 Resetting the IAD 2s echado dte d eto dada ed ud cdd 14 Connecting via Telnet eeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeee 15 R nnirid Telnet cro rear bean i tera ena dant 15 Using the Menu Interface uncos cocer beth e te etn certe tkt 16 2000 A2 GB20 10 i February 2004 Basic IAD Config trsallOh
165. dat the update will fail Make sure you have assigned a valid IP address and subnet mask and you re on the same subnet as the TFTP Server Use the Ping command to successfully ping the IAD and try again Upon completion the IAD reports the success or failure of these files specifically and then reports the completion of file transfer and resets int Verifying the Upgrade To verify that the files downloaded successfully observe the boot sequence The IAD displays the software version in the banner KEK KK KKK KEKE KKK KEKE KKK KR KEK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KK KKK ck ck ck ko ko ko ck ko ko ko ko RTOS start sequence kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enter i to Inhibit Application Launching only Enter I to additionally Inhibit Initialization minimal startup kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk 2208 JetFusion IAD v3 5 0 lt gt Oct 19 2003 15 33 52 Ackckckckckckck ck ckckckckck ck ck ck ckckck ckck ckockck ck ckckockck ck ckck ckck ck ckck ckckckck kck ck ck ck kk kk You can also display the current configuration page 182 to validate the firmware version 2000 A2 GB20 10 33 February 2004 Setting up The IAD LAN port may be set for full duplex Ethernet operation if your IAD Your LAN is set up as a router Full duplex mode allows simultaneous transmission and receipt of Ethernet packets Connection On the Main menu type 6 Configure LAN to display the LAN
166. ddress basic configuration tasks and restarting the IAD Once you have read this chapter you will be well prepared to use the remaining reference chapters Chapter 3 Administration on page 22 provides information about IAD security configuring Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP upgrading ACOS system utilities and other topics Chapter 4 WAN Configuration on page 48 details how to configure the JetFusion IAD for physical connection to the network T1 E1 and xDSL Frame Relay and ATM and TDM Voice for channelized T1 circuits Chapter 5 Router Configuration on page 96 describes the steps to configure the IAD as a router including setting IP addresses static routes configuring RIP DNS Client DHCP Client and other router settings Chapter 6 Bridge Configuration on page 118 provides details about setting up the IAD as a bridge including setting bridging globally or by port setting the aging timer and enabling Spanning Tree support Chapter 7 Voice Path Configuration on page 127 describes how to set up voice ports for use in various DSLAM and voice gateway environments Xi February 2004 Safeguards 2000 A2 GB20 10 Chapter 8 Firewall Configuration on page 154 provides information about setting up the IAD to perform IP filtering Chapter 9 DHCP Server Configuration on page 155 walks you through the steps required to configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server and client Chapter 10
167. ddress if not already completed page 12 2 Configure each of the WAN options and the DSLAM profile WAN Configuration on page 48 3 Create and configure at least one DLCI page 86 or PVC page 75 for data traffic and set the WAN IP address WAN Configuration on page 48 4 Configure static or default route or enable bridging for all data traffic 5 Create and configure a DCLI page 86 or PVC page 75 for voice where required and select appropriate voice gateway settings 6 Reset the IAD page 14 to enable all configuration changes In this section you ll connect the IAD to the computer and telephone systems the IAD is intended to support Before proceeding make sure that you have an appropriate serial cable for your PC identify the LAN switching equipment where you ll connect the IAD identify the telephone cables and verify that WAN service is installed and configured by the service provider When you ve completed this section reset the IAD so it can synchronize these physical connections Ethernet LAN Connection The Ethernet LAN port on the rear of the IAD is an RJ45 jack for 10 100Base T Ethernet cables If the IAD is intended to act as an Internet gateway for the LAN in the customer s premises connect the IAD to the switch hub or router using an Ethernet straight through cable NOTE To temporarily connect the IAD directly to a PC for Telnet configuration without going through a hub or router be sure to use a
168. ding multiple player IP games or video conferencing you may need to configure the timeout The local server protocol you select determines which timeout to configure TDP and UDP are similar except that TCP tracks TCP clients on a per connection basis and removes them from the table as soon as the connection closes To configure a NAT timeout 1 2 On the NAT Configuration menu page 170 type T to select TCP connections or type U to select UDP connections The IAD displays a TCP or UPD prompt Type the timeout value and press Enter The IAD displays the NAT Configuration menu Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish configuring NAT 173 February 2004 Configuring the NAT Port Range The size of the NAT port range defines the number of simultaneous connections permitted A small port range limits the number of connections Since the range that you assign must be outside the range of assigned ports do not set port ranges under 5 000 Under normal circumstances the port range default setting is adequate However if you interact with products including multiple player IP games or video conferencing you need to configure the port range setting To multiplex several connections to a single destination the IAD assigns all packets unique port numbers Each IP packet starts with a header that contain the source and destination
169. dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 25 5 TCP OH 0 65535 092 100 1 1 255 255 255 255 0 Type the filter number to delete and press Enter 3 The IAD permanently removes the filter from the table and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish IP filter configuration Deleting All Filters of the Chosen Type To delete all filters from the IP Filter table toggle input or output filters Option T on the IP Filtering Configuration menu and follow these steps 1 On the IP Filtering Configuration menu type z to select Delete all filters of the chosen type 2 The IAD displays a confirmation prompt Are you sure you want to delete all filters y n Type v to confirm and press Enter 3 The IAD permanently removes all filters from the table and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish IP filter configuration Showing IP Filtering Statistics To show IP filtering statistics for this interface type S on the IP Filtering Configuration menu The IAD displays the total input and output data packets filtered Filter 0 output hits 0 Total packets filtered input 0 output 0 Press Y to clea
170. e 16 24 Port Plug in the power cord but do not power up the unit Clearance Requirements If you install the IAD horizontally make sure you maintain at least 2 inches of horizontal distance from other IADs or other electronic equipment to ensure adequate ventilation and heat dissipation If you install the IAD 9 February 2004 am Connect via Terminal Emulator Y Y int 2000 A2 GB20 10 vertically ensure at least 3 inches of distance between other IADs or other equipment NOTE 2 4 8 port IADs may be stacked on top of one another when mounted horizontally 16 24 port IADs may be rack mounted Wiring Requirements Make sure that the telephone wiring LAN and WAN cables reach the IAD and can be dressed in a manner that is safe for the wiring does not pull or create lateral stress on the connectors or ports on the rear of the IAD and does not present a trip hazard to personnel working in the vicinity of the equipment Do not connect any cables or wiring at this time The IAD is configured and managed from either the console or Ethernet port Most network engineers use Telnet to access the IAD via Ethernet After you use a terminal emulator program via the console port to set the IP address you may continue to use a terminal emulator via the console port if you choose NOTE After a period of inactivity three minutes by default the IAD automatically terminates console based and Telnet sessions to maintain secu
171. e errors Bad rx OSF sequence errors Bad OSF value errors Receive HEC error S Receive overlap HEC errors Receive CID errors Transmit CID errors Description Discarded packets due to the internal queue reached it maximum size No of STF Start Field parity error received Sequence number in header is incorrect for cells received Value of OSF sequence in header is incorrect for cells received Value of OSF in the header is incorrect Value of HEC Header Error Compression in the header is incorrect HEC Header Error Compression value overlapped Value of CID Channel ID in header received is incorrect Value of CID Channel ID in header sent is incorrect 200 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Cumulative CPCS 2 Statistics Report Table 12 14 Cumulative CPCS 2 Statistics Report Parameter Maximum PDU Size Transmit bytes counter Transmit microcell counter Tx discarded microcells errors Tx too long microcell errors Tx reserved UUI errors Receive bytes counter Receive microcell counter Rx discarded microcells errors Rx too long microcells errors Rx reserved UUI errors Rx reassembly errors Description Maximum CP 5 Rx frame length in bytes without CPCS trailer Total AAL2 Cells sent in bytes Total AAL2 Cells sent No of transmitting cell discarded due to Invalid Microcell Channel The Microcell is empty Length of the cell is large
172. e lt on off gt on off Keyword to enable on or disable off DHCP server Description Sets the DHCP server default IP address set dhcp server gateway lt IP address gt IP address IP address of the DHCP server in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DHCP server default subnet mask set dhcp server subnet lt subnet mask gt subnet mask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 Description Sets the DHCP DNS server IP address set dhcp server dns lt IP address gt IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DHCP NetBIOS server IP address set dhcp server netbios lt IP address gt IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DHCP server domain name set dhcp server domain lt domain name gt domain name Fully qualified domain name 225 February 2004 set dhcp server range set dns server address set ip default route set ip route 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Sets the DHCP server low and high IP address range set dhcp server range low IP address high IP address Low IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 High IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DNS server IP address set dns server address IP address IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the default IP address set ip default route
173. e NAT local server page 172 Configure NAT TCP or UDP timeouts page 173 Configure the NAT port range page 174 When you have completed these four tasks reset the IAD for the new configuration to take effect NAT is now fully operational Enabling Each IAD is configured with NAT disabled To enable NAT translation NAT 1 Type P on the NAT Configuration menu to display Enable Disable NAT Translation by Port Translation 2 If at least one virtual circuit on the WAN exists and the LAN port is also configured with an IP address or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces sample following on this IAD Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort 3 Otherwise the IAD displays the WAN port table and prompt Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 LLC Encapsulation 0 UBR 2 Oo 41 RFC 2364 PPPoATM VC Muxing 1207UBR 3 0 101 RFC 2364 PPPOATM VC Muxing 1207UBR Total 2414 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 1207 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number on which to enable NAT and press Enter 4 The IAD displays the following NAT Translation for this port is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable e 5 Type E to enable NAT or D to disable NAT 6 The IAD saves the setting and displays the NAT Configuration menu 7 Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 8 Reset the IAD page
174. e System Directory MGCP_RG VG 173327 CUCOMCPE VG 16310 CALLCTRL VG 47774 TBCPE VG 20169 DTMF DSP 20046 G726 DSP 18076 CONFIG ST 4076 DEFAULT ST 426 REORDER PCM 838 RELEASE DAT 579 AAL2LES VG 23978 MGCP DSP 21822 BUSY PCM 960 CAS PCM 832 CW1 PCM 543 CW2 PCM 542 CW3 PCM 566 DIALTONE PCM 1378 RCVROFF PCM 1169 RINGBACK PCM 1177 LESELCP ST 768 MSGWAIT PCM 1199 RBK G726 PCM 7089 RECALL PCM 1127 ES ELCP VG 131556 MG RG VG 172026 CUCOM CFG 100 USERPORT ST 160 HS BLCP ST 128 SIP DSP 17520 RBK ALAW PCM 703 SIP VG 23206 AUS 01 NPL 8819 EUR 01 NPL 8006 USA 01 NPL 8787 ES ELCP DBG 690 EVENT LOG 988 AAL2LES CFG 58 Free disk space 263680 bytes 39 February 2004 Copying Files To duplicate a file with a new name follow these steps 1 Typec on the File System menu The IAD prompts for the name of the source file old filename gt 2 Type the name of the existing file including the suffix and press Enter The IAD prompts for the name of the new file new filename gt The IAD copies and saves the file with the new name When the operation is complete the IAD displays the File System menu Renaming Files To rename a file follow these steps 1 Type R on the File System menu The IAD prompts for the name of the file to rename old filename gt 2 Type the new name of the file including the suffix and press Enter new filename gt
175. e Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration m To set idle high voltage for loop start lines POTS only type L to display the Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection menu Figure 7 8 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection Menu Ckckckckckockckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ckck ck ck k ck kk kckck Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection KEKE KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KK KEK KKK KKK ko ko ko ko kockockock kck k 1 Enable Disable Loop Start Idle High Voltage for all ports 2 Display current Loop Start Idle High Voltage settings 3 Enable Disable Loop Start Idle High Voltage Setting per port Type the option for the task to perform Proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Idle High Voltage Globally 1 Type 1 to enable or disable idle high voltage for all ports 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable idle high voltage for all ports or D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Displaying Idle High Voltage Settings Type 2 to display the idle high voltage setting on each port The IAD displays the following report 1 Low Voltage 2 Low Voltage 133 February 2004 Setting Debu
176. e intended to be powered only by the power supply unit provided XV February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 CE Mark These JetFusion products have been marked with the CE mark This mark indicates compliance with EEC Directives 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC 1999 5 EC Warning All JetFusion products except JF2004 are Class A products In a domestic environment these products may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures A full copy of the declaration of Conformity can be obtained from Polyspan Ltd Whichford House Parkway Court Oxford Business Park South Oxford OX4 2JY UK Declaration of Conformity Hereby Polyspan Ltd declares that this JetFusion is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Konformitetserkleering Hermed erklaerer Polyspan Ltd at indest ende JetFusion er i overensstemmelse med de grundl ggende krav og de relevante punkter i direktiv 1999 5 EF Konformitatserklarung Hiermit erklart Polyspan Ltd dass der JetFusion die grundlegenden Anforderungen und sonstige ma gebliche Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG erf llt A noon Xopnp pooonc Alo TOD TAPOVTOS n EtTalpsia Polyspan Ltd SnA vet tt n napoca ovoksur Spoporoyntyc JetFusion mAnpoi tic Baotk g atatthosts Kat GALES Daotk npo no os s tro O ry ag 1999 5 EK Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus Polyspan Ltd vakuuttaa taten ett
177. eceiving from the Internet Connections Number of active TCP UDP and ICMP connections as well as the number created and deleted Total Fragments Total fragments local to internet and internet to local First Fragments Number of first fragments local to internet and internet to local Queued Fragments Number of queued fragments local to internet and internet to local Deleted Fragments Number of queued fragments local to internet and internet to local Fragment Entries Number of created and deleted fragment entries Errors Number of checksum retries and bad packets Total IP packets Number of IP packets reserved addresses and discarded packets 2000 A2 GB20 10 176 February 2004 NAT Connection Table NAT Connection Details 2000 A2 GB20 10 When NAT is enabled you can display the current open connections To display the connection table type c on the NAT Configuration menu The IAD displays the NAT connection table sample TCP 11 22 13 152 23 192 168 1 1 4428 out port 50000 pkts out 13 in 13 state 4 idle 13 If there are no open connections the IAD advises you Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 3 NAT Connection Table Report Entry Description TCP UDP ICMP etc IP address Port IP address plus port number of the foreign device zero if ICMP protocol IP address Port IP address plus port number of the local LAN device zero if ICMP protocol These tw
178. edia statistics reports tistics Media statistics reports display statistical information about the total Reports packets handled Layer 2 on a per port basis Reports on physical connections vary based on the type of connection Reports include Ethernet USI G SHDSL ASDL SDSL ATM and Frame Relay To display specific media statistics select an interface to display the statistics as shown in these steps 1 The IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces doo TIZET 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the interface 2 With the interface chosen the IAD displays the Media Statistics menu NOTE The commands that display on the Network Statistics menu vary based on the WAN module and configuration of the IAD int Figure 12 6 Media Statistics Menu Sample F Display Frame Relay Statistics S Display Serial Statistics C Clear a Statistic To display a specific report enter the option For detailed information about each report in the Media Statistics menu or to clear network statistics proceed to the appropriate section Frame Relay Statistics Report Table 12 2 following Universal Serial Interface Statistics Report Table 12 3 on page 187 ATM Statistics Report Table 12 4 on page 188 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Table 12 21 on page 210 Ethernet Statistics Report Table 12 22 on page 212 G7070 ADSL Statistics Report Table 12 23 on page 214
179. elay Lucent DSLAM 1 2 Type 5 to enable or disable Sync Delay which is paired with Conexant Autobaud mode The IAD Displays the current setting and a prompt SDSL Sync Delay Disabled Conexant AutoBaud Mode is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable Sync Delay and Autobaud mode If you disable Sync Delay you must set the SDSL data rate manually The IAD displays the following prompt Enter SDSL Data Rate kbps Enter the rate 144 to 2320 kbps evenly divisible by 8 and press Enter The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting AccessLan CPE Mode AccessLan DSLAM Type 6 to set the IAD to CPE Mode for connecting to an AccessLan DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu 62 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Setting SDSL Speed for IMAS DSLAM Nortel DSLAM 1 Type 7 to set the SDSL first try speed for connecting to an IMAS Nortel DSLAM 2 The IAD displays the IMAS First Speed Option menu Figure 4 18 IMAS First Speed Option Menu XCkckckckckckck ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Kk ck KCk Ck k ck ck ck k kk IMAS First Speed Option Xckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CA A AG A A A AK kk ok Select First Speed to Try 2320 Kbps 1744 Kbps 1536 Kbps 1152 Kbps 768 Kbps 384 Kbps 192 Kbps 1OYU1 0 NO 2S
180. enu 2000 A2 GB20 10 12 IAD Reports This chapter describes the report subsystem in the IAD The report subsystem allows you to display information about the current configuration of the IAD and collect display and clear statistics on various network and media interfaces You can also display reports about routing and bridging and other reports about the operation of the IAD These reports are often helpful when you are troubleshooting to help you understand what settings may be incorrect or to identify the source of a voice or data network problem This chapter contains information about the following reports Current Configuration Report page 182 Network Statistics Reports page 184 Interface Statistics Reports page 193 Media Statistics Reports page 205 Routing Table Report page 217 ARP Table Report page 194 Bridge Forwarding Database Report page 217 Bridge Status Report page 218 PPP Authorization Entries Report page 218 System Uptime Report page 219 Memory Statistics Reports page 219 999 999 9 9 99 To display the Reports menu type 1 on the Main menu Figure 12 1 Reports Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Reports Menu ck ckckckckck ck ckck ckockckockckockock ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck C Display Current Configuration N Display Network Statistics I Display
181. eployed in an T1 environment 1 Type 8 to switch from E1 to T1 2 The IAD displays this prompt T1 E1 mode is currently El Change T1 E1 mode to T1 Y yes Type Y to confirm The IAD performs the change resets the interface and saves the configuration When the interface is reset the IAD displays the WAN Configuration menu The tasks described in this section all begin on the T1 Configuration menu The tasks as described so you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the T1 interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the T1 Configuration menu JF2208 This section is for configuring the T1 interface on the JF2208 JF2216 or JF2216 IAD 66 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 24 T1 Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckck ck ckckockckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck T1 Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk Ck kk Ck CkCk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck alice 2 5 4 5 Configure 6 Configure 7 Configure 8 Configure 9 Change to Select Frame Mode D4 or ESF Select Transmit Line Build Out Select B8ZS or AMI Loopback Transmit Channels Receive Channels Transmit Clock Source E1 Mode Selecting Frame Mode 1 Mode menu Type 1 t
182. er 5 The IAD prompts you for the subnet mask Current Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Enter new Subnet Mask Type the new subnet mask and press Enter 6 The IAD displays the current domain name and prompt Current Domain name Enter new Domain Name Type the new domain name and press Enter 157 February 2004 Configuring the DHCP Address Range Pool Configur ing a DHCP Client Entry 2000 A2 GB20 10 7 9 The IAD displays the current lease time and prompt Current Lease time is 3600 seconds Enter DHCP Lease Time in seconds Type the new lease time value in seconds and press Enter The IAD displays the NetBIOS Type Configuration menu Current NetBIOS Node Type h node 1 B node 2 P node 4 M node 8 H node Type the option for the NetBIOS node type and press Enter Press Escape to return to the DHCP Server Configuration menu and continue configuring DHCP Server 10 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect You must configure the DHCP address range pool to set the range of IP addresses to return to the DHCP clients Both IP addresses must be on the same subnet To configure the DHCP address range pool 1 2 Type P to select Configure DHCP Address Range Pool The IAD displays the current high IP address and prompt Current High IP address of range pool 0 0 0 0 Enter new High IP address Type the new high IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the current low IP address and pr
183. erCom Call Control managing 142 CopperCom Configuration menu 143 CopperCom configuration 142 CopperMountain CMCP setting 94 CopperMountain fragmentation setting 92 Country Mode Selection menu 138 country mode setting 137 CPCS 2 Statistics report 201 CPE CO mode selecting 58 CPE CO mode setting 59 CPE CO mode setting for SDSL 61 CPEmode setting in AccessLan 62 Current Configuration report 182 D D4 Frame Mode 67 data interfaces supported 2 datalink protocol identifying 51 selecting for WAN 53 DC power adapter 4 Debug menu 41 declaration of conformity xvi default route adding or changing 105 removing 105 default routes generally 103 default values accepting 18 Derived Timing debugging 46 enabling and disabling 46 Derived Timing menu 46 DHCP Address Range Pool configuring 158 DHCP Assign ment Entry deleting 162 DHCP Client enabling or disabling 107 DHCP Client debug mode enabling and disabling 42 DHCP Client Entry configuring 158 DHCP Client Entry deleting DHCP Server DHCP Client Entry deleting 162 DHCP Entry details 162 DHCP Relay configuring 108 enabling or disabling 108 statistics displaying 109 DHCP Relay menu 108 DHCP Server addresses displaying 161 checking for additional 157 configuration generally 156 configuring parameters 157 2000 A2 GB20 10 278 DHCP Address Range Pool for 158 DHCP Assign ment Entry deleting 162 DHCP Client Entry 158 DHCP Debugging 156 DHCP Entry details displaying
184. es the configuration if changed Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Enabling SNMP via IP and EOC Type A to enable SNMP via IP and EOC The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Disabling SNMP via IP and EOC Type B to disable SNMP via IP and EOC The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Configuring the System Contact Type P to configure system contact up to 39 alphanumeric characters 1 The IAD displays the current system contact and prompt System Contact is currently Paradyne Enter new System Contact gt Type the name of the new contact person or department and press Enter 2 The IAD save the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 2000 A2 GB20 10 29 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Configuring the System Name Type N to configure the system name up to 39 alphanumeric characters 1 The IAD displays the current system name and prompt System Description is currently Enter new System Description gt Type the new system name and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue wit
185. eset the IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration Configuring Transmit Clock Source Type 8 to select Configure Transmit Clock Source and display the Select Tx Clock Source menu and status message Figure 4 29 Select Tx Clock Source Menu Xckckckckckck ck ckckckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc k kk Select Tx Clock Source XCkckckckckckckckck ck ckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k kk Tx Clock is derived from Rx clock Slave Mode 1 External Slave Mode 2 Internal Master Mode Type 1 to select external or slave mode or type 2 to select Internal or master mode 7 The IAD saves the configuration and resets the interface 8 Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 9 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration 70 February 2004 Displaying Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log The physical layer statistics displays the T1 error rate in errors per second for the past second An event log up to 5KB is maintained for certain events The time stamp is relative to the last system reset As new events are added older events are discarded when the file size is maximized Events include the start and end of Telnet sessions SNMP access with an invalid community name system reset and system reset from menu command and the WAN link going up or down 1 Type P to display the physical layer statisti
186. est 1 Type o on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select On Off Hook Test The IAD displays the status of the test as it runs in real time Display hook state Legend onhook zoffhook ring ground amp no ring ground flash hook Press a key to exit 12345678 amp 2 Press Enter to terminate the test The IAD displays the POTS Diagnostics menu 241 February 2004 SDSL Diagnostics 2000 A2 GB20 10 To perform SDSL diagnostics type S on the Diagnostics menu JF2304 The SDSL diagnostics menu is only available on the JF2304 JF2308 and JF2308 The IAD displays the SDSL Diagnostics menu Figure 14 3 SDSL Diagnostics Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockockockckck ck ck ckckckckckck ck ck ckckckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck kk SDSL Diagnostics Ck ckckckckckckckckckockckck ck ckckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck kc kk Select Diagnostic Transmit Isolated Pulses Continuous 2 level transmission Continuous 4 level transmission Digital Far Loopback DAN To perform a type of transmission type the option For option P select the level to begin the transmission Press any key to terminate the test 242 February 2004 ISDN BRI Type B to perform BRI Diagnostics Diagnostics JF2004i The BRI diagnostics menu for ISDN testing is available on the JF2104i two ISDN based IADS JF2004i and JF2104i The IAD displays the BR
187. estination address Netmask IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for the host ID Gateway Address IP address of packets sent to destination Interface IP address of outgoing interface Metric number of hops routers required to reach the specified gateway Type static dynamic RIP local 2000 A2 GB20 10 17 February 2004 6 Bridge Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the IAD as a bridge A bridge is a device that connects and passes packets between two network segments that use the same communications protocol A router generally improves overall efficiency for a complex network but a bridge provides better speed and flexibility for the overall network NOTE It is recommended that bridged network architecture be thoroughly understood prior to configuring the IAD Suggested reading Interconnections Bridges and Routers by Radia Perlman Addison Wesley 1992 Bridges operate at the data link layer Layer 2 of the OSI reference model In general a bridge filters forwards or floods an incoming frame based on the MAC address of that frame This chapter contains the following topics int Basic Bridge Setup Tasks page 119 Using the Bridge Configuration Menu page 120 Enabling and Disabling Bridging Globally page 121 Enabling and Disabling Bridging by Port page 121 Configuring the Bridge Aging Timer page 122 Enabling and Disabling Spanning Tree Globally page 123 Enabling and Disa
188. ets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons unrecognized codes bad checksum packets smaller than header redirects from non gateways Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources Total ICMP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded packets due to these reasons Not used Value of the Checksums field in header is incorrect Size of the ICMP header is larger than the packet size ICMP Redirect packet from non gateway Total ICMP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers 2000 A2 GB20 10 185 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 2 ICMP Statistics Report Parameter discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Messages Requests and Destination Unreachables received Time Exceededs received Parameter Problems received Source Quenches received Redirects received Echo Requests received Echo Replies received Timestamp Requests received Timestamp Replies received Information Requests received Information Replies received Other types received Messages Requests and Destination Unreachables sent Time Exceededs sent Parameter Problems sen
189. etwork engineers The tasks described in this section all begin on the SDSL Configuration menu You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the SDSL interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the SDSL Configuration menu JF2304 This section is for configuring the SDSL WAN interface on the JF2308 JF2304 JF2308 or JF2316 JF2316 60 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 16 SDSL Configuration Menu Xkckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KCkCk Ck Ck ck kk kk SDSL Configuration XcCkckckckck ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck Ck Ck ck ck ck kk kk Configuring SDSL Current SDSL configuration CPE AUTO Cycle Bit Order Sign Mag SPEED 1152 Kbps Conexant AutoBaud Disabled Toggle SDSL Mode CO or CBE Set SDSL Speed to Auto Cycle Nokia Set SDSL Speed to Auto Sense Coppermountain Enable Disable Conexant AutoBaud Mode Set SDSL Sync Delay Lucent Set SDSL to AccessLan CPE Mode Set SDSL for IMAS DSLAM Nortel Set SDSL Speed Manually SDSL Interface Mode Bit Order Enable Disable SDSL AutoBaud Debug Messages Enable Disable SDSL Debug Messages Enable Disable Sync Msgs Configure SDSL Auto Cycle Speed Table Preactivation Debug Mode DPOKUPODIARDUBWNE Selecting CPE
190. fferent WAN interfaces and different voice capacity JF2004 and JF2008 IADs provide WAN access over ADSL and telephone support for 2 4 or 8 voice ports JF2004i JF2104i IADs provide voice services and high speed Internet or corporate connectivity over ADSL JF2004i or GSHDSL JF2104i plus 4 ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI ports for up to 8 voice extensions JF2104 and JF2108 IADs provide voice services and high speed Internet or corporate connectivity over G SHDSL and provide 4 or 8 voice ports JF2208 lAD provides WAN access via T1 lines and provides 8 voice ports 2 February 2004 JF2304 and JF2308 IADs provide voice services and high speed Internet or corporate connectivity over SDSL and provide 4 or 8 voice ports Physical and electrical specifications for each IAD are listed in Appendix C JetFusion IAD Specifications on page 254 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators The front panel of the IAD contains several LEDs These LEDS provide general information about the operational status of the IAD Figure 1 2 2 4 8 Port Family Front Panel Indicators POWER LAN LINK LAN ACT WAN LINK VOICE J Table 1 1 LED POWER LAN LINK LAN ACT WAN LINK VOICE 03 17479 2 4 8 Port Family Front Panel Indicators Description Illuminates when the IAD is powered on Illuminates when there is an operational LAN connection on the Ethernet port Flashes when
191. figuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Setting up Proprietary Voice Encapsulation 1 Type 3 to select Proprietary Voice encapsulation over a specific PVC 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Setting up RFC 1483 VC Muxing or RFC 1483 LLC Encapsulation 1 Type 4 to select RFC 1483 encapsulation with VC Muxing or type 5 to select RFC 1483 with LLC encapsulation 2 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Figure 4 43 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu KEKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ATM Service Category Configuration KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kockckck ck ckck ck ck ko ko kock Current Encapsulation NONE 1 CBR 2 UBR 79 February 2004 To select CBR type 1 To select UBR type 2 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 44 ATM PCR Configuration Menu ck ckckckckck ck ckck ckckckockckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck kk ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck oko ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration XCkckckckckckck ck ck ckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck AO A A A A X A kk ok Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to se
192. figuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration 106 February 2004 Displaying the DNS Cache and Statistics To display information about the data in the DNS cache type s When DNS Client is enabled the IAD displays the following information IP Address Timer Host Name 392 Total Requests 117 Requests Serviced From Cache 295 Requests Sent to Server 2 Server Timeouts 293 Server Good Responses 3 Server Not Found Responses 19 Server Unexpected Responses 1 Errors Sending to Server Press any key to return to the DNS Client menu when you re done reviewing the information Configur To enable or disable DHCP Client on an interface follow these steps ing DHCP 1 Type H on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure DHCP Client Client 2 If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC or DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to set 3 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to set and press Enter 4 The IAD displays the status of the slot and port you re sett
193. following report Pinging 91 1 1 217 Size 32 bytes Ping Number 1 of 1 Esc to quit Reply from 91 1 1 217 Size 32 bytes Time 5 mS Ping Summary Packets Sent 1 Packets Received 1 Packets Lost E90 Average Ping Time lt 5 ms 35 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Using Trace Route Use Trace Route to trace the network route to a specified host To run Trace Route follow these steps 1 Type x on the Utilities menu and press Enter 2 Type the IP address or host name to trace and press Enter If you enter a host name you must enter the domain name with the host name For example mycomputer mydomain com The IAD displays each hop as shown in the following sample report Trace Route Results to 91 1 1 1 1 5ms 91 121 1 Setting up the USI Port 16 24 Port The USI port is available only on 16 24 port IADs To set up the USI port follow these steps 1 Type U on the Utilities menu and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the following Enter 1 to enable a USI module as a uart interface on slot 1 Enter 0 to make a USI module a RS530 interface on any slot current 0 Type 1 to select V 35 Type 0 to select RS 530 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 to use the new USI settings Voltage levels for V 35 and RS 530 are different Be sure to use the appropriate cable for the protocol you choose e Configuring the Console Baud Rate To set the console port baud rate for connecting to Hypertermi
194. for negative values and press Enter 4 The AD saves the loop gain values and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue voice path configuration 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration The country mode selection menu allows you to select a national parameter list file for specified countries or regions Each file contains definitions of call progress tones normal and distinctive ring cadences ringer frequency hook flash timings and SLIC settings NOTE The country mode option is only available on IADs with POTS ports This option does not apply to an ISDN based IAD To set a specific country mode type C to display the Country Mode Selection menu which contains commands to set the base country Specifications for each country code includes minimum and maximum flash hook ring frequency receive and transmit gain reference or input impedance and load impedance settings These specifications are listed in Appendix B Country Codes on page 252 137 February 2004 When you select a specific country mode the values are set automatically w JF2008 Ring frequency and impedance settings are automatically gJF2104 applied to the JF2008 JF2104 and JF2108 JF2108 Figure 7 11 Country Mode Selection Menu A CkCACckockckockockockock kock kockckock ck ckck ck ck ckckck ko kock ck ckck ck ck ck ck k ck k k k kk Country Mode Selectio
195. g such as routing information IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol Transport layer multicasting protocol used by IP hosts to register their dynamic multicast group 268 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 membership It is also used by connected routers to discover these group members Inverse ARP Inverse Address Resolution Protocol Enables routers to obtain the IP address of a known Ethernet address of a device associated with a virtual circuit Method of building dynamic routes in a network IP Internet Protocol Part of the TCP IP protocol IP networks are connectionless packet switching networks IP address 32 bit address assigned to hosts using TCP IP An IP address contains four octets separated by periods also known as a dotted quad address Each address consists of a network number an optional sub network number and a host number The network and sub network numbers together are used for routing while the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or sub network IP SNAP Sub network Access Protocol Internet protocol that operates between a network entity in the sub network and a network entity in the end system SNAP specifies a standard method of encapsulating IP datagrams and ARP messages on IEEE networks The SNAP entity in the end system makes use of the services of the sub network and performs three essential functions data transfer connection management and QOS selection LAN
196. g Mode Configur ing Echo Cancella tion 2000 A2 GB20 10 3 Low Voltage 4 Low Voltage Press any key to return to the Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection menu Enabling and Disabling Idle High Voltage for a Specific Port 1 Type 3 to enable or disable idle high voltage for a specific port 2 The IAD displays the port prompt Select Line 1 8 Type the port number to set 3 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable idle high voltage or D to disable it 4 The AD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to display the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Option M Set Debug Mode is reserved for Paradyne network engineers To set echo cancellation default settings type E to display the Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configuration menu Figure 7 9 Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configuration Menu Ckckckckckockckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckck ckck ck ckck KKK KK ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck k ck kk kk kk Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configure Menu KEKE KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK kk ck kk ck kk kk ck ko ko ko Sk ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko koX 1 Set Echo Cancellation default setting for all ports 2 Display current Echo Cancellation default settings 3 Configure Echo Cancellation def
197. g and to debug Derived Timing To configure set derived timing settings type T Telephony Clock Recovery on the Main menu The Telephony Clock Recovery menu supports both Derived Timing software clock aging and Network Timer Reference hardware clock alignment available on some IADs The IAD displays the Derived Timing menu Ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckockockockck ck ck ck ck ck Ck kk Ck Ck Ck CK Ck CK CK CK CR CK CK CA CA A KA KA KB MX Derived Timing ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckck ckckockock ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck 1 Enable Disable Derived Timing 2 Enable Disable Derived Timing Debug Messages Type the option for the task you want to perform and proceed to the section following Enabling and Disabling Derived Timing When Derived Timing is enabled the IAD adjusts its clock source based on the arrival rate of voice packets To enable or disable derived timing follow these steps 1 Type 1 to select Enable Disable Derived Timing The IAD displays the current setting and prompts you to change it Derived Timing Feature is currently DISABLED Enable now Y 2 Type Y to change the current setting The IAD saves the configuration and then displays the Derived Timing menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Main menu 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 Enabling and Disabling Derived Timing Debug Messages When you enable Derived Timing debugging the IAD displays s
198. g distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty m Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc 9 paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE ETC EtherLoop FrameSaver GranDSLAM Hotwire the Hotwire logo Jetstream MVL NextEDGE OpenLane Paradyne the Paradyne logo Paradyne Credit Corp the Paradyne Credit Corp logo Performance Wizard StormPort and TruePut are all registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation ADSL R BitStorm Connect to Success GrandVIEW Hotwire Connected iMarc JetFusion JetVision MicroBurst PacketSurfer ReachDSL Spectrum Manager StormTracker and TriplePlay are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registere
199. ge Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each port on which you want to enable or disable bridging Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration The bridge aging timer establishes the amount of time that the IAD keeps a MAC address in the bridging table When the timer reaches zero the IAD deletes the address from the database updates the timer To set the bridge aging timer 1 2 Type A on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Bridge Aging Timer The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Bridge Aging time in seconds 1 3600 300 Type the aging time range 1 to 3600 seconds and press Enter The IAD updates the timer Press any key to display the Bridge Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration 122 February 2004 Enabling and Dis abling STP Having many bridges creates the potential for network loops A loop presents conflicting information about the segment on which a specific address is located and forces the bridge to forward all data When configuring the IAD as a router Chapter 4 Router Configuration on page 96 you must disable STP both globally and by port NOTE When you enable STP the IAD reconfigures the bridge Ant
200. ges sent IGMP Statistics Report To display the IGMP Statistics report type G on the Network Statistics menu The IGMP Statistics report displays details about IGMP Internet 186 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Group Message Protocol received packets sent packets and queries reports and messages sent and received Table 12 3 IGMP Statistics Report Parameter Received Packet Informati packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons unrecognized codes bad checksums packets smaller than header Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Queries Reports and Mes Membership Query received Ver 1 Membership Report received Ver 2 Membership Report received Leave group message received DVMRP routing message received PIM routing message received Traceroute response received Mcast traceroute messages received Other messages received Queries Reports and Mes Membership Query sent Ver 1 Membership Report sent Description on Total IGMP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded packets due to other reasons Not used Value of the Checksums field in header is i
201. gs involves several tasks These are all displayed and accessed on the Voice Configuration menu displayed by typing P on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the Voice Configuration menu Figure 7 1 Voice Configuration Menu KKK KKK KKK KKK KK ok ck ck Sk oko ko ck ck ko ko kx ko Sk ke kA ko ko kA ko ko ko x Voice Configuration KEK KKK KKK KKK KK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckck ck ck ck ck kk V Set Voice Gateway J Set Jitter Delay D Display Jitter Delay S Set Start Mode Loop Start Ground Start T Set SLIC Control Mode U Set Compander Mode u Law A Law O Set On Hook Transmission Mode of Ground Start Lines L Set Idle Voltage Mode of Loop Start Lines M Set Debug Mode E Configure Echo Cancellation Default Settings G Set Loop Gain C Set Country Mode NOTE You must sign on as Supervisor to configure voice path settings Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to the voice path settings Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect To select a voice gateway 1 Type v on the Voice Configuration menu to select Set Voice Gateway The IAD displays the Voice Gateway Selection menu which contains a list of valid voice gateways for this IAD POTSIADs Figure 7 2 displays the list of valid gateways for all IADs except those with an ISDN telephone interface The order of gateways varies by IAD 128 February 2004 int 2000 A2 GB2
202. guration 28 Start Mode Selection 130 T1 Configuration 65 67 T1 Frame Mode 67 TFTP Server 45 Tx Clock Source E1 74 Utilities 32 Utilities 16 24 port 35 Voice Configuration 128 Voice Gateway Selection 129 WAN Configuration 52 65 WAN Configuration ATM 53 WAN Configuration Frame Relay 54 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration 53 54 57 menu interface exiting 19 MGCP NCS Embedded Client managing 138 MGCP NCS Management menu 139 MGCP NCS parameters 139 February 2004 MGCP NCS Statistics 140 MIBs supported for SNMP 28 model numbers 254 multicast configuring generally 163 enabling or disabling globally 164 IGMP Group displaying 166 PIM neighbor displaying 168 routing source adding 165 routing source displaying 166 routing source removing 166 routing table displaying 167 Multicast Configuration menu 163 multicast route source managing 165 Multicast Routing Source menu 165 N NAT alias entry configuring 175 alias entry deleting 180 alias table displaying 179 Configuration menu 170 configuration generally 170 connection details displaying 177 connection table displaying 177 default settings 170 enabling 171 IP address deleting from table 179 local server entry deleting 180 Local Server Protocol Configuration menu 172 local server table displaying 179 NAT local server configuring 172 port range configuring 174 statistics displaying 176 timeouts configuring 173 Network Interfaces 255
203. gure Spanning Tree Path Cost The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt 125 February 2004 Deleting a Bridge For warding Database Entry 2000 A2 GB20 10 Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port to update 3 If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation aly 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port 4 The IAD displays the current setting and the prompt Enter Path Cost for Slot 1 Port 1 1 65535 32768 400 Type the path cost value and press Enter 5 The IAD updates the configuration 6 Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 7 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration To delete an Ethernet address from the bridge forwarding database follow these steps Type D on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Delete Bridge Forwarding Database Entry 2 The IAD displays the following instructions Enter Ethernet address to delete from bridge database x x 3 Type the MAC address of the Ethernet port and press Enter 4 The IAD deletes the database entry and updates the configuration 5 Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge c
204. h WAN configuration To configure the G SHDSL interface type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu JF2104 This section is only for configuring the GSHDSL Annex A or JF2104i Annex B WAN interface available on the JF2104 JF2108 JF2108 and JF2104i 56 February 2004 Figure 4 10 G2237 xDSL Configuration Menu Xkckckckck ckckckck ck ck ckckckckck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ACA ACC Ck Ck ck ok kk G2237 xDSL Configuration XCkckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ok kk Current Interface Type is G SHDSL A Mode CPE Rate Mode FIXED Line Rate 88K Debug DISABLED Select xDSL Interface Type Select CPE CO Mode Enable Disable Adaptive Rate Mode Select Line Rate Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages D UO NBP 2000 A2 GB20 10 57 February 2004 Selecting CPE or CO Mode 1 Type 2 to display the Configure CPE CO Mode menu Figure 4 11 Configure CPE CO Mode Menu Ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA KA A KA AG KB MX Configure CPE CO Mode Ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckock ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA KA A KA KA KB MX Current Mode CPE 1 CPE 2 EO Type 1 to select CPE or type 2 to select CO mode 2 The IAD sets the mode and displays the menu
205. h color coded wire pair to the corresponding telephone connection on the jack field or punchdown block connect the RJ21X connector to the connector on the IAD rear panel When you have completed the tasks in this chapter reset the IAD and test your configuration Reset the IAD Reset the IAD page 14 to synchronize the physical connections Verify Normal Power Up and Operation Finally to test your configuration for proper data and voice operation perform the operational test Operational Test on page 247 21 February 2004 am 2000 A2 GB20 10 NOTE 3 Administration This chapter describes how to control security to your IAD validate users using a RADIUS server configure SNMP via IP or EOC upgrade IAD software and perform other general and utility oriented tasks This chapter includes these topics IAD security setting user IDs and passwords page 23 Using a RADIUS server for authentication page 26 Configuring SNMP page 28 Upgrading IAD system software page 32 Upgrading ACOS page 44 Configuring the IAD for LAN connection page 34 Using system utilities page 23 Setting derived timing options page 46 Resetting the IAD page 14 When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter 22 February 2004 IAD To maintain IAD security the IAD provides multi level login
206. h other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 Configuring the System Location Type L to configure the system location up to 39 alphanumeric characters 1 The IAD displays the current system location and prompt System Location is currently Enter new System Location gt Type the name of the new server location and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Configuring the System Community The value that you set must match the write community name of the SNMP host to enable the SNMP Set operation If you enable SNMP and the read write Community Name is null SNMP enters read only mode with a community name of public Type C to select Configure System Location 1 The IAD displays the current community name and prompts you to enter a new name SNMP Community is currently Enter new SNMP Community Type the name of the SNMP community to which your system belongs and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Configuring the SNMP Trap Host IP Address Type 7 to select Select Configure SNMP Trap Host IP Address of the system setup for trap operations 1 The IAD displays the current IP add
207. he Bridge Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each port you want to enable or disable STP 7 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration D 123 February 2004 Configur ing Span ning Tree Bridge Pri ority Configur ing Span ning Tree Port Prior ity 2000 A2 GB20 10 The Spanning Tree algorithm selects the bridge with the lowest priority on the network as the Root Bridge To set the Spanning Tree bridge priority a value between 1 and 65 565 default 32 768 follow these steps 1 Type R on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Bridge Priority The IAD displays the following instructions Enter Bridge Priority 1 65535 32768 Type the priority and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to display the Bridge Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration ne WN The spanning tree algorithm uses the spanning tree bridge priority to determine which bridge to use as the Ethernet LAN destination when two or more bridges are bridging between the same LAN To set the Spanning Tree priority by port range 0 255 default 128 follow these steps the lower the value the higher the priority 1 On the Bridge Configuration menu type Q to select Configure Spanning Tree Port Priority 2 The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt
208. he following network components are installed list click TCP IP and then click Properties 4 Click the IP Address tab and note the IP address In Microsoft Windows 95 and 98 you can run winipcfg at the command prompt to verify the IP address of your computer In Windows Me 2000 or XP use ipconfig Verifying the IAD IP Addresses To verify the IP address of the IAD 1 On the Main menu type R to select the Reports menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Reports Menu XOCACkCkCck kckockck kckokck kck kockockock ck kockock ck ckock ck k kockckck ck ck ck ck ck kc kck Display Current Configuration Display Network Statistics Display Interface Statistics Display Media Statistics Display Route Table Display ARP Table Display Bridge Forwarding Database Display Bridge Status Display PPP Authorization Entries Display System Uptime Display Memory Statistic Zero All Statistics NOG UUuuUp pusnaz3o3o 2 Type c to select Display Current Configuration 3 Note the IP addresses for the Ethernet and WAN Interfaces 47 February 2004 Ant Basic WAN Setup Tasks 2000 A2 GB20 10 4 WAN Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the IAD WAN interface and datalink protocol for data operation Basic WAN setup tasks page 48 Using the WAN Configuration menu page 52 Selecting the Datalink Protocol p
209. he new encryption key and press Enter 26 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 Displaying the RADIUS Configuration To display the current RADIUS server configuration 1 Onthe Main menu select Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu page 24 2 Type 9 to select Display RADIUS Configuration The IAD displays the following information Primary RADIUS Server Primary RADIUS Secret Secondary RADIUS Server Secondary RADIUS Secret 27 February 2004 Setting Up You can enable SNMP over IP and or EOC when the voice gateway is SNMP AAL2 LES CAS or ELCP By default the IAD is configured with SNMP disabled When SNMP is enabled and the settings are configured you can use SNMP to remotely manage the IAD by getting and setting IAD values and monitoring IAD events The IAD supports the following SNMP settings System Contact System Name System Location SNMP Community SNMP Trap Host IP Address af vmoa 0172 AAL2 LES The following SNMP traps are supported System reset Attempts to access SNMP with an invalid community name Starting and stopping TFTP within SNMP The IAD supports MIBs for RFCs 1213 1317 1406 1493 1463 as well as af vmoa 0172 AAL2 LES MIB 9999 Using the SNMP Configuration Menu To display the SNMP Configuration menu type 7 on the Main menu The following SNMP tasks are accessed from this menu Figure 3 2 SNMP Configuration
210. hernet packets that have its MAC address as a destination The ARP packets and IP packets with a destination IP address that is assigned to an interface on the IAD are processed as IP packets normally are including APR resolution All other packets are processed in the usual way that a bridge processes them When the IAD should send an IP packet out for example in response to a Ping or RADIUS authentication the ARP resolution is performed in a similar manner as accomplished on Ethernet If the destination Mac address is not known the ARP broadcast request is sent to all interfaces The interface that receives the reply is used to send the actual IP packet NOTE When using IP Over Bridging with CopperMountain HDIA or CopperVPN the default route for the IP interface should be specified using the IP address of the router rather than a WAN port number Enabling or Disabling Bridging Globally To enable or disable bridging globally 1 On the Main menu type G to select Enable Disable Bridging Globally 2 The IAD displays the status of bridging and a prompt Bridging is globally DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable bridging globally or D to disable it globally 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu 5 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration
211. his PVC Proceed to the corresponding section and perform the steps to set up the encapsulation you ve chosen Setting up AAL5 or AALO Encapsulation 1 Type 1 to select AALS or type 2 to select AALO encapsulation 2 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu 78 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 41 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckockckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc ko ATM Service Category Configuration ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck Current Encapsulation NONE 1 CBR 2 UBR Type 1 to select CBR for high priority data Type 2 to select UBR for low priority data 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 42 ATM PCR Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckockckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk Ck Ck Ck Ck KKK Ck Ck CA A A A A X4 X ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration ck ckckckckckckckckckockckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the con
212. iguration Type C to display the CopperCom Configuration menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 142 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 7 16 CopperCom Configuration Menu XOACkCkCk kCckckcko kockockock kckck ck ck ckock ckockckockckockockock kockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk CopperCom Configuration WOkckockckokockockockckockckockock KKK KKK KKK KEKE KEK ck ok ckck kock ck ck ck ck ck ck ko kk D Display Configuration C Compression Format F Framing Format Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying CopperCom Configuration Type D to display the current configuration settings The IAD displays the following information Configuration Current Frame Relay Mode 44 octets amp Multiple packets Setting Compression Format You can set compression globally or by port 1 Type c to set the compression format 2 The IAD displays the port prompt Configure Compression Format for Port 0 for ALL Type the port number or type 0 to set the compression for all ports 3 The IAD displays the port prompt Select Compression 1 PCM64K 2 ADPCM32K Compression Type the option for the selected compression 4 The AD saves the changes and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to return to the CopperCom Configuration menu and continue configuration 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Setting Framing Format 1 Type F to display the CopperCom Conf
213. iguration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk F4 OAM Type Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk 0 None 4 FA End to End OAM Type 0 to set F4 OAM to none or type 4 to set for End to End OAM 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM Configuration menu where you may continue with other ATM tasks 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish ATM configuration 85 February 2004 Configuring Frame Relay DLCIs 2000 A2 GB20 10 Displaying FA OAM Configuration To display the F4 OAM Type currently set type 4 The IAD displays the status message and then displays the ATM Configuration menu F4 End to end OAM VPI 0 Sending OAM Loopback To send an OAM Loopback 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 5 to select Send OAM Loopback 2 The IAD displays a list of all configured F4 OAM ports and VPI values Select Port 1 F5 OAM VCC 0 40 2 F5 OAM VCC 100 39 3 F4 OAM VPI 0 Type the port on which to send the OAM Loopback and press Enter 3 The IAD performs a loopback test on the selected port and reports the successful results Loopback on 0 38 response received in 5ms or unsuccessful results Loopback on 0 40 timeout error 4 Press any key to display the ATM Configuration menu Configuring EmptyCells 1 Onthe ATM Configur
214. iguration menu with Frame Relay mode options Figure 7 17 CopperCom Statistics Menu ACkckckckckckckckckck ckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck kck ck ck ck ck kk ko kk CopperCom Configuration KEKE KKK KEK KKK KEK KK KEK KKK KKK KEKE KKK KKK ck ckckock ck kck ck kc kck k Current Frame Relay Mode 44 octets amp Multiple packets 1 36 octet packet Single packet per frame 2 44 octet packet Multiple packets per frame Type 1 to select a 36 octet packet using a single packet per frame or type 2 to select a 44 octet packet with multiple packets per frame 143 February 2004 JetStream Call Con trol Set tings Amt 2000 A2 GB20 10 2 The IAD saves the changes and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the CopperCom Configuration menu and continue configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration CopperCom Debug Control The commands in the CopperCom Debug Control menu are reserved for use by Paradyne or CopperCom network engineers When you have specified the JetStream Paradyne Voice Gateway type E to display the Call Control Settings menu for JetStream Figure 7 18 Call Control Menu for JetStream Voice Gateway XA CACACckockckockockockock kockockockockockockck ck ckckckockockockckockockockckckck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk Call Control Settings XACckCckCckockock kock kock kck kckckockock ck ck ckock ko kockock ck ko ckockck ck c
215. ile via TFTP or XMODEM 6 Perform a hard reset to reset the IAD page 37 whenever you load a new version of ACOS Performing a normal reset is not recommended Updating the System 1 Type x to update the IAD by transferring the upgrade package of files provided by the manufacturer The number and type of files varies by IAD The IAD uses TFTP to download files sequentially to the IAD 1 The IAD displays the confirmation prompt Are you sure Y or N Type Y to continue or any other character to escape The IAD prompts for the IP address of the TFTP Server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter The IAD transfers each of the system files When the file transfers are complete perform a hard reset to restart the IAD page 37 Performing a normal reset after updating the system is not recommended Using File Transfer Utilities To perform file transfers for any files type A to display the File Transfer Method menu to download a file to the file system in the IAD The IAD displays the File Method menu 1 2 Type 1 to use TFTP or 2 to use XMODEM to transfer the file to the IAD If you select XMODEM proceed to step 3 The IAD displays the prompt for the IP address of the TFTP server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter The IAD displays the following prompt for the file name to transfer 44 Feb
216. immediately resets all statistics for the specified protocol and displays the menu Continue resetting network statistics or press Escape to return to the Network Statistics menu Type I on the Reports menu to display interface statistics reports The Interface Statistics menu contains commands to display information about the packets handled between layer 2 and layer 3 on a per port basis and to clear statistics for specific protocols To display specific interface statistics first select an interface and optionally a port The IAD then displays the report as shown in these steps 1 The IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 T1 E1 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the interface 2 lf there is more than one port the IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLCI Encapsulation I 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the Interface Statistics menu NOTE The commands that display on the Network Statistics menu vary based on the WAN module and configuration of the IAD Figure 12 4 Interface Statistics Menu all options shown A Display ARP Statistics Ethernet only I Display Interface Statistics B Display Bridge Statistics D Display DLCI Statistics Option D displays PVC Z Clear a Statistic Statistics when IAD is Z Clear ATM PVC Statistics configured fo
217. in e ino Ha ja epe ona ida Cab us 232 set wan Dridge ucc dct op d E a uana DOR R FCR EORR d kan 232 Set Wall Catal NAME MNT RR EEEE 233 set wan framerelay sas aede ecc adds e iei hu seeds 233 Viii February 2004 s t wan Ip addr6SS ouse eti RD LEER PERDE RARE rid 234 set wan stp bridge iaxdiai oo oce tcc en evenness 234 Set WAND E Nr IH 235 SHOW COPTIOUESTIOTIC cox aea rend veo Ya sr ed Dex be Ex EVE cd 235 show dhcp server configuration eeeeesssssessss 235 show ip routes 5c Lose tivi ta to Ere cide anota ri cu ocupa ccanmmdexsan 235 ID 4868lVB3 aac Co dta Mio de Ene Epitt deb pe eoo E cep Rv MAS 235 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics lul 237 POTS DIAQMOSUCS edite touc clause 237 SOD AG MOS o RT 242 ISDN BBRI DiagnosliO8 eti ro hrs eeu ri rhet meras 243 Troubleshooting the IAD sseesssssss 244 Chapter 15 Verification P w r up NT A coaytanimonseasalatasiteapeaieenainententee 247 Operational Test oa ttu eue con a cel Ur ces 247 MAILE NAN CG Me e a a a ea 248 Displaying the Current Configuration 248 Appendix A Menu Map jussi Mii EDEN 250 Appendix B Country Codes Country Codes Tables i exsexasec ei pn ra si enago so age Es ERN HR FENRE CUM 252 Appendix C JetFusion IAD Specifications Eglpment ISTH osea RE EO RP E RERO Op E RU 254 CIA
218. ing and a prompt DHCP Client for SDSL Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable DHCP Client on this port or D to disable it 5 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 6 Repeat these steps for each remaining port to set 7 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 8 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration 2000 A2 GB20 10 107 February 2004 Configur ing DHCP Relay 2000 A2 GB20 10 DHCP Relay allows the IAD to forward DHCP requests from the LAN to a separate DHCP Server To configure the IAD for DHCP Relay type L on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the DHCP Relay menu which contains commands to configure DHCP Relay Figure 5 5 DHCP Relay Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck DHCP Relay Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck E Enable Disable DHCP Relay C Configure DHCP Relay S Display DHCP Relay Statistics The tasks in this section originate at the DHCP Relay menu Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the corresponding section Enabling and Disabling DHCP Relay When you enable DHCP Relay you must provide a DHCP server IP address To enable or disable DHCP Relay follow these
219. ink protocol is set to ATM instead of Frame Relay Modifying a DLCI To modify a DLCI 1 2 On the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu type 2 to select Modify Existing DLCI The IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation Select Port 1 8 Type the port number corresponding to the DLCI you want to update The IAD prompts you for the DLCI Enter dlci number 16 Type the DLCI number to change and press Enter The remainder of this task is identical to the steps in Adding a DLCI following Proceed to step 3 in the next section and continue 87 February 2004 Adding a DLCI To add a DLCI 1 On the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu type 1 to select Add New DLCI 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter dlci number Type a DLCI value between 16 and 1023 default is 32 for data and 33 for voice and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the FR Encapsulation Configuration menu Figure 4 57 Frame Relay Encapsulation Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck FR Encapsulation Configuration KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ckockckckock ckck ck ck k ck kock Current Encapsulation None 1 RAW No Encapsulation 2 Proprietary Voice DLCI 3 RFC 1490 4 ATM RFC 1483 Tunneling Type the option corresponding to the encapsulation method you intend to use
220. interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 232 February 2004 set wan datalink set wan framerelay 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Sets the datalink protocol to Frame Relay or ATM If you don t enter optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface and port set wan datalink framerelay atm slot interface port framerelay atm Keyword identifying datalink protocol slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description Sets the Frame Relay DLCI number and encapsulation type to RFC1490 or RFC1483 If you do not enter any optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface and port set wan framerelay dlci dlci number 1490 1483 gt slot interface port dici number DLCI value 16 1023 default is 32 for data and 33 for voice 14901 1483 Encapsulation keyword slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 233 February 2004 set wan ip address set wan stp bridge 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Sets the WAN IP address If you do not enter any optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface port and connection set wan ip address IPaddress netmask slot interface port connection IP address IP address in octal for
221. ip Ring Transmit Power Receiver Gain G SHDSL Remote Country Code Remote Provider Code H DSL2 Description Current operation state Current start progress Total Operation Time in Seconds No of times modem has come up No of SNR Signal to Noise Ration received No of mean SQ error used to compute received signal to noise ratio No of the Initial Received SNR Signal to Noise Ration Current level of Loop Attenuation Actual PSD mask is used for the line code comparison It is acknowledged that an optimized PSD mask can be decided only after line code decision is made The transmit power back off of remote HTU Current framer synchronization status In Sync Out of Sync Current status of LOSW Loss of Sync Defect ON OFF Total seconds of statistics gathering Total errored seconds received of CRC and LOSW errors found No of CRC errors near end received No of LOSW Defect Loss of Sync Defect errors received No of Far End Block Error Count far end Current status of Tip Ring Normal Reserved Nominal transmit power Current no of total receiver gain Current Remote Country Code Current Provider Code 210 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 21 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Parameter Remote HDSL2 Version Remote Country Code Provider Code Remote Vendor Data Low Remote Vendor Data Hi Data Mode Heartbeat Framer Sync Lost Tick Description Cu
222. irectly to a PC for accessing via Telnet using a cross over cable customer supplied WAN Interfaces Depending on the IAD WAN interfaces include the following 11 E1 uses an RJ48 connector for the connection GSHDSL uses an RJ11 connector for the connection SDSL uses an RJ45 connector for the connection ADSL uses an RJ45 connector for the connection Telephone Interfaces 2 4 8 port IADs have varying telephone capacity These IADs support 2 4 or 8 analog telephones via RJ11 POTS ports or 8 telephone extensions via 4 BRI ISDN SO ports The JetFusion 16 24 port IAD family provides a highly interoperable cost effective broadband solution for voice and high speed data integration that is compatible with industry leading DSLAM and Voice 4 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Gateway manufacturers These IADs prioritize voice packets and dynamically allocate bandwidth between voice and data services Features Interoperable with DSLAMs based on Alcatel Texas Instruments MetaLink and Globespan chip sets These include Lucent Stinger TNT Nokia Speedlink System Promatory IMAS AccessLan PacketLoop Accelerated Networks AN 3200 Coppermountain CopperEdge and Paradyne GranDSLAM DSLAMs for example Seamless voice and high speed data integration over xDSL or T1 ITE1 Supports data rates from 144 Kbps to 2 3 Mbps and customer premise interfaces including POTS 10 100BaseT Ethernet Co
223. ization 9 come DHCP Client FE Configure Spanning Tree Forward Delay HU Display System Uptime L Configure CHGP Relay C Configure Spanning Tree Path Cost O Display Memory Statistics TONGUE Telnet Seren eot D Delete Bridge Database Entry LA Zero All Statistics F Configure IP Filtering Q Configure IP Header Comp B Configure LAN IP Bdcst Dest D Display Route Table 5 Configure 6 Configure 7 Configure 8 Configure 9 System WAN LAN SNMP i Utilities 1 Configure 1 10 Mbps E Enable Disable 1 Change User ID Contact Datalink Protocol Full Duplex SNMP via IP Technical 2 Change User Support 2 Configure 2 Mops F Enable Disable Password before using Physical Interface alf Duplex SNMP via EOC 3 Change NetMan this menu 3 Configure 3 100 Mbps AIB Enable Disable Password Full Dupl i PVCs DLCIS Meru SpE Ne IE EOG 4 Change Supervisor Password 4 Configure 4 100 Mbps P Configure System ATM FR Options Half Duplex Contact 5 Change Primary RADIUS Server Address 5 Auto negotiate N Configure System 6 Change Primary RADIUS Encrypt Secret Full Duplex Name 7 Change Secondary RADIUS Server Address 6 Auto negotiate L Configure System f8 Change Secondary RADIUS Encrypt Secret Half Duplex Location 9 Display RADIUS Configuration 7 Auto negotiate C Configure SNMP Speed amp Read Write Comm Duplex Mode z T Configure SNMP Trap Host IP Address U Enable Disable SNMP Traps via EOC D Configure Restart Trap
224. k ck ck ck k k kk Utilities Menu KKEKEKKK KK KKK ckockokckockock ck ckockck KKK KKK KKK ko ck ck ockock ck ck ck ck k kk P Ping Utility Trace Route Configure Console Baud Rate Configure Console Timeout Hard Reset or Reload ACOS from FLASH Set System Default Save System Settings as Defaults Display Event Log Clear Last Reset Reason File System Menu Debug Menu File Transfer Menu KOH mzuu dmsdg 32 February 2004 2 Type x to display the File Transfer menu Figure 3 4 File Transfer Menu ck ck ckckckckck ckckckckck ckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck File Transfer Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckockockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA A KA KKK B Load Boot ROM O Update ACOS acos bin X Update Entire System A File Transfer Utilities 3 Type x to update the entire system you must use TFTP Respond by typing v to continue 4 The IAD displays the following Download using TFTP Enter ip address of TFTP server 98 121 1 167 gt 5 Type the IP address of the TFTP Server and press Enter As file transfer progresses the IAD reports the status of each file being copied Two files acos bin and boot bin will only be copied if they match the platform to guard against loading incorrect system files onto an IAD NOTE If the IAD cannot locate the first file to download typically release
225. k ck ck k k k kk 1 Custom Defaults 2 Factory Defaults Type 1 to set the config st config file as the boot file Type 2 to set the default st config file as the boot file 97 February 2004 3 The IAD displays the following WARNING Saving System settings as Custom Defaults Press Y to Save Defaults gt Type Y to confirm the process 4 The IAD updates the setting and displays the Utility menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 to reboot with the new config file Saving System Settings To override the factory supplied default st config file with the current config st file follow these instructions 1 Type w on the Utilities menu The IAD displays the following WARNING Saving System settings as Custom Defaults Press Y to Save Defaults gt 2 Type Y to delete the default st file and save the current configuration stored in config st as default st permanently destroying the factory supplied configuration file The IAD saves the custom configuration file as the default configuration file and displays the Utility menu Displaying the Event Log To display the event log type E The IAD displays the event log sample shown 0 0 14 890 System reset 0 1 43 225 System soft reset from menu command 0 0 13 720 System reset 0 0 13 735 System reset 0 2 35 53 770 System soft reset from menu command oOo OO 0 Press any key to page through the log Clearing the Last Reset Reason Under certain circumstances
226. k k ck ck ck k k k kk A Stats Display R Ring Test S Display IAD state T Trace V Pick sound heard if insufficient WAN B W to complete call Z Zero Stats Display Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying Statistics Type A to display the JetStream Voice Gateway statistics report WAN RX PKTS WAN RX BYTES WAN TX PKTS WAN TX BYTES WAN TX DROPPED POT PKTS POT BYTES POT PKTS POT BYTES POT DROPPED L2 PKTS L2 BYTES L2 PKTS L2 1 BYTES AAL2 HEC ERROR anen X X ag uuuuuu LX DX Performing a Ring Test NOTE This command is reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers only Type R to set up and run a ring test The IAD displays the Ring Test menu 144 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 7 19 Ring Test Menu for JetStream Voice Gateway Ring Test settings Configure Ring Test Display Parameters Start Ring Test Stop Ring Test HNO Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Configuring the Ring Test Type c to configure the ring test 1 The IAD displays the port prompt Port to enable Type the port number and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the on hook timing prompt Number of seconds for port to stay on hook Type the value in seconds and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the off hook timing prompt Number of seconds for
227. l characteristics of the IAD such as changing the Ethernet port MAC address you must reset the IAD The IAD stores all configuration settings in memory When it restarts it loads the last configuration saved before it was powered down or restarted When restarting is required it will be included as a step in the configuration process You can reset the IAD in two ways To reset the IAD from the menu 1 On the Main menu type R to select Reset System The IAD displays the following instructions Press R to Reset now gt 2 Type R again This resets and starts the IAD with your new settings 3 To log in again enter your user ID and password To reset the IAD manually On a 2 4 8 port IAD unplug the power adapter from the IAD and then plug it back into the IAD On a 16 24 port IAD turn the IAD off then back on Be sure to complete your task and return to the Main menu before restarting the IAD in this manner I CAUTION Resetting the IAD terminates all telephone calls and computer sessions in progress You should ensure that there no services are being rendered before resetting the IAD 2000 A2 GB20 10 14 February 2004 Connecting To manage the IAD via the LAN or Intranet you must set an IP address via Telnet for the Ethernet port before you can use Telnet to access the IAD NOTES Although you can also access the IAD using Telnet via the WAN provided a management DLCI or PVC is configured along with a WAN IP address this
228. lay the AAL2 Channel Statistics menu Figure 7 30 AAL2 Channel Statistics Menu XC CACckockckockockockockockockockckockockockockockockock ckock ck ckockockockockckckck ck ck ck ck k k k k kk AAL2 Channel Statistics Ck co Aockck ck ook ok ko ok ok ko ck ck ko ck ck ko KKK ck ko ck Ck Ck ck ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko ko kx Xx X D Display AAL2 Channel Statistics C Clear AAL2 Channel Statistics 2000 A2 GB20 10 152 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Displaying AAL2 Channel Statistics Type D to display the AAL2 channel statistics lt lt lt Audio and Alarm Statistics gt gt gt 9 Tx Rx CID Audio Alarm Dropped Audio Alarm Dropped lt lt lt Frame Mode Data Statistics gt gt gt CID Frame Dropped Frame Dropped RasTO BadCrc TooLong 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press Escape to return to the menu Press C to reset the statistics or press any other key to refresh the statistics and display them again Clearing AAL2 Channel Statistics Type c to reset the AAL2 channel statistics 153 February 2004 Creating a Firewall via IP Filtering mb 2000 A2 GB20 10 8 Firewall Configuration Firewall configuration also known as IP filtering allows you to specify a combination of parameters the IAD uses to selectively eliminate IP traffic Filtering executes on the WAN port that you select There are two different sets of filters and each filter maintains its own statistics
229. lays the Router Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish configuration To set the LAN IP broadcast destination address where all broadcast IP packets received on the LAN ports will be redirected follow these steps 1 2 On the Router Configuration menu type B The IAD displays the current LAN IP broadcast destination address and a prompt Current LAN IP Broadcast destination Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new LAN IP Broadcast destination address Type the new IP address The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish configuration To display the Route table and view information about statically configured routes and dynamically learned ones type D on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays each network address and related information 116 February 2004 Network AddressNetmask Gateway Address Interface Metric Type 98 1 1 5 255 255 255 0 91 1 1 1 98 1 1 6 255 255 255 0 994 1 1 T 99 9 9 1 255 255 255 0 100 9 9 9 93 D 1518 255 255 255 255 9T T T T 91 1 1 18 i local 127 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 1 local Route Table parameters are described in the following table Table 5 3 Route Table Parameters Parameter Description Network Address d
230. lias Table Delete IP Address from NAT Tables Delete NAT Local Server Entry Delete NAT Alias Entry NK MHMOUQANnNPAD GHW You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure NAT Options that display in the NAT Configuration menu depend on your security level The menu is shown at the Supervisor security level NOTE If you sign on as Network Manager option B Enable Disable NAT Debug Messages is not displayed This option is reserved for Paradyne network engineers Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to NAT configuration Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect Table 11 1 lists the default NAT settings Table 11 1 NAT Default Parameter Settings Parameter Range Default NAT Translation by Port Enabled Disabled Disabled NAT local server entry 1 to 10 1 NAT TCP Timeout 60 to 3600 seconds 300 seconds NAT UDP Timeout 60 to 3600 seconds 120 seconds NAT port range low end 5000 to 65534 5000 50000 to 65535 65535 NAT port range high end 170 February 2004 A significant advantage of NAT is that you can configure it without changing hosts or routers other than those few routers on which NAT is configured NAT multiplexes internal network traffic and presents it to the Internet as if it is from a single source with one IP address To configure NAT complete the following steps Enable NAT translation by port following Configure th
231. ling multiple debugging options simultaneously slows IAD performance NOTE Debugging commands are reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers Debugging options may be enabled and disabled without resetting the IAD To display the Debug menu type G on the Utilities menu Figure 3 9 Debug Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK A A KR A A Mk A ko ko ko ko ko kk Debug Menu Ck ck ckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK E A A A KA A Gk A Kk ko ko ko ko kk M Set Ethernet MAC Enable Disable PPP debug mode Enable Disable STP debug mode Enable Disable DHCP Client debug mode Display Error Dump OH WN Bi To perform a task type the option and proceed to the appropriate section following Setting the Ethernet MAC Address To modify the Ethernet MAC address perform these steps 1 Type Mon the Debug menu The IAD displays the following message This will change the factory setting for the ENET Mac Address Are you sure 2 Type v to proceed or any other character to abort When you proceed the IAD displays the current MAC address for the Ethernet port and prompts for a new one Current Ethernet Address 00 E0 75 1C 0E 18 New MAC Address SEAS SA LA ARSE ae 3 Type the new MAC address Press Escape any time to abort this task 4 Reset the IAD page 14 for the new MAC address to take effect Enabling and Disabling P
232. lly follow these steps 1 Type R on the Router Configuration menu to select Enable Disable RIP 2 The IAD displays the current status of RIP and a prompt RIP is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable RIP globally or D to disable it globally 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 5 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration NOTE For RIP to function correctly you must enable RIP globally or locally by port and set the RIP version The order in which you perform the procedures is irrelevant Enabling and Disabling RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port To enable or disable RIP poisoned reverse by port 101 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 7 Type P on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port The IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port to enable or disable The IAD displays the RIP status of this port and a prompt RIP Poisoned Reverse for Slot 1 Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable RIP Poisoned Reverse or type D to disable it The IAD saves the configuration and displays the Router Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each port for which you
233. lly the WAN interface 5 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter 2000 A2 GB20 10 139 February 2004 6 The IAD displays the bracketing prompt Enter option for using hostname with for Signaling Type v to wrap the port in brackets for call agent API compatibility or N and press Enter 7 The IAD prompts for the outbound signaling packets TOS field value Enter the TOS byte value to use for Signalling packets 1 7 Type the field value and press Enter 8 The IAD prompts for the RTP transport packets TOS field value Enter the TOS byte value to use for RTP Voice packets 1 7 Type the field value and press Enter 9 The IAD saves the settings and displays the menu so you may continue configuring MGCP NCS 10 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Displaying MGCP Statistics Type S to display the endpoint line and connection statistics If no calls are active the IAD indicates if the Endpoint is currently connected to its Notified Entity or not If MGCP configuration is not correct the IAD displays this warning message Configuration Invalid initialization incomplete Debugging MGCP The commands displayed on the Debug MGC
234. lowing prompt for the file name to transfer Type the name of the file and press Enter To exit without transferring the file press Escape or Enter without typing the file name 4 When XMODEM is selected if the file is not located the IAD prompts you for the file transfer speed 5 The IAD transfers the file via TFTP or XMODEM 6 Perform a hard reset to reset the IAD page 37 whenever you load a new version of boot ROM Performing a normal reset is not recommended 2000 A2 GB20 10 43 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Updating ACOS Type o on the File Transfer menu to display the File Transfer Method menu and download the Atlas Communications Operating System ACOS to the file system in Flash memory on the IAD The file is stored on the IAD as acos bin The IAD displays the File Transfer Method menu 1 Type 1 to use TFTP or 2 to use XMODEM to transfer the new version of ACOS to the IAD If you select XMODEM proceed to step 4 2 The IAD displays the prompt for the IP address of the TFTP server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the following prompt for the file name to transfer Type the name of the file and press Enter To exit without transferring the file press Escape or Enter without typing the file name 4 When XMODEM is selected if the file is not located the IAD prompts you for the file transfer speed 5 The IAD transfers the f
235. ly the appropriate cable for each interface Table D 9 on page 267 lists the USI port pinouts and signal specifications Telephone Connections 2 4 8 port IADs provide RJ11 ports for POTS devices or ISDN connectors for telephone service 16 24 port IADs provide an RJ21X Amphenol style connector for connecting up to 16 telephone devices These devices may be POTS telephones modems FAX machines or other POTS compatible devices Making RJ11 Connections 2 4 8 port The RJ11 POTS port pinouts are telco standard RJ11 POTS Port Pin Assignments on page 265 Connect each telephone device to the RJ11 jacks using 26AWG telephone cord or better user provided Making ISDN Connections JF2004i JF2104i The RJ45 BRI IDSN SO ports are telco standard RJ45 BRI ISDN SO Port Pin Assignments on page 265 Connect each ISDN cable from the ISDN terminal equipment to the SO ports on the back of the IAD using 4 wire cable The ports provide PS1 and PS2 powering for ISDN telephones at 10 power consumption units per port 20 February 2004 Confirming Proper Setup 2000 A2 GB20 10 Making RJ21X Connections 16 24 Port The pin assignments for the RJ21X connector are telco standard Connect telephone devices from an RJ11 jack field or a punch down block Each line provides a two wire loop or groundstart connection To perform the connection use a customer provided cable terminated at one end with an RJ21X connector After connecting eac
236. m and Belgium1 Parameters France ETSI Unirea Belgium1 Kingdom Min Flash Hook ms 90 90 90 90 Max Flash Hook ms 130 130 130 130 Ring Frequency Hz 50 25 25 25 Receive Gain dB 1 9 0 1 0 Transmit Gain dB 8 9 7 6 7 Ref Input Impedance 220 820 270 750 300 1000 150 830 Ohms 115nF 137nF 220nF 72nF Load Impedance 600 270 4 750 370 620 150 4 830 Ohms 137nF 310nF 72nF 2000 A2 GB20 10 252 February 2004 Table B 3 Country Code Settings Belgium2 Denmark and Italy Parameters Min Flash Hook ms Max Flash Hook ms Ring Frequency Hz Receive Gain dB Transmit Gain dB Ref Input Impedance Ohms Belgium2 90 130 25 0 7 150 830 72nF Denmark 90 130 25 0 6 300 1000 220nF Italy 90 130 25 0 7 180 630 60nF Load Impedance 600 400 500 330nF 0 750 18nF Ohms Pw JF2008 Ring frequency and impedance settings are automatically C ki JF2104 applied to the JF2008 JF2104 and JF2108 JF2108 2000 A2 GB20 10 253 February 2004 Equipment List 2000 A2 GB20 10 C JetFusion IAD Specifications This appendix lists the specifications for the JetFusion IAD family Where a specification to specific IADs rather than the entire family it is noted in the IAD or Description column of each specification table Table C 1 JetFusion IAD Part Num
237. mat 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 connection index of this IP address associated with the port 0 7 Description Enables and disables Spanning Tree Protocol on the specified WAN port set wan stp bridge on off slot interface port status on off on enables STP off disables STP slot Enter the slot 1 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface list of Keywords port Port number 1 to 8 234 February 2004 set wan rip show con figuration show dhcp server con figuration show ip routes tftp receive 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Enables and disables RIP on a WAN IP port If you do not enter any optional parameters it will find the first available slot interface and port set wan rip on off version 1 2Bcst 2Mlti slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off RIP on the specified port version 1 2Bcst 2MIti Keyword identifying version to implement Must be preceded by keyword version slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description Displays the current configuration show configuration Description Displays the DHCP server configuration show dhcp serve
238. mber Filter Destination Port High Port number 3 When you enter the last parameter the IAD displays the summary information and saves the configuration The IAD displays the IP Filter Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish IP filter configuration 2000 A2 GB20 10 112 February 2004 Copying Filters for Editing To copy and edit filters first toggle input or output filters option T then type C on the IP Filtering Configuration menu to display the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu 2 F C Figure 5 7 IP Filtering Copy to Buffer Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk IP Filter Copy to Buffer Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck C Copy a filter of the chosen type to the buffer D Display the filter in the copy buffer E Edit the filter in the copy buffer X Delete the filter from the copy buffer Copying a Filter To copy a filter to the filter buffer for viewing or editing follow these steps 1 On the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu type C to select Copy a filter of the chosen type to the buffer 2 The AD displays the filter table for this interface and prompts for a filter number T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP
239. mpatible with WAN protocols including ATM and Frame Relay RJ21X POTS interface with Loop Start or Ground Start Universal Serial Interface supports V 35 and EIA 530 Dynamic and static IP routing and bridging capabilities Firewall support via IP filtering DHCP and NAT to support IP address management Management capabilities including Telnet SNMP and TFTP 999 99 99 16 24 port IADs are characterized by different WAN interfaces and different voice capacity JF2216 IAD provides WAN access over T1 E1 and telephone support for 16 voice ports via RJ21X connector JF2216c IAD provides WAN access over channelized T1 and telephone support for 16 voice ports via RJ21X connector JF2316 IAD provides WAN access over SDSL and telephone support for 16 voice ports via RJ21X connector Physical and electrical specifications for each IAD are listed in Appendix C JetFusion IAD Specifications on page 254 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators The front panel of the IAD contains several LEDs These LEDs provide general information about the operational status of the IAD Figure 1 4 16 24 Port IAD Front Panel Front Panel JetFusion POWER LAN LAN WAN VOICE DCE DCE LINK ACT LINK LINK ACT xe J 03 17483 Es id Status Indicators 5 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 1 2 Front Panel LEDs LED Description POWER Illuminates when the IAD is powered on LAN LINK Illuminates when there is an operation
240. n Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons unrecognized codes bad checksums packets smaller than header Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Total PIM packets received Discarded received packets due to resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to Packet header codes could not be recognized Bad packet header checksums Packet header size is bigger than packet buffer size Total PIM packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors 189 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 5 PIM Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Messages Information Hello received Register received Register Stop received Join Prune received Bootstrap received Assert received Graft received Graft Ack received Cand RP Adv received other messages received Sent Messages Information Hello sent Register sent Register Stop sent Join Prune sent Boosters sent Assert sent Graft sent Graft Ack sent Cand RP Ad
241. n KERR KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck kk Current Country Name is ETSI Generic Current Country Mode is Europe A Australia Complex Impedance B ETSI Generic C United States of America 1 Type the letter corresponding to the country mode you want to set 2 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration NOTE 4 To add support for any of the countries regions listed above but not displayed in the Country Mode Selection menu contact your service provider to obtain the file Rui Managing MGCP Embedded Client This section applies to MGCP Voice Over IP gateway management NOTE The IAD only displays option O Manage MGCP Embedded Client on the Main menu if you selected Voice Over IP via MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 or MGCP 1 0 as the Voice Gateway To configure or manage MGCP NCS type o to display the MGCP Management menu Rui 2000 A2 GB20 10 188 February 2004 Figure 7 12 MGCP NCS Management Menu XOACkCkCkCckCck kck kockockck kockockockock ck ck ckckckock ck ckockock ko ckck ck ck ck ck k ck k k k kk MGCP Management Menu XOACkCkCk kckockock kockockck kockck kock ck ck ckockockock ckockock ck kockck ck ck ck ck k ck k k k kk Configure MGCP parameters Display MGCP statistics Debug MGCP
242. n Ethernet cross over cable customer supplied WAN Connections WAN connections vary based on the WAN interface on your IAD Identify the WAN interface on your IAD and proceed to the appropriate section 19 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Making GSHDSL Connections G SHDSL equipped IADs use an RJ11 connector on the rear panel for WAN connection To make the connection plug the WAN cable into the RJ11 WAN connector Table D 7 on page 266 lists the G SHDSL connector pinouts Making SDSL or ADSL Connections SDSL and ADSL equipped IADs use an RJ45 connector on the rear panel for WAN connection To make the connection plug the xDSL cable into the RJ45 WAN connector Table D 6 on page 266 lists the RJ45 WAN pinouts Making T1 E1 Connections T1 E1 equipped IADs use an RJ48 connector on the IAD rear panel for WAN connection To make the connection plug the cable from the ATM network into the RJ48 WAN connector Table D 8 on page 267 lists the pinouts for the T1 E1 connector USI Connection 16 24 Port 2x16 16 24 port IADs have a Universal Serial Interface USI port 2x24 configurable for V 35 or EIA 530 page 36 If your IAD is equipped with a USI port you may connect it now Located on the rear panel the port uses a shielded DB25 connector The connector is DCE data is transmitted on the receive pin and received on the transmit pin The V 35 or EIA 530 interfaces use different voltage levels You must supp
243. n ip address CLI Command 234 set wan rip CLI Command 235 set wan stp bridge CLI Command 234 show configuration CLI Command 235 show dhcp server configuration CLI Command 235 show ip routes CLI Command 235 SLIC control mode setting 132 SLIC Control Mode Selection menu 132 SLIC ports xii SLIC testing 239 SNMP disabling for IP and EOC 29 enabling and disabling via EOC 29 enabling and disabling via IP 29 enabling for IP and EOC 29 MIB support for 28 setting up 28 System Community configuring 30 System Contact configuring 29 System Location configuring 30 System Name configuring 30 Trap Host IP address configuring 30 SNMP configuration menu 28 SNMP over EOC AAL2 LES 28 SNMP Traps 31 SNMP traps 28 SNMP traps restart max delay 31 Spanning Tree Bridge priority configuring 124 specifications 254 start mode configuring per port 131 displaying 131 ground start 131 loop start 131 setting 130 Start Mode Selection menu 130 static route adding 103 generally 103 removing 105 STP enabling and disabling by port 123 enabling and disabling globally 123 STP debug mode enabling and disabling 42 sync delay setting in Lucent DSLAM 62 system defaults setting 37 February 2004 System settings saving 38 System software identifying version 33 System Uptime report 219 T T1 switching to 66 T1 configuration flowchart 50 T1 Configuration menu 65 67 T1 Frame Mode menu 67 T1 interface configuring 66 T1 E1 connecting to IAD 20
244. n update option Respond v to override the subnet mask default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for Subnet Mask Enter N to use a default value Current Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Enter new Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for this entry and press Enter The IAD displays an update option Respond v to override the default gateway for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for Default Gateway Enter N to use a default value Current Gateway address 0 0 0 0 Enter new Gateway IP address Type the default gateway address for this entry and press Enter The IAD displays an update option Respond v to override the DNS server IP address default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for DNS Server Enter N to use a default value Current DNS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new DNS Server IP address Type the default DNS Server IP address for this entry and press Enter The IAD displays an update option Respond v to override the NetBIOS Server IP address default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for NetBIOS Server Enter N to use a default value Current NetBIOS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NetBIOS Server IP address Type the default NetBIOS Server IP address for this entry and press Enter The IAD displays an update option Respond v to override the NetBIOS Node Type default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for NetBIOS Node Type Enter N to use a default value Xckckock ckockckockock KK KKK ko ckock
245. nal time The IAD updates the settings and saves the configuration Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration 131 February 2004 Setting SLIC Con trol Mode Setting Com pander Mode m 2000 A2 GB20 10 To set SLIC control mode for POTS only type T to display the SLIC Control Mode Selection menu Figure 7 5 SLIC Control Mode Selection Menu XA CKCACck ckckockockockck kockokockckockock ck ck ckockck ck ckockckock ckockckckck ck ck ck ck k ck k kk SLIC Control Mode Selection kkkkkkkkk kk kkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Current Control Mode AUTO Control Mode A AUTO Control Mode B MANUAL Control Mode Type the option of the control mode to set The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration NOTE 1 2 Voice gateway applications such as CopperCom or JetStream overrides the value set by this command To set Compander Mode type u to display the Compander Mode Selection menu Figure 7 6 Start Mode Selection Menu XA CACACkCckckockockockck kockockockckockockockck ckckockockockockockockockockckckck ck ck ck ck k ck k kk Compander Mode Selection
246. nal via a serial cable follow these steps 1 Type z on the Utilities menu to display the following menu Current Console Baud Rate is 19200 Enter New Console Baud Rate 0 Unset use Default 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 2 Type 0 to reset the baud rate to the default 19200 bps or select a specific baud rate and press Enter 3 Reset the IAD page 14 to use the new console port settings Be sure the terminal settings are the same as the console port settings Configuring the Console Timeout Period To maintain security you can set the amount of time a console or Telnet session remains alive before termination due to inactivity To set the timeout period follow these steps 96 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 1 Type v on the Utilities menu to display this message and prompt Console timeout is currently disabled Enter new console timeout in minutes 0 to disable timeout 0 60 0 2 Type the timeout value a value between 0 60 minutes default 3 and press Enter Enter O zero to disable the timeout feature CAUTION When the timeout value is set to zero sessions will stay alive indefinitely and may pose a security risk Quitting a terminal emulator session does not terminate the console port session You must log off before quitting to avoid creating a security risk Performing a Hard Reset When you perform a hard reset the IAD resets using all values set during the acti
247. ncorrect Size of IGMP header is larger than packet size Total IGMP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors sages Received No of IGMP Membership Query messages received No of IGMP Version 1 Membership Report messages received No of IGMP Version 2 Membership report messages received No of IGMP Leave Group messages received No of IGMP DVMRP routing message messages received No of IGMP PIM routing messages received No of IGMP Traceroute resp messages received No of IGMP Multicast Traceroute messages received No of other IGMP type messages received sages Sent No of IGMP Membership Query messages sent No of IGMP Version 1 Membership Report messages sent 187 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 3 IGMP Statistics Report Parameter Ver 2 Membership Report sent Leave group message sent DVMRP routing message sent PIM routing message sent Traceroute resp sent Mcast traceroute messages sent Other messages sent Description No of IGMP Version 2 Membership report messages sent No of IGMP Leave Group messages sent No of IGMP DVMRP routing message messages sent No of IGMP PIM routing messages sent No of IGMP Traceroute resp messages sent No of IGM
248. nd other configurations for your network Additionally you must use a RADIUS authenticated user ID password for Telnet access If the RADIUS server becomes inoperative Telnet access will not work Changing the RADIUS Server Address To change the primary or secondary RADIUS server address 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu page 24 2 Type 5 to select Change Primary RADIUS Server Address or Type 7 to select Change Secondary RADIUS Server Address The IAD displays the following message Primary Secondary RADIUS Server is currently Enter new Primary Secondary RADIUS Server as either an IP address or name gt 3 Type the IP address in one of the following formats and press Enter IP address Fully qualified host and domain names for example radius xyz com maximum 42 bytes NOTE If you enter host and domain names you must configure the IAD as a DNS client page 106 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 Changing the RADIUS Encryption Secret To change the primary or secondary RADIUS encryption key 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu page 24 2 Type 6 to select Change Primary RADIUS Encryption Secret or type 8 to change Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret The IAD displays the following message Primary Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret is currently Enter new Primary Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret 3 Type t
249. ndard Multi Mode T1 413 G LITE G DMT Alcatel 1 4 Multi Mode ADI Alcatel ovUr1g 0 FO EP 64 February 2004 Type the option corresponding to the ATM standard 6 The IAD sets the standard you select and displays the menu 7 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish WAN configuration Using the Debug Menu g NOTE Option D ADSL Debug Messages is reserved for Paradyne network engineers Setting the To determine the WAN interface setting or to switch the WAN interface for Interface to use in a T1 North American or E1 environment type 5 Configure WAN Ti E1 on the Main menu to display the WAN Configuration menu for T1 E or sf JF2208 This section is for configuring the IAD to use the T1 or E1 ecce JF2216 WAN interface on the JF2208 or JF2216 IAD Figure 4 21 WAN Configuration Menu for T1 E1 ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckck ck ck ck kk WAN Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck CkCk CkCk ck ck ck ck ck ko Configuring T1 E1 Configure Datalink Protocol Configure Physical Interface Configure PVCs Configure ATM Options PUNE 1 Type 2 to select Configure Physical Interface 2 The IAD displays the T1 Figure 4 22 or E1 Configuration menu Figure 4 23 depending on how your IAD is configured Figure 4 22 T1 Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck
250. nder Mode Selection 132 Configure CPE CO Mode 58 Configure G SHDSL Rate Mode 58 Configure xDSL Interface Type 56 2000 A2 GB20 10 275 CopperCom Call Control 142 CopperCom Configuration 143 Country Mode Selection 138 Debug 41 Derived Timing 46 DHCP Relay 108 DHCP Server Configuration 156 Diagnostics 237 DNS Client 106 E1 Configuration 66 71 E1 Frame Mode 72 End to End Fragmentation Configuration 89 F4 OAM Type Configuration 85 File System 39 File Transfer 33 43 Frame Relay Congestion Configuration 93 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration 86 Frame Relay DLCI Options 88 Frame Relay Encapsulation Configuration 88 Frame Relay Fragmentation Configuration 91 Frame Relay FRF 12 Configuration 91 Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol 93 Frame Relay Options 90 G2237 xDSL Configuration 56 G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration 64 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection 133 IP Filtering Configuration 110 IPCP IP Address Type 80 Line Build Out 68 72 Loop Gain 135 Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection 133 Loopback Configuration 69 main 12 MGCP NCS Management Menu 139 Multicast Configuration 163 Multicast Routing Source 165 NAT Configuration 170 NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration 172 POTS Diagnostics 237 Quick Configuration 95 Reports 181 Router Configuration 13 98 Router Modification 103 S Bits 73 SDSL Configuration 61 SDSL Diagnostics 242 Select Tx Clock Source 70 SLIC Control Mode Selection 132 SNMP confi
251. nderstand the following precautions and warnings before using the JetFusion IAD You should post these precautions in a clearly visible location near each IAD The Safety status of the SLIC ports on this product are defined as TNV 2 Therefore cables attached to them should not be subject to over voltage To ensure this they should not leave the building in which the Unit is installed Close supervision is necessary when the system is used by or near children Do not leave unattended while in use Only use electrical extension cords with a current rating equal to that of the system Always disconnect the system from power before cleaning and servicing and when not in use Do not spray liquids directly onto the system when cleaning Always apply the liquid first to a static free cloth Do not immerse the system in any liquid or place any liquids on it 9 9 9 Xii February 2004 Product Warranty Conventions ax Regulatory Notices 2000 A2 GB20 10 Do not disassemble this system except as instructed in the manufacturer s instructions To reduce the risk of shock and to maintain the warranty on the system a qualified technician must perform service or repair work Avoid using this product during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Each JetFusion IAD is w
252. nections No of segments received with duplicate data Not used Not used No of segments received with the RST Reset Flag bit on in the TCP header Not used Not used Total TCP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Destination port field value in TCP header is illegal Total segments sent No of retransmitted TCP data packet Not used Not used No of unsolicited reset RST segment sent Not used Not used No of TCP connections opened No of TCP passive connections opened No of TCP connections currently established 191 February 2004 Table 12 6 TCP Statistics Report Parameter connections gracefully closed connections aborted failed connection attempts Description No of TCP connections gracefully closed Not used Not used UDP Statistics Report To display the UDP Statistics report type U on the Network Statistics menu The UDP Statistics report displays detailed information about UDP User Datagram Protocol packets sent and received Table 12 7 UDP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons with destination port Zero bad checksums packets smaller than header packets l
253. nfiguration tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish E1 configuration Configuring S Bits The E1 Configuration menu displays 1 Type 4 to select Configure S Bits 2 The IAD displays the Configure S Bits menu and current settings 72 February 2004 Figure 4 33 Configure S Bits Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckck ckockockockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Configure S Bits Menu KEKE KKK KKK KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK ck ok ckckock ck ckckck ck kock ck ck ck kk Current S Bit Configuration Sa4 Bit Cleared Sa5 Bit Cleared Sa6 Bit Cleared Sa7 Bit Cleared Sa8 Bit Cleared 2 Toggle Sa4 Bit Toggle Sa5 Bit Toggle Sa6 Bit Toggle Sa7 Bit Toggle Sa8 Bit OY UB W 3 To toggle a given bit type the corresponding option number The IAD saves the configuration and displays the menu 5 Continue setting S bits When you ve finished press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish E1 configuration A Configuring the Transmit and Receive Channels Type 5 to select Configure Transmit Channels or type 6 to select Configure Receive Channels The IAD displays a message indicating the number of channels enabled and displays the Channel Configuration menu Figure 4 34 Channel Configuration Menu Tx Channels Enabled No Channels Enabled ACkckock kockckck kokockock ck
254. nformation sheet Ethernet cable straight through 7 feet long WAN cable varies by interface 7 feet long If you note any visible damage or components are missing notify the shipping company immediately to make a damage claim Contact the company from which the IAD was purchased to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA for return of damaged equipment or to order missing components NOTE We suggest you keep the shipping container and packing material for future shipping or storage of the unit After you unpack the IAD find a suitable location to install the IAD in the customer s premises Ideal locations include computer equipment room or a telephone or wiring closet You can locate the IAD in an equipment rack on a table or shelf or it may be wall mounted Install the IAD in a location that is generally protected and the IAD will be undisturbed AC Power and Uninterruptible Power Supply The IAD requires access to AC power NEMA 15 3R Make sure the IAD is located within six feet of an AC power outlet Locate the nearest power outlet and plug in the supplied AC power adapter or AC power cord If there is an uninterruptible power supply on premises plug the AC power adapter or cord into that power source Ensure that the power cord conveniently and safely reaches the rear panel of the IAD where the power plug or adapter jack is located 2 4 8 Port Do notattach the AC power adapter or power up the unit at this tim
255. ng this command 222 February 2004 Command Line Interface Reference exit ping quit rename file 2000 A2 GB20 10 Each command in the command line interface is described below in alphabetic order Description Quits the command line interface and returns to the menu system exit Description Pings an IP address The IP address must be on the same subnet Press Escape to premature halt the test Upon termination displays a summary table ping IP address size tries IP address IP address of destination in octal format 999 999 999 999 size Packet size in number of bytes 0 1450 default 32 tries Number of attempts 0 1000 0 is continuous default 4 tries Description Quits the command line interface and returns to the menu interface Description Changes the name of a file rename file old name new name old name File name of existing file new name New name of file 223 February 2004 reset system remove lan ip address set bridge global 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Performs a soft system reset reset system Discussion Any time you use the menu or command line interface to make setting changes or change any of the physical characteristics of the IAD such as changing the MAC address of the Ethernet port you must reset or restart the IAD for the new settings to take effect An alternative to issuing the reset command is to simply turn off or unplug the
256. ng up AAL2 LES 83 PVC Statistics reports generally 199 Q Quick Configuration menu 95 quick configuration using in JF230x 95 quit CLI command 223 R RADIUS configuration displaying 27 RADIUS encryption secret changing 26 RADIUS server 15 26 RADIUS Server address changing 26 Receive CIR configuring for DLCI 89 regulatory notice CE mark xvi declaration of conformity xvi FCC Notice xiii Industry Canada Notice xv UL statement xv warning xvi remove lan ip address CLI command 224 REN notifying telephone company of xiv rename file CLI command 223 Reports menu 181 February 2004 reports list of 181 reset system CLI command 224 reset performing hard 37 Reverse Path Forwarding 165 RFC 1483 setting in PVC 79 RFC 2364 setting in PVC 80 ring test 239 RIP enabling and disabling 101 enabling globally 101 version setting 102 RIP Poisoned Reverse enabling and disabling 101 RJ21X connecting to IAD 16 24 port 21 Route Table report 217 route table displaying 116 router basic setup tasks 97 configuration 13 configuration chart 97 configuration generally 98 full duplex Ethernet option 34 Router Configuration menu 98 Router Modification menu 103 RS 232 console port 4 7 see also console port RS 449 7 USI port pinouts 267 RS 530 7 setting for USI port 36 USI port pinouts 267 S safeguards observing xii to be posted xii S Bits menu 73 S Bits configuring for E1 72 SDSL connecting to IAD 20 diagnosti
257. nterface page 193 and Media statistics page 205 to check the pack receive and send status Check and correct network setup as necessary Ensure that both the LAN and WAN IP addresses are configured Review the routing table and correct as necessary page 217 Check and correct subnet masks 255 255 255 0 Update RIPv1 to RIPv2 Review IAD configuration page 182 and current bridge status page 218 Correct as necessary Ensure that the IAD is connected to another bridge Install a converter to convert 1483 cells to Ethernet packets 245 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 The table following lists the IAD provisioning parameters on the voice gateway that identifies the IAD and affects its performance Verify these parameters when troubleshooting the IAD Table 14 2 IAD Provisioning Parameters Parameter ID Serial Number Profile Name Interface Group ATM Protection Group VPI VCI Transport Signalling Compression Echo Cancellation Admin Operational Description Identification number of the IAD read only IAD serial number read only Same as MAC Address IAD profile name Identifies the Interface Group that will deliver the subscriber s calls ATM Protection Group to which the IAD is assigned Virtual Path Identifier that identifies the subscriber specific logical path between the voice gateway and the ATM network Virtual Circuit Identifier that identifies the
258. ntinue Type M to display the Multicast Routing Table The IAD displays the following information Source Group 230 253 84 168 Expires 130s Incoming interface Null RPF Neighbor 0 0 0 0 Outgoing interface list SDSL VPI VCI 0 38 10 100BaseT Ethernet Source Group 237 152 172 93 Expires 42s Incoming interface Null RPF Neighbor 0 0 0 0 Outgoing interface list SDSL VPI VCI 0 38 Table 10 1 Multicast Routing Table Fields Field Description Source IP address of the sender source Group IP address of the multicast group Class D IP address State Pruned or Expired Pruned means that the state sent a Prune message to the upstream neighbor asking them to stop sending Multicast Group messages to this interface Expired means expiration time for the Prune state Expires Expiration timer for the multicast routing state 167 February 2004 Table 10 1 Multicast Routing Table Fields Field Description Static Mroute The source is a user assigned Multicast Routing Source Incoming Incoming interface for the multicast packet interface RPF Neighbor IP address of the upstream PIM neighbor Outgoing List of the outgoing interfaces to which the multicast Interfaces packet will forward Pruned If an outgoing interface is Pruned this means that the interface received a PIM Prune message Since Multicast packets are forwarded according to the preceding information this table is the key fo
259. nu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu 59 February 2004 Configur ing the SDSL Inter face 2000 A2 GB20 10 Configuring the Adaptive Rate Mode 1 Type 3 to display the SDSL Rate Mode menu Figure 4 15 Configure SDSL Rate Mode Menu Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CC CK KK KA KA KA KA KA Kk ko ko ko ko Configure SDSL Rate Mode Ck ck ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ckck ck ckckck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CC CK KK KK KA KA KA KR Kk ko ko ko ko Current Rate Mode AUTO BAUD Fixed Auto Baud Lucent Sync Delay Fixed Lucent Sync Delay Auto Baud Nokia Auto Cycle U1 0 NO S Type the option to select the rate mode If you set the rate mode to Nokia Auto Cycle you need to enter a line rate value 2 The IAD sets the rate mode and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu Selecting the Line Rate 1 Type 4 to display the current line rate and a prompt Line Rate is currently 88 Kbps Enter xDSL Line Rate Type a line rate value between 64 Kbps and 2320 Kbps which must be a value evenly divisible by 8 2 The IAD sets the rate and displays the xDSL Configuration Menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish WAN configuration Enabling and Disabling xDSL Debug Messages NOTE Option D Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages is reserved for Paradyne n
260. o Loop Start and saves the configuration Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Setting All Ports to Ground Start 1 2 3 4 5 Type 2 to select Set All Ports to Ground Start The IAD sets all ports to Ground Start and saves the configuration Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Displaying Start Mode 1 2 3 4 To display a list of telephone ports and their current start mode type 3 The IAD displays a list similar to this Port 1 Mode Loop Start Port 2 Mode Loop Start Port 3 Mode Loop Start Port 4 Mode Loop Start Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Configuring Start Mode on an Individual Port 1 2 eo Type 4 on the Start Mode Selection menu to select Configure Individual Port For each port the IAD displays the following prompt Port 1 Loop 1 Lp 2 Grnd 3 DID Wnk 4 E amp M Wnk 5 Raw ABCD O or Enter NoChange Type one of the following options for each port 1 Loop Start 2 Ground Start 3 DID Wnk 4 E amp M Wnk 5 RAW ABCD 0 or Enter no change When you ve updated each port Press Enter a fi
261. o select Frame Mode D4 or ESF and display the T1 Frame Figure 4 25 Select T1 Frame Mode Menu XCkckckckckckckckck ck ckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk Select T1 Frame Mode kckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc kk T1 Frame Mode Is ESF 1 ESF Frame Mode 2 D4 Frame Mode enu cor TO Type 1 to select ESF Frame Mode or 2 to select D4 Frame mode The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration 67 February 2004 Setting Line Build Out 1 Type 2 Select Transmit Line Build Out to display the Line Build Out menu Figure 4 26 Select Line Build Out Menu XCkckckckckck ck ckckckckck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k kk Select Line Build Out Ckckckckckckck ck ck ckckckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kck ck ck k ck kk Line Build Out Is 0 To 133 Feet 1 0 To 133 Feet Short haul 2 133 To 266 Feet Short haul 3 266 To 399 Feet Short haul 4 399 To 533 Feet Short haul 5 533 To 655 Feet Short haul 6 0 dB Long haul 7 7 5 dB Long haul 8 15 dB Long haul 9 22 5 dB Long haul Type the option to select the line build out that corresponds to the T1 span length in use 2 The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu 3 Press E
262. o values are separated by the symbol lt gt out_port Port number assigned by NAT which is translated by NAT to from the local port pkts Out packets sent from the local device to the foreign device In packets sent from the foreign device to the local device state TCP state number TCP only idle Idle time in seconds for the connection When NAT is enabled you can display details about a specific connection To display the connection details type D on the NAT Configuration menu and enter the public IP address The IAD prompts you for the outside port number of the connection Enter outside port number of connection Type the outside port number and press Enter The IAD displays the NAT connection details sample Foreign IP 11 33 13 52 Local IP 192 168 1 1 Ports outside 50000 inside 4428 foreign 23 outgoing pkts 13 bytes 544 incoming pkts 13 bytes 1229 Type TCP seconds since use 37 TCP Seq 2140945885 Ack 19105386 state 4 Retrys Local 0 Foreign 0 Bad checksum Local 0 Foreign 0 177 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 If the connection is not open the IAD advises you Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 4 NAT Connection Details Report Entry Foreign IP Local IP Outside port Inside port Foreign port Outgoing packets bytes Incoming packets bytes Type Seconds since use TCP UDP Sequence Ack State Retrys local foreign Bad checksum
263. o your telephone company NOTE REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities Before connecting your IAD you must inform the telephone company of the following information IAD SOC REN USOC FIC JF2208 JF2216 SOC 6 0N RJ48C 04DU9 BN JF2224 04DU9 DN 04DU9 1KN 04DU9 1SN JF2004 JF2008 REN 0 0B RJ11C An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area NOTE REN is associated with loop start and ground start ports Do not use for E amp M or digital ports If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance However if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible
264. ock ck ko ckockock ko kockockck ck ck ckock ck ko ckockcock k ck kokk NetBIOS Type Configuration Menu 159 February 2004 Displaying DHCP Server Details 2000 A2 GB20 10 11 12 13 Ck Ck ckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Kk Ck Kk Ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck k ck ck k kk kk Current NetBIOS Node Type Default 1 B node 2 P node 4 M node 8 H node Type the default NetBIOS node type for this entry and press Enter The IAD saves the configuration Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Type F to display the current configuration of the DHCP Server DHCP Server on 10 100BaseT Ethernet port 1 Default gateway 192 16 1 1 Default DNS server 198 16 1 1 Default NetBIOS server 192 156 34 34 Node type m node Default subnet 255 255 255 0 Default lease 3600 seconds Domain name one main com Low address 186 1 1 1 High address 198 255 255 255 Client Number D 4F 92 0D 3E 10 10 Host name grokpc IP address Lease time 162 188 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 3000 Gateway 72 1 1 1 DNS Server 30 4 4 4 NetBIOS Server 90 40 10 1 Node Type p node Each field is described in this table Table 9 1 DHCP Server Details Field Net Interface Default gateway Default DNS server Default subnet Domain name Default lease High address Low address Client Number Host name IP address Subnet mask Lease time Gateway DNS Server
265. of Hardware Field in ARP header is not corresponding to Ethernet Value of Protocol Type Field in ARP header is not corresponding to IP Value of Hardware Length in ARP header is not the size of the MAC address 6 bytes Value of Protocol Type Length Field in ARP header is not the size of the IP address 4 bytes Value of Operation Code Field in ARP header is not ARP Request and ARP Response The ARP IP address is not a local IP address located on the IAD Sent Packet Information packets sent Total ARP packets sent discarded for lack of Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory or packet buffers discarded due to internal Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors software errors with illegal type or code Discarded transmitted packets due to the type of the code are incorrect Not Being Used Reply and Request Messages valid requests rcvd No of valid ARP Request message received 2000 A2 GB20 10 194 February 2004 Table 12 8 ARP Statistics Report Parameter valid replies rcvd requests sent replies sent ARP alloc returned NULL cache misses discarded missing ARP entry Description No of valid ARP Replies message received No of valid ARP Request message sent No of valid ARP Replies message sent No of error of allocating ARP packets or ARP entries of the cache table Numbers of Destination IP address of packet are not found in
266. ompt Current Low IP address of range pool 0 0 0 0 Enter new Low IP address Type the new low IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the DHCP Server Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect You can configure up to 10 DHCP client entries Type C to configure DHCP Client Entry settings 1 The IAD displays the gateway address and prompt Enter Client entry number to configure 1 10 1 Type the client entry number you re configuring and press Enter The IAD displays the current Mac address for this entry DHCP Client MAC address is 00 00 00 00 00 00 New MAC Address kk Lckck LCkck Lok ck Lok k Lk Type the MAC address in the template provided The IAD displays the current host name and prompt Host name is currently Enter new Host Name Type the new host name and press Enter 158 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 10 The IAD displays an update option Respond v to override the lease time default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for Lease Time Enter N to use a default value Enter Lease Time in seconds for this Client 3600 Type the lease time for this entry and press Enter The IAD displays an update option Respond v to override the IP address default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for IP Address Enter N to use a default value Current IP address 0 0 0 0 Enter new IP address Type the IP address for this entry and press Enter The IAD displays a
267. on When you choose a specific voice gateway the IAD displays option E on the Main menu specifically for the voice gateway you ve selected Proceed to the section for configuring a specific gateway MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 page 139 CopperCom page 142 Jetstream page 144 AAL2 LES CAS page 146 MGCP 1 0 page 139 AAL2 LES ELCP page 150 99 99 129 February 2004 Setting Jit ter Delay Displaying Jitter Delay Setting Start Mode 2000 A2 GB20 10 Inter arrival jitter is the difference in relative transit time for two packets It is the difference between the packet s RTP time stamp and the receiver s clock at the time of arrival of the packet As shown in the equation below this is equivalent to the difference in the relative transit time for two packets the relative transit time is the difference between a packet s RTP time stamp and the receivers clock at the time of arrival measured in the same units If Si is the RTP time stamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP time stamp units for packet i then for two packets i and j D may be expressed as D ij Rj Ri Sj Si Rj Sj Ri Si The interval jitter is calculated continuously as each data packet i is received from source SSRC n using this difference D for that packet and of the previous packet i 1 in order of arrival not necessarily in sequence according to the formula J J D i l i J 16 The Jitter Delay sho
268. on command For more information see Quick Configuration on page 95 G SHDSL with ATM 1 Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 53 2 Configure GSHDSL page 64 3 Configure PVCs page 75 4 Configure ATM page 84 5 Configure the voice path page 127 SDSL with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 54 Configure SDSL page 64 Configure PVCs page 75 Configure ATM page 84 Configure the voice path page 127 Dre iE Configuring the IAD for data involves several tasks Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the WAN Configuration menu which varies based on the WAN interface and datalink protocol Figure 4 3 WAN Configuration Menu Configuring T1 El1 q 1 Configure Datalink Protocol ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk WAN Configuration Menu The IAD displays Kckckckckokckckckck ckckok ckokokckckck ckckck ck kck kckok ck kok ck k ck kokokok the physical interface in this status message 2 Configure Physical Interface These options change 3 Configure DLCIs based on your choice 4 Configure FR Options of datalink protocol 52 February 2004 NOTE You must sign on as Supervisor to configure the WAN interface am Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to WAN settings Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect Selecting If you are setting up voice and data channels y
269. on menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 146 February 2004 Figure 7 22 AAL2 LES Configuration Menu OACkCkCckckckockock kockockockockockck ckck ckck ck ck ckck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk AAL2 LES Configuration OCACkCkCckckckckck kockockocko kockck ckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck kk AAL2 LES is MANUALLY configured Port Control bit mapping is 0x00000000 CAS signaling is GR303 ABCD CAS refreshing is DISABLED Idle CAS refreshing is DISABLED Max CPS SDU size is 0 octets Combined use timer is 0 millisecond s User state control USC is DISABLED Dialled digit outband is DISABLED C MANUAL Configuration A Accelerated Networks L Lucent G General Bandwidth M MetaSwitch Z Zhone T TdSoft Configuring the IAD for a Specific AAL2 LES Gateway 1 To configure the IAD for a specific gateway type the option corresponding with one of the gateways listed in the menu 2 The IAD configures the voice gateway for the selected gateway and displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a message indicating the IAD will be configured for the selected gateway after reset 3 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration Manual Configuration Type c to display the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu current settings eliminated from this example Figure 7 23 AAL2 LES Manual Configuration Menu CACkCkCckckckockck kock kock kockck ck
270. onfiguration 126 February 2004 Basic Voice Path Setup Tasks 2000 A2 GB20 10 7 Voice Path Configuration After you have defined the voice PVCs or DLCIs on the IAD you should configure the voice path for voice operation to function correctly This chapter contains the following topics Basic Voice Path Setup Tasks page 127 Voice Path Configuration Menu page 127 Setting the Voice Gateway page 128 Setting Jitter Delay page 130 Setting Start Mode page 130 Setting SLIC Control Mode page 132 Setting Compander Mode page 132 Setting On Hook Transmission Mode page 133 Setting Idle Voltage Mode page 133 Setting Debug Mode page 134 Configuring Echo Cancellation page 134 Setting Loop Gain page 135 Setting Country Mode page 137 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter To configure voice path settings you should complete the following tasks Select a voice gateway page 128 Set the jitter delay page 130 Setstart mode page 130 Set Compander mode page 132 Setecho cancellation page 134 Setloop gain page 135 Set bandwidth tone page 137 127 February 2004 Voice Path Configura tion Menu Y Setting the Voice Gate way 2000 A2 GB20 10 Configuring the voice path settin
271. or 129 ISDN telephones power consumption 20 J JetFusion February 2004 16 24 Port family 4 2 4 8 Port family 2 JetStream call control settings 144 JF2004i connecting ISDN to 20 JF2104i connecting ISDN to 20 JF230x Quick Configuration of 95 jitter delay displaying 130 setting 130 L LAN connecting 19 LAN connection setting up 34 LAN IP broadcast destination configuring 116 last reset reason displaying and clearing 38 Line Build Out menu E1 72 Line Build Out menu T1 68 line build out setting for E1 72 line build out setting for T1 68 line rate selecting 58 line rate setting 60 LLC Encapsulation 77 78 79 80 Loop Gain menu 135 loop gain setting 135 loop start setting all ports 131 Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection menu 133 Loopback Configuration menu 69 loopback configuring for T1 68 Lucent 62 258 supported DSLAM 258 Lucent Stinger in Quick Configuration 95 Lucent Stinger TNT 2 5 M Main Menu for different users 16 Main Menu generally 12 maintenance protocol configuring in FR 93 Maximum Transmission Unit setting 101 media statistics reports generally 205 Memory Statistics reports 219 menu AAL2 Audio Profile 82 ADSL Standard Startup 64 ATM Configuration 84 ATM Encapsulation Configuration 77 ATM Peak Cell Rate Configuration 77 ATM PVC Config 75 ATM Service Category Configuration 77 BRI Diagnostics 243 Bridge Configuration 120 Channel Configuration 73 Channel Configuration menu 69 Compa
272. ou can select ATM or the Datalink Frame Relay as you set up the channels in the section Setting Up TDM Voice following Protocol To select ATM or Frame Relay as the datalink protocol 1 Onthe WAN Configuration menu type 1 to select Configure Datalink Protocol 2 The IAD displays the WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration menu identifying the current datalink protocol just below the banner Figure 4 4 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu KEKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKEKKEKKEKKEKKKK Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK KKK KKK KK KK WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA CA A KA KA AG KK Current DataLink Protocol Frame Relay 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay JF2000 JF2000 and JF2100 series IADs do not support Frame Relay JF2100 Selecting ATM or Frame Relay When you select ATM as the datalink protocol the IAD displays the ATM and PVC options on the WAN Configuration menu Figure 4 5 WAN Configuration Menu ATM ck ckckckckckck ck ck ckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck Ck Ck ck ck Ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk WAN Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckck ck ckckckckckckockock ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Configuring G2237 xDSL 1 Configure Datalink Protocol Options 3 and 4 2 Configure Physical Interface display ATM 3 Configure PVCs 1 configuration option 4 Configure ATM Options
273. ou have configured PVCs at the DSLAM default data 0 38 default voice is 0 39 when using ATM You have provisioned a data network You connected and configured a WAN link at the associated DSLAM or voice gateway For more information see Chapter 6 WAN Configuration page 48 You have a PC with Telnet and an Ethernet adapter running TCP IP For more information see Connecting via Telnet on page 15 For testing you and a counterpart stationed logged on to the upstream voice gateway can communicate via telephone or cell phone 9 o Testing the IAD 1 Verify the WAN link status SDSL Interface the LINK indicator blinks while the IAD synchronizes with the DSLAM and lights continuously when the link is established T1 E1 Interface the LINK indicator blinks while the IAD synchronizes with the voice gateway and lights continuously when the link is established 247 February 2004 Mainte nance Displaying the Current Configura tion 2000 A2 GB20 10 2 Connect a POTS telephone to a provisioned line port on the IAD 3 Lift the telephone receiver and check for dial tone If no dial tone is present troubleshoot as necessary 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each provisioned line port 5 Disconnect the telephone once you are through testing the line ports 6 Usea crossover cable to connect the PC to the Ethernet LAN port on the IAD Determine that the PC is configured with an IP address on the same
274. ow the on screen messages to set the PPP authorization type When complete continue with step 7 5 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Figure 4 38 ATM Service Category Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck KK KKK KKK KK ATM Service Category Configuration ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 1 CBR 2 UBR Type 1 to select CBR for high priority data Type 2 to select UBR for low priority data 6 The IAD displays the ATM PCR Configuration menu Figure 4 39 ATM Peak Cell Rate Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckck ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK Ck CK CK CK C CK CA A KA KR AG KA KA ko ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration Ckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK EK A KA KA KA KA Kk Kk ko Current line speed for this interface is 2048000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 4830 cells per second Type the value for the peak cell rate 77 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 7 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the PVC Configuration menu where you may continue with other PVC management tasks 8 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish PVC configuration Modifying a PVC To modify a PVC
275. packets until link is opened Discarded all non AP packets until link is authenticated Value of Length field in the header is zero LCP rejects No of LCP Rejects messages received echoes No of LCP Echoes messages received replies No of LCP Replies messages received discards No of LCP Discards messages received Sent Packet Information packets sent Total PPP packets sent discarded link not open Discarded transmitted packets because links are not opened LCP rejects No of LCP Rejects messages sent echoes No of LCP Echoes messages sent replies No of LCP Replies messages sent discards No of LCP Discards messages sent Clearing Interface Statistics To clear interface statistics type Zz on the Interface Statistics menu The IAD displays the Clear Statistics menu Figure 12 5 Clear Interface Statistics Menu I Clear Interface Statistics B Clear Bridge Statistics D Clear Frame Relay DLCI Statistics To reset statistics for a specific interface type the option The IAD immediately resets the statistics for the specified interface and displays the menu Continue resetting statistics or press Escape to return to the Interface Statistics menu NOTE You must enable bridging for the Clear Bridge Statistics option to display For more information on enabling bridging see Bridge Configuration on page 118 204 February 2004 Media Sta Type M on the Reports menu to display M
276. pe 1 to enable all channels or type 2 to disable all channels 2 The IAD makes the change and resets the interface The menu and reset messages may conflict press any key to refresh the menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 69 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling or Disabling Specific Channels 1 Type 3 to enable or disable specific channels If all channels are disabled this option enables specific channels Conversely if all channels are enabled this option disables specific channels 2 The IAD displays this prompt Select Channel to Enable Disable then press Enter For each channel type the number and press Enter When you have entered all channels to enable or disable press Enter 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the T1 Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration Selecting a Channel Range 1 Type 4 to enable a range of channels 2 The IAD displays the channel status and a prompt Tx Channels Enabled No Channels Enabled Select a Channel Range to Enable Available Range 1 to 24 First Channel of Range gt Type the beginning channel and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the second prompt Last Channel of Range gt Type the ending channel to enable and press Enter 4 The IAD makes the change and saves the configuration and displays the T1 Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks 6 R
277. pecific Derived Timing debug messages NOTE The Derived Timing debugging messages are reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers To enable or disable Derived Timing debugging follow these steps 1 Type 2 on the Derived Timing menu The IAD displays the Derived Timing Debug menu KR KKK KKK ck ck ck kc KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKEKE Derived Timing Debug ck ck KE KKK KKK KEKE KKK KEKE KKK KEK KK KKK KKK KKK KE ko ck ko Mk ko ko ko ko Derived Timing debug not enabled 1 Enable Disable ALL Derived Timing Debug Messages 2 Enable Disable PSTN ONLY Derived Timing Debug Messages 3 Enable Disable Local Clock ONLY Derived Timing Debug Messages 46 February 2004 Verifying an IP Address 2000 A2 GB20 10 2 Type 1 2 or 3 to enable or disable specific derived timing debugging messages For each option the IAD displays the Derived Timing Debug menu 2 Type 1 to enable debug messages or 2 to disable debug messages 3 Reset the IAD page 14 When operating the IAD in a network there are several different IP addresses you should be aware of One for a computer running Windows One or more for the IAD Verifying an IP Address for Windows Systems To verify the IP address of your computer 1 Click the Start button click Settings and then click Control Panel 2 In the Control Panels window double click the Network icon and then click the Configuration tab 3 In T
278. port connection slot 229 February 2004 set mgcp voice tos set nat 2000 A2 GB20 10 Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 connection connection Index of this connection number associated with the port 0 7 Description Specifies the TOS byte value for RTP voice packets set mgcp voice tos byte value byte value Integer 1 7 to specify the TOS byte value Description Enables or disables NAT on the specified port If you do not enter any optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface and port set nat on off slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off NAT on the specified port slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 230 February 2004 set sdsl speed set system defaults set wan atm ppp auth 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Sets the SDSL speed This command sets the speed to manual framed Nokia or Auto Cycle Nokia set sdsl speed speed auto manual speed Keyword identifying speed 2320 1744 1536 1152 768 384 192 auto manual Keyword identifying manual or auto cycle for Nokia Description Sets the system to the default parameters set system defaults Description Sets the PPPoATM options RFC 2364 VC muxing PVCs as
279. press Enter 5 The IAD displays the information you ve entered and updates the configuration Updating NAT Alias entry 2 Local IP address 91 1 1 223 Internet IP address 168 192 32 244 6 When the operation is complete press any key to display the NAT Configuration menu 7 Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 8 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish configuring NAT 2000 A2 GB20 10 175 February 2004 NAT When NAT is enabled you can review statistics gathered as NAT Statistics operates To display NAT statistics type s on the NAT Configuration menu The IAD displays the following information sample timeouts TCP 300 UDP 120 local to inet pkts 0 bytes 0 inet to local pkts 0 bytes 0 Connections TCP 0 UDP 0 ICMP 0 created 0 deleted 0 Total Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 First Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 Queued Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 Deleted Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 Fragment Entries created 0 deleted 0 Errors cksum 0 retries 0 bad packets O0 Total IP pkts 0 Reserved addresses 0 Discarded packets 0 Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 2 NAT Statistics Report Entry Description Timeouts TCP and UDP Timeout values Local to inet Number of packets and bytes transferring to the Internet inet to Local Number of packets and bytes r
280. protocol and displays the menu Continue resetting network statistics or press Escape to return to the Network Statistics menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 216 February 2004 Route Table Report ARP Table Report Bridge For warding Database Report 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type R to display the Route Table report in the Reports menu The IAD lists each route by IP address and displays the following information about statically configured routes and dynamically learned ones Table 12 26 Route Table Report Parameter Description Network Address destination address Netmask IP subnet mask no of bits reserved for the host Gateway Address IP address of packets sent to destination Interface IP address of outgoing interface Metric no of hops routers required to reach the specified gateway Type static dynamic RIP local Address Resolution Protocol ARP obtains the Ethernet MAC address for a known IP address Type A on the Reports menu to display the following information about mappings between Ethernet Media Access Control MAC addresses hardware addresses and IP addresses Table 12 27 ARP Table Report Parameter Description IP Address IP address that corresponds to the MAC address Ethernet Address Ethernet address of the device assigned by the manufacturer Interface The interface for the Ethernet address To display information about mappings between Ethernet addresses and devices connected
281. psulation setting in PVC 78 AAL1 CPCS Statistics report 199 AAL1 CES setting up in PVC 82 AAL2 Audio Profile menu 82 AAL2 Statistics report 200 AAL2 LES 258 AAL2 LES CAS configuring 146 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP configuring 150 AAL2 LES setting up in PVC 83 AAL5 Encapsulation setting in PVC 78 AC power 4 access required 9 for 16 24 port IADs 6 AC power adapter 9 AC power cord 9 used with extensions xii Accelerated 258 Accelerated Networks 2 5 AAL2 LES configuration 147 AccessLan 62 in Quick Configuration 95 AccessLan PacketLoop 2 5 ACOS software and application development 35 ACOS updating 44 Adaptive Rate mode selecting 58 Adaptive Rate mode setting 60 ADSL connecting to IAD 20 ADSL interface configuring 64 ADSL Standard Startup menu 64 af vmoa 0145 258 A Law 132 AMI 68 2000 A2 GB20 10 272 ARP Statistics report 194 ARP Table report 217 ATM configuring generally 84 EmptyCells configuring 86 F4 OAM Type configuring 85 F4 OAM VPI configuring 85 in Quick Configuration 95 OAM Loopback sending 86 payload scrambling configuring 84 ATM Configuration menu 84 ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu 77 ATM pace control setting manually 149 ATM Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu 77 ATM PVC Config menu 75 ATM PVCs configuring generally 75 ATM Service Category Configuration menu 77 ATM transport statistics report 208 audience intended xi Autobaud mode setting for Conexant DSLAM 61 B B8ZS 68 boot ROM file
282. r ATM To display a specific report type the option 193 February 2004 For detailed information about each report in the Network Statistics menu or to clear network statistics proceed to the appropriate section ARP Statistics Report Table 12 8 following Interface Statistics Report Table 12 9 on page 195 Bridge Statistics Report Table 12 10 on page 197 DLCI Statistics Report Table 12 10 on page 197 ATM PVC Statistics Report Table 12 11 on page 199 Clearing Interface Statistics Clearing Network Statistics on page 192 NOTE When viewing Network Statistics reports press the space bar to display the next page When you re done viewing press any key to display the report or press Escape to return to the Interface Statistics menu Y ARP Statistics Report To display the ARP Statistics report type A on the Interface Statistics menu The ARP Statistics report displays details about ARP Address Resolution Protocol packets sent and received Table 12 8 ARP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received Total ARP packets received discarded for lack of Discarded received packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory packet buffers etc discarded due to internal Discarded received packets due to internal software errors errors discarded for other Discarded received packets due to other reasons reasons Value
283. r IP Multicasting Displaying Type N to on the Multicast Configuration menu to show the PIM Neighbor the PIM The IAD displays the neighbor for each interface and its expiration times Neighbor PIM Neighbor Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet NULL Press any key to continue 2000 A2 GB20 10 168 February 2004 11 NAT Configuration This chapter describes the steps required to configure Network Address Translation NAT NAT multiplexes traffic from the internal network and presents it to the Internet as if it is from a single source that has only one IP address The NAT Local Server may be configured with a range of both TCP and UDP ports which benefits applications including video conferencing and multi user games Setting up IP networks without NAT may be complex each requires an IP address subnet mask a DNS address and a default router NAT reduces this complexity by Modifying IP addresses and checksum without affecting traffic Automatic network configuration when using DHCP Packet level filtering and routing Traffic logging NOTE If you enter an element of NAT information incorrectly the network connection will not function and there may be no indication of what is wrong Ant This chapter contains the following topics Using the NAT Configuration menu page 170 Enabling and Disabling Enabling NAT Translation page 171 Configuring a NAT Local Server page 172 Configuring NA
284. r Mode BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol Used during network booting by a network node to determine the IP address of its Ethernet interfaces DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier Value that specifies a PVC or SVC in a Frame Relay network In the basic Frame Relay specification DLCls are locally significant connected devices might use different values to specify the same connection In the LMI extended specification DLCIs are globally significant DLCIs specify individual end devices E1 Network connection with a capacity of 2 048 divided into 32 separate channels or DSOs EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable read only Memory Nonvolatile memory chips that can be erased using electrical signals and reprogrammed Ethernet Physical connection commonly used for LANs Runs over a variety of cable types and provides theoretical bandwidth of 10 or 100 Mbps Invented by Xerox Corporation and developed jointly with Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Fast Ethernet Any of a number of 100 Mbps Ethernet specifications Frame Relay A network interface providing high speed packet transmission with minimum delay Uses variable length packets called frames Contrast with packet Full Duplex Capable of handling simultaneous data transmission between a sending station and a receiving station ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Internet protocol that reports errors and provides other information relevant to IP packet processin
285. r Paradyne use only To perform a specific test type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Performing a Dialup Test The dialup test verifies the operational status of each telephone station by allowing the user to dial another POTS phone on the IAD by dialing the port number To perform a dialup test 1 Type D on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Dialup Test 2 The IAD displays this prompt Dialup test mode Pick up any handset and dial the number of the line you want to test Take the selected handset offhook listen for dial tone and dial the port number Hang up after a successful connection The IAD reports the status of each action Line 1 off hook Line 1 hung up Line 5 off hook Line 5 hung up Press Escape to terminate the test The IAD terminates the test and displays the menu Performing a Hotline Test The hotline test allows line to line telephone connections on a single IAD without requiring a gateway connection on the WAN port To perform a hotline test 1 Type H on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Hotline Test 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Perform an all lines test Y or N Type v to enable automatic line connection The IAD informs you the test has started Proceed to step 6 or Type N to connect two specific ports The IAD prompts you for the first port Type the port and press Enter The IAD prompts for the second port Type the port an
286. r configuration Description Displays the IP route table show ip routes Description Receives a file from the TFTP server identified by the IP address The file must exist in the default directory of the TFTP server tftp receive IP address file name IP address IP address of TFTP server file name name of file to receive 235 February 2004 14 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics This chapter describes procedures for troubleshooting and diagnosing problems that may be associated with the IAD Diagnostics are destructive and may result in loss of connection to network or voice gateway After running diagnostics reset the IAD to return to normal working order This chapter contains the following topics Using the Diagnostics menu page 237 Performing POTS diagnostics page 237 Performing SDSL diagnostics page 242 Performing ISDN BRI diagnostics page 243 NOTE Y When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter 2000 A2 GB20 10 236 February 2004 Using the Diagnostic tasks are all displayed and accessed on the Diagnostics menu A displayed by typing Z on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are aa described beginning at the Diagnostics menu enu Figure 14 1 Diagnostics Menu KKEKKEKKKKEKKKKEKKKKKEKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK ck ck kc kc kk Diagnostics Menu KEK KKK KKK KEK K
287. r than the PDU size Transmitted cell overflow Cell Allocation Problem Length of transmitting cells is larger than PDU size Value of UUI User to User information in the header of the cells transmitted is incorrect Total AAL2 Cells received in bytes Total AAL2 Cells received No of receiving cells discarded because Invalid Microcell Channel The microcell is empty The cell length is larger than the PDU size Transmitted cell overflow Cell Allocation Problem The length of the cells received is larger than the PDU size Value of UUI User to User information in the header of the cells received is incorrect No of errors of reassembling AAL2 cells Could not allocate an internal Cell buffer Value of STF Start Field in the header is incorrect Value of the Sequence Number in the header is incorrect out of sequence Common AAL Statistics Report This report displays when ATM protocol is configured Table 12 15 Common AAL Statistics Report Parameter Vcc Status Description Number the VCC VPI VCI value Current status of this AAL connection The status is the addition of the values Connection Active 1 Connection Confirm 16 Connection Created 32 Connection Congestion 2 For example if status is 33 the connection is Active and Created 201 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 15 Common AAL Statistics Report Parameter Max PDU Rx Frames Rx Cells
288. r the stats ESC to exit or any other key to display When you re done type v to reset the statistics or press any other key to display the IP Filtering Configuration menu Clearing IP Filtering Statistics To reset the IP filtering statistics command type v on the IP Filtering Configuration menu The IAD resets the statistics to zero and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 115 February 2004 Configur ing IP Header Compres sion IPHC Configur ing the LAN IP Broad cast Desti nation Displaying the Route Table 2000 A2 GB20 10 IPHC reduces the number of bytes transmitted across the WAN thus conserving bandwidth To enable or disable IP header compression follow these steps On the Router Configuration menu type Q The IAD displays the port table and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter The IAD displays the header compression status and prompt IP Header Compression for SDSL Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable IP header compression on this port or D to disable it If you enable IP header compression the IAD displays the following message Springtide Compatibility mode ENABLED currently not selectable The IAD saves the changes and disp
289. rame Relay Congestion Configuration Menu KEKEKKKKKKKEKKEKKKKEKKKEKKEKKEKKKKKKKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck FR Congestion Configuration KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kockockck ck ckck ck ck k ck kock 1 Configure Transmit Congestion Parameters 2 Configure Receive Congestion Parameters 2000 A2 GB20 10 93 February 2004 Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 4 Doone of the following A Select Configure Transmit Congestion Parameters and then follow the on screen messages to set FECN BEON condition set size FECN BEON condition clear size FECN BECN max number of bytes to store B Select Configure Receive Congestion Parameters and then follow the on screen messages to FECN BEON condition set size FECN BEON condition clear size FECN BECN max number of bytes to store 5 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Enabling or Disabling Coppermountain CMCP NOTE When using a CopperMountain DSLAM CMCP allows the DSLAM to configure many IAD parameters automatically IAD parameters controlled by CMCP include fragmentation and voice gateway support For more information refer the CopperMountain DSLAM guide To enable or disable Coppermountain CMCP 1 Onthe Main menu select Configure WAN to display the WAN Configuration menu 2 Select Configure FR Options to display the Frame Relay Options menu page 90 3 Select Enable Disable CopperMountain CMCP The IAD displays the following ins
290. rdware and software You should be aware of the characteristics of each IAD to properly install and configure them for operation in a customer s premises This chapter provides information about these topics JetFusion 2 4 8 port IAD features indicators and connectors page 2 JetFusion 16 24 port IAD features indicators and connectors page 4 JetFusion IADs are ideal for service providers offering small to medium businesses or business units a high quality voice and data service over broadband circuits With up to 24 POTS ports and full LAN support with a full range of integrated features each IAD offers toll quality voice and high speed Internet access over a single copper pair in one unit Each IAD supports any POTS device via its voice subsystem and any IP based computer system Ethernet printers personal computers Windows Macintosh Unix Linux etc network file servers and other network devices via its LAN subsystem 16 24 Port IAD 03 17482 Figure 1 1 JetFusion Integrated Access Devices 1 February 2004 Data Interfaces JetFusion 2 4 8 Port IAD Family 2000 A2 GB20 10 The data connection through the IAD supports IEEE 802 10 compliant bridging and routing When the IAD is configured for routing it supports Routing Information Protocol RIP version 1 version 2 or static IP routing The IAD complies with RFC 1812 when interfacing with Version 4 IP routers The WAN subsystem
291. re DHCP Client Configure DHCP Relay Configure Telnet Server Port Configure IP Filtering Configure IP Header Compression Configure LAN IP Broadcast Destination Display Route Table OUugio udtrtmzz usd uusscioao You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure the IAD as a router Options that display in the Router Configuration menu are the same for both security levels NOTE Be sure to reset the IAD page 14 when after making changes to router configuration Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect To configure the IAD as a router you must assign an IP address to both the LAN and WAN ports each with different subnet masks NOTE You can assign up to 8 IP addresses on each of the WAN and LAN ports To configure an IP address 1 Type C on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure Port IP address 2 If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort 98 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type the interface number to configure The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter
292. ress and prompt Current SNMP Trap Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new SNMP Trap Host IP address Type the IP address and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect 30 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enabling or Disabling SNMP Traps via EOC Type U to enable or disable SNMP traps via EOC 1 2 3 The IAD displays the current status and prompt SNMP traps sent via EOC are currently DISABLED To enable traps via EOC type E To disable them type p The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Configuring Restart Trap Maximum Delay Type D to configure the restart trap maximum delay time 1 m The IAD displays the prompt Enter SNMP Restart Trap Maximum Delay Time in Seconds 0 600 0 Type the new value in seconds and press Enter The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect 31 February 2004 Upgrading the System Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 Periodically Paradyne may provide new software that you will download to the IAD to upgrade the system You must use TFTP to perform the file transfer when upgrading the entire sys
293. rical data rates from 144 Kbps to 2 3 Mbps in increments of 8 Kbps Transmission range up to 25 000 feet JF2208 1 544 2 048 Mbps Shielded RJ 48 connector 4 or 8 Port 16 24 port IADs share common voice data configuration security and environmental features and specifications The JF2200 series has a T1 WAN interface and the JF2300 series has an SDSL WAN interface Table C 12 16 24 Port Voice Features Feature Analog Voice Ports Signalling Dialing Ring Source Impedance REN Loop Current Idle State Voltage Ring Voltage Gain System Loss Digital Compression Encoding Echo Cancellation Fax Support Modem Support Calling Features Description 16 POTS ports FXS RJ21X loop start ground start DTMF tone Internal 600 Ohms 2 5 per port 25 mA typical gt 21V gt 40 vrms at 2 5 REN load Programmable 3dB to 9dB G 711 64 kbps PCM G 726 32 kbps ADPCM A law u law G 168 compliant single reflector V 17 V 29 support V 34 V 90 support caller ID flash hook three way calling distinctive ringing stutter dialtone call forwarding call waiting 262 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table C 13 16 24 Port Data Features Feature LAN Interface Bridging Routing DHCP PPP HDLC Support Management Configuration Universal Serial Interface Description 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ45 IEEE 802 1d including spanning tree Default Static RIP1 RFC 1058 RIP2
294. ring frame reception No of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet Discarded received packets due to the internal Received Packet Ring Pool are full therefore no incoming packets could be processed Total Ethernet packets sent Discarded outgoing packets due to internal Transmitted Packet Ring Pool Buffers are full Could not process any outgoing packets Length of outgoing packets is larger than the maximum length of this interface No of discarded transmitted packets due to No of transmitting Heartbeat signal quality error packets lost errors A count of frames for which the first transmission attempts on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions Discarded transmitted frames because a collision occurred No of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collision 2000 A2 GB20 10 212 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 22 Ethernet Statistics Report Parameter carrier sense lost underrun transmitter resets Description No of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a fr
295. rity To change this value see Configuring the Console Timeout Period on page 36 Before you can connect to the IAD via Telnet make sure the IP address is set correctly for this network To do so follow the steps each described in detail below 1 Connect the IAD to a PC 2 Login to the IAD 3 Setthe IP address NOTE Be sure that the IAD and PC are both powered OFF before connecting the console cable If both devices are not turned off when you connect the cables you may place the IAD in an unstable state and you may need to reset one or both devices before you can perform configuration tasks Connect the IAD to a PC To connect the IAD to a PC via the console port 1 Turn off both devices and insert the male connector of a DB9 serial cable into the console port on the IAD 2 Insert the female connector of the cable into a serial COM port on your PC NOTE See RS 232 DB 9 Console Port Pin Assignments on page 265 for console port specifications Power Up the IAD 1 With the console cable connected on 2 4 8 port IADs plug the AC power adapter into the IAD On 16 24 port IADs turn on the power 10 February 2004 Ant Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 switch located on the back panel This starts the IAD and it executes the boot process to begin normal operation 2 Verify that the Power indicator on the front panel illuminates NOTE As the IAD boots it sends status messages to the console port If you are connected
296. rrent version of the Remote HDSL2 Current Remote Country Code Current Provider Code Remote vendor provided data the low 4 bytes Remote vendor provided data the high 4 bytes Total Data Mode Heartbeat received Handle Modem Data state No of time that framer synchronization was lost 211 February 2004 Ethernet Statistics Report Table 12 22 Ethernet Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets rcvd discarded RX ring empty discarded unrecognized protocol discarded RX error alignment errors bad fcs runt giant late collision overrun Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded TX ring full discarded bad pkt discarded TX error heartbeat lost deferred late collision excessive collision Total Ethernet packets received Discarded received packets because the internal Received Packet Ring Pool Buffers are empty therefore no incoming packets could be processed Protocol Type field value in Ethernet header does not correspond to IP No of discarded received packets due to the following reasons Frames containing a no of bits not divisible by eight is received and discarded Received frame contains CRC errors in the header Received frame is smaller than the minimum defined for this interface Received frame lengths are greater than maximum defined for this interface Discarded frames because a collision occurred du
297. rs that set the range to discard and set the actions of those filters to discard The order of the filters matters if you are mixing filters with different actions or if you want the overlapping filters to display accurate statistics NOTE For complete information on IP filtering see Configuring IP Filtering on page 109 154 February 2004 int Basic DHCP Server Setup Tasks 2000 A2 GB20 10 9 DHCP Server Configuration This chapter describes the tasks required to configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server on the LAN connection DHCP allows for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached hosts DHCP reduces the work required to administer a large network This chapter contains the following topics Basic DHCP Server setup tasks page 155 Using the DHCP Server Configuration Menu page 156 Enabling DHCP Server page 156 Checking for Additional DHCP Servers page 157 Configuring DHCP Server parameters page 157 Configuring the DHCP Address Range Pool page 158 Configuring DHCP Client Entries page 158 Displaying DHCP Server details page 160 Displaying DHCP Server statistics page 161 Displaying DHCP Server assigned unassigned addresses page 161 Displaying DHCP Entry details page 162 Deleting a DHCP Client entry page 162 Deleting a DHCP Assignment entry page 162 999 99 9 9 9 9 9 99 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the
298. rt page 121 Disable Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally page 123 or by port page 123 Use this flowchart to plan your tasks based on your router configuration requirements Figure 5 1 Router Configuration Task Flowchart Main Menu Enable bridging interface per port All interfaces configured with IP Enable global bridging Define IP for each interface per port Configure RIP version by port Using default route Add default Add static route to route to routing table routing table Enable RIP globally End 2000 A2 GB20 10 97 February 2004 Router Configura tion Menu m Configuring a Port IP Address Y 2000 A2 GB20 10 Router tasks are all displayed and accessed on the Router Configuration menu displayed by typing 2 on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the Router Configuration menu Figure 5 2 Router Configuration Menu Ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA KA A KA AG X MX Router Configuration Menu Ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CA CK CK CK CA CA PA KA kkk Configure Port IP Address Unconfigure Port IP Address Configure Port Max Transmission Unit Add Remove a Static Route Enable Disable RIP Configure RIP Version by Port Configure RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port Configure DNS Client Configu
299. ruary 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type the name of the file and press Enter To exit without transferring the file press Escape or Enter without typing the file name 4 When XMODEM is selected if the file is not located the IAD prompts you for the file transfer speed 5 The IAD transfers the file via TFTP or XMODEM 6 Reset the IAD page 14 to utilize the new file If you transfer acos bin using this option perform a hard reset page 37 Using the TFTP Server Menu Type T to enable and disable read access write access and console output Figure 3 12 TFTP Server Menu ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA KK A A KA KR KA KR KA KA Kk ko ko ko ko kk TFTP Server Menu Xckckckckckckckckck ckck ck ck ck ckck Ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK C A KE A KA KA KA KA KA KA Kk ko ko ko ko ko kk Read access enabled Write access disabled Console output disabled R Toggle Read Access W Toggle Write Access Q Toggle Console Output The IAD displays the current settings directly below the menu heading To successively enable or disable access or output execute the option again The IAD saves the configuration and displays the menu When the options are set correctly reset the IAD for the changes to take effect 45 February 2004 Setting Derived Timing Options Y 2000 A2 GB20 10 Use the Derived Timing options to enable and disable Derived Timin
300. s The IAD only the NAT UL ranslates IP addresses for alias entries port numbers are not changed Alias Entry You can create up to 7 direct public to private IP address mappings via the NAT alias table First assign each public IP address using option C Configure Port IP Address on the Router Configuration menu Setting the Ethernet Port IP Address on page 12 to entries 1 through 7 on the PVC or DLCI with a 255 255 255 255 subnet mask Next make alias entries to map each local IP address to a corresponding public IP address These NAT alias entries allow IP traffic to the public IP address to pass directly through port for port to the corresponding private IP address To configure each NAT alias entry 1 Type a on the NAT Configuration menu to select Configure NAT Alias Entry 2 The IAD displays the following prompt the IAD displays the next unassigned entry Enter NAT Alias Entry to Configure 1 7 1 1 Type the number of the alias entry you re configuring 3 The IAD displays the current local IP address and prompt Current NAT Alias Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NAT Alias Local IP address Type the IP address of the device on the LAN it must be a statically assigned IP address do not use DHCP to assign this address 4 The IAD displays the current Internet IP Address and prompt Current NAT Alias Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NAT Alias Internet IP address Type the new NAT alias IP address and
301. s single chapter This chapter contains the following topics Unpacking the IAD page 9 Installing the IAD page 9 Connecting via Terminal Emulator page 10 Resetting the IAD page 9 Powering up the IAD page 10 Logging on to the IAD page 11 Setting the Ethernet port IP address page 12 Connecting via Telnet page 15 Basic IAD configuration page 19 Connecting the LAN WAN USI and Telephones page 19 Confirming proper setup page 21 OAR A A A a a A a a AE g In most installations you ll proceed through these topics in order If your situation varies complete information on installation connection configuration and troubleshooting is contained in the reference chapters following this chapter NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter Ant 2000 A2 GB20 10 8 February 2004 Unpacking the IAD Installing the IAD 2000 A2 GB20 10 Each IAD is packed and shipped in a durable container If you haven t already done so open the container and unpack the IAD Carefully remove the IAD from the package and packing material IAD Package Components Each IAD is shipped with the components listed below As you unpack them note their condition and identity and compare the list to the packing list in the package AC power adapter and cord 6 feet long or AC power cord Agency Compliance i
302. scape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration Selecting B8ZS or AMI 1 To set zero suppression type 4 to select B8Zs or AMI The IAD displays the current setting and a prompt Zero suppression is currently B8ZS Would you like to set it to AMI Y Yes Type v to change the setting 2 The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 4 Resetthe IAD page 14 when you finish T1 configuration Configuring Loopback 1 Type 5 to configure loopback 2 The IAD displays the current setting for each type of loopback and ESP loopback commands and the Loopback menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 68 February 2004 Figure 4 27 Loopback Menu ckckckckck ckck ck ckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kck ck ckck ck ck ck k ck ck k ck k kk Select Loopback Configuration kCckckckckckck ck ckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck k ck ck ck ck ko kk Outward Payload Loopback DISABLED Outward Line Loopback DISABLED Inward Loopback Master Mode Only DISABLED Line amp Payload Loopback Command Receive ESF Only DISABLED Enable Disable Outward Payload Loopback Enable Disable Outward Line Loopback Enable Disable Inward Loopback WN H 4 Enable Disable Receive of ESF Loopback Commands Type
303. ses Display DHCP Server Unassigned Addresses Display DHCP Entry Details Delete A DHCP Client Entry Delete A DHCP Assignment Entry H UO G U 0O UHUu ut You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure the IAD for use as a DHCP Server Options that display in the DHCP Server Configuration menu are the same for both security levels NOTE Be sure to reset the IAD page 14 when after configuring the IAD as a DHCP Server Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect The commands in option B Enable Disable DHCP Debug Messages are reserved for use by Paradyne network engineers When you enable DHCP Server the IAD sequentially displays and processes the required configuration commands beginning with Enable DHCP Server To enable or disable DHCP Server follow these steps 1 Type E to select Enable Disable DHCP 2 If DHCP Relay is enabled the IAD displays this prompt DHCP Server and DHCP Relay cannot both be enabled Do you wish to disable DHCP Relay N Type v to disable DHCP Relay and enable DHCP Server and proceed to step 4 156 February 2004 Enabling and Dis abling Checking for Addi tional DHCP Serv ers Configur ing DHCP Server Parameters 2000 A2 GB20 10 3 If DHCP Relay is not enabled the IAD displays this prompt DHCP Server is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable DHCP Server to type D to disable
304. splay the E1 Frame Mode menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 71 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Figure 4 31 E1 Configuration menu ck ckckckckck ck ckckckckckockckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK Select E1 Frame Mode ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk Ck CkCk Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck El Frame Mode FAS FAS FAS CRC4 Enabled Multi Frame CAS Multi Frame CAS CRC4 Enabled APUNE Type the option to set the frame mode 2 The IAD saves the configuration resets the interface and displays the menu The menu and reset messages may conflict press any key to refresh the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish E1 configuration Setting Line Build Out 1 Type 3 Select Transmit Line Build Out to display the Line Build Out menu Figure 4 32 Select Line Build Out Menu Xkckckckck ck ck ckck ckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk Select Line Build Out Xckckckckckckckckck ck ckck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk Line Build Out Is 0 dB 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB BWDP Type the option to select the line build out decibel setting 2 The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue with other co
305. srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 25 5 TCP OH 0 65535 92 100 1 1 255 255 255 255 0 Type the filter number and press Enter 3 The IAD copies the filter to the filter buffer and displays the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu Displaying a Filter in the Buffer To display filter details follow these steps 1 On the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu type D to the filter currently stored in the buffer 2 The IAD displays the filter Table 5 2 on page 114 T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 25 5 TCP OH 0 65535 92 100 1 1 255 255 255 255 0 2000 A2 GB20 10 113 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 When you re done viewing the details press any key to return to the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu Table 5 2 Filter Details Parameter num state action srcLwP SrcHiP source ip addr low source ip addr high proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dest ip addr low dest ip addr high Description number of the filter Idle or Active Pass or Discard Filter Source Port Low TCP or UDP packets only Filter Source Port High TCP or UDP packets only Filter Destination IP Low Address Filter Source IP High Address Filter protocol IP ICMP IGMP
306. static route is added The IAD prompts for confirmation Route successfully added Save this route in the static configuration Y 6 Type v to confirm or Escape to cancel If you confirm the Route Table is updated and the IAD prompts to add more routes Add another route Y 7 Type v to confirm or Escape to cancel 8 Repeat these steps for each route that you want to add 103 February 2004 9 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 10 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration 2000 A2 GB20 10 104 February 2004 Setting the Default Route 2000 A2 GB20 10 Removing a Static Route To delete a static route from the Route Table 1 2 On the Router Modification menu type R to select Remove a Route The IAD prompts for the address of the route to remove Enter address of static route to remove Type the IP address of the route to remove and press Enter The IAD removes the route from the table and the IAD displays the Router Modification menu Repeat these steps for each route that you want to remove Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration Adding or Changing the Default Route To add a default route on the WAN or change the current default route 1 2 3 4 5 On the Router Modification menu type
307. steps 1 Onthe DHCP Relay menu type E to select Enable Disable DHCP Relay 2 The IAD displays the current status and a prompt DHCP Relay is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable DHCP Relay on this port or D to disable it 3 The IAD displays the current DHCP server IP address and a prompt Current DHCP Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new DHCP Server IP address Type the new DHCP Server IP address 4 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration Configuring the DHCP Server IP Address To set the DHCP server IP address 1 On the DHCP Relay menu type C to select Configure DHCP Relay 2 The IAD displays the current IP address and a prompt Current DHCP Server address 94 1 1 1 Enter new DHCP Server IP address 94 1 1 1 oS Type the new DHCP Server IP address 3 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 108 February 2004 Configur ing the Tel net Server Port Configur ing IP Fil tering 5 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration Displaying DHCP Relay Statistics To display information about DHCP Relay type s on the DHCP Relay menu When DHCP Rel
308. subscriber specific virtual circuit between the voice gateway and the ATM network VCI must be specific between 32 and 1023 ATM or Frame Relay Loop Start or Ground Start No compression 32k or 16k On or off Service state of IAD locked or unlocked State of IAD read only 246 February 2004 Power up Test Opera tional Test 2000 A2 GB20 10 15 Verification This chapter describes how to verify that the JetFusion IAD operates properly after installation It also covers maintenance and how to display the current configuration Before you can test the voice capabilities of the JetFusion IAD you must first provision it at the voice gateway This chapter contains the following topics Conducting a power up test page 247 Conducting an operational test page 247 Performing routine maintenance page 248 Displaying the current configuration page 248 The JetFusion IAD displays an indication of normal operation when you first power it up When you power it up verify that the POWER indicator on the front panel lights green Use the following procedure to verify that the IAD is operating properly after installation The following procedure assumes that You have configured Directory numbers DNs in the Class 5 switch for the associated Voice Ports The IAD has been connected to a terminal emulator via the console port displays the normal boot sequence and you can log in Y
309. support adjustable jitter buffer FRF 5 FRF 8 support HDLC support 264 February 2004 Connector Pinouts 2000 A2 GB20 10 D Connector Pinouts This appendix specifies pinouts for each connector on the IAD Table D 1 RS 232 DB 9 Console Port Pin Assignments Pin 1 2 3 Signal Ground Tx Data Rx Data Table D 2 RJ11 POTS Port Pin Assignments Line A O N Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Line Tip Ring Tip Ring 3 4 5 2 5 3 4 6 2 5 3 4 7 2 5 3 4 8 2 5 Table D 3 RJ45 BRI ISDN S0 Port Pin Assignments Line AUO N Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Line Tip Ring Tip Ring 3 4 5 2 5 3 4 6 2 5 3 4 7 2 5 3 4 8 2 5 265 February 2004 Table D 4 10BaseT Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 TX 5 NC 2 Tx 6 Rx 3 Rx 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC Table D 5 100BaseT Connector Pin Assignments RJ48 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 TX 5 NC 2 Tx 6 Rx 3 Rx 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC Table D 6 ADSL SDSL Connector Pin Assignments RJ45 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 N C 3 Ring 2 Tip 4 N C Table D 7 GSHDSL Port Pin Assignments RJ11 Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Line Line Tip Ring Tip Ring 1 3 4 5 2 5 2 3 4 6 2 5 3 3 4 7 2 5 4 3 4 8 2 5 2000 A2 GB20 10 266 February 2004 Table D 8 T1 E1 Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Rx Ring 5 Tx Ring 2 Rx Tip 6 NC 3 NC 7 NC 4 Tx Tip
310. supports the following interfaces ATM data transport via xDSL and T1 E1 per RFC 1483 or RFC 2364 Frame Relay data transport via xDSL and T1 E1 per RFC 1490 Frame Relay data transport per RFC 1483 with Q 922 frames The JetFusion 2 4 8 port IAD family provides a highly interoperable cost effective voice and high speed data integration solution that is compatible with industry leading DSLAM and Voice Gateway manufacturers These IADs prioritize voice packets and dynamically allocate bandwidth between voice and data services Features Interoperable with DSLAMs based on Alcatel Texas Instruments MetaLink and Globespan chip sets These include Lucent Stinger TNT Nokia Speedlink System Promatory IMAS AccessLan PacketLoop Accelerated Networks AN 3200 CopperMountain CopperEdge and Paradyne GranDSLAM DSLAMs for example Seamless voice and high speed data integration over xDSL or T1 E1 Supports data rates from 144 Kbps to 2 3 Mbps and customer premise interfaces including POTS 10 100BaseT Ethernet BRI Compatible with WAN protocols including ATM and Frame Relay BRI IAD supports ISDN BRI telephone interface RJ11 POTS interface with Loop Start or Ground Start Dynamic and static IP routing and bridging capabilities Firewall support via IP filtering DHCP and NAT to support IP address management Management capabilities including Telnet SNMP and TFTP 99999 99 IADs in the 2 4 8 port family are characterized by di
311. t port 228 February 2004 set mgcp notified entity set mgcp signaling connection set mgcp signaling port set mgcp signaling tos set mgcp voice connection 2000 A2 GB20 10 port UDP Port number any valid port number usually 2427 or 2727 Description Specifies the DNS name or IP address of the notified entity call agent You can specify one notified entity in the CLI Use the menu interface to set up a maximum of four call agents set mgcp notified entity domain name IP address domain name IP address Fully qualified domain name or IP address of the call agent Description Specifies the call agent slot interface port and connection set mgcp signaling connection slot interface port connection slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 connection Index of this connection number associated with the port 0 7 Description Specifies the UDP port the IAD uses for incoming MGCP messages set mgcp signaling connection port port UDP Port number any valid port number usually 2427 Description Specifies the TOS byte value for signaling packets set mgcp signaling tos byte value byte value Integer 1 7 to specify the TOS byte value Description Specifies the slot interface port and connection for the voice connection set mgcp voice connection slot interface
312. t Source Quenches sent Redirects sent Echo Requests sent Echo Replies sent Time stamp Requests sent Time stamp Replies sent Information Requests sent Information Replies sent Other types sent Description Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors Replies Received No of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received No of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received No of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received No of ICMP Source Quench message received No of ICMP Redirect message received No of ICMP Echo Request message received No of Echo Reply messages received No of ICMP Timestamp Requests messages received No of ICMP Timestamp Replies messages received No of ICMP Information Requests messages received No of ICMP Information Replies messages received No of other ICMP types messages received Replies Sent No of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent No of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent No of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent No of ICMP Source Quench message sent No of ICMP Redirect message sent No of ICMP Echo Request message sent No of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent No of ICMP Timestamp Requests messages sent No of ICMP Timestamp Replies messages sent No of ICMP Information Requests messages sent No of ICMP Information Replies messages sent No of other ICMP types messa
313. t it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each relevant terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 Underwriters Laboratories Statement These systems ar
314. t menu Kernel Tasks Memory Statistics Report Type T on the Memory Statistics menu to display the Kernel Tasks Memory Statistics report The System Memory Statistics report displays details about the kernel tasks Six are shown in this sample report usually 24 or more run concurrently TASK 0 Allocated Size 99KB 101392 Bytes TASK 1 Allocated Size 529KB 541920 Bytes TASK 2 Allocated Size OKB 208 Bytes TASK 3 Allocated Size 10KB 10832 Bytes TASK 4 Allocated Size 35KB 36032 Bytes TASK 5 Allocated Size 4KB 4832 Bytes TASK 6 Allocated Size 70KB 2112 Bytes Type z on the Reports menu to reset all statistics and redisplay the menu This command allows you to reset all statistics using one command To reset specific statistics use the clear statistics command in each report Press any key to return to the Reports menu 220 February 2004 Intro duction set wan stp bridge 2000 A2 GB20 10 13 Command Line Interface The command line interface is often more convenient to use than the menu interface Many of the tasks you normally perform using the menu interface are also available in the command line interface To enter command line interface CLI mode type c on the Main menu The IAD enters command mode and allows you to enter IAD commands described below until you type the exit or quit command to return to the menu interface CLI Help Display a list of all commands in the command line interface
315. t the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Option 4 RFC 1483 with VC Muxing supports routing or bridging Setting up RFC 2364 PPPoATM with LLC Encapsulation or RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing 1 Type 6 to select RFC 2364 PPPOATM with LLC encapsulation or type 7 to select RFC 2364 PPPOATM with VC Muxing 2 The IAD displays the current authorization type and a prompt PPP Authorization is currently None Enter New Authorization type 0 None 1 PAP Client 2 PAP Server 3 CHAP Client 4 CHAP Server 3 If you select options 1 through 4 the IAD displays the current PPP authorization user ID and prompt PPP Authorization Userid is currently grok Enter New PPP Userid gt Enter the new user ID and press Enter 4 f you select option O None the IAD displays the IPCP IP Address Type menu Figure 4 45 IPCP Configuration Menu KEKEKEKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKEKKKKKKEKKKKKK KKK KKK ck ck ck KKK IPCP IP Address Type Menu KEKKKKEKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KEKE 1 Static IP Address 2 IPCP Address Assignment 3 WAN Unnumbered IP Type the option corresponding to the IP address you want to use 5 The IAD displays the status of the DNS server assignment for the selected port and prompts you to enable or disable it 2000 A2 GB20 10 80 February 2004 RFC 1877 DNS Server Assignment for T1 E1 Port 1 is currentl
316. tead of Configure PVCs it is because your datalink protocol is set to Frame Relay instead of ATM Adding a PVC To add a PVC follow these steps 1 Onthe ATM PVC Configuration menu type 1 to select Add New PVC 2 The IAD displays a prompt for the VPI 75 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Enter Virtual Port Identifier VPI Type a VPI value between 0 and 255 default 0 and press Enter The IAD displays a prompt for the VCI Enter Virtual Circuit Identifier VPI Type a VCI value between 32 and 65535 default is 38 for data 39 for voice and press Enter 76 February 2004 am 2000 A2 GB20 10 4 The IAD displays the ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu Figure 4 37 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckck ck ckckckckckckockck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ATM Encapsulation Configuration ck ckckckckckckck ck ckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CA CA CA A KA A A KK Current Encapsulation NONE AAL5 None AALO None Proprietary Voice RFC 1483 using VC Muxing RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPOATM with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing UH PWN PP Type the option for the encapsulation to configure for this PVC NOTES RFC 1483 using VC Muxing supports routing or bridging If you select RFC 2364 PPPoATM with LLC Encapsulation or RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing foll
317. ted by IAD Backward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by the sending device No of frames dropped due to congestion to maintain committed information rate No of CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management frames received No of LMI Local Management Interface frames received No of ANSI frames received No of frames transmitted No of total bytes transmitted No of Frame Relay packets discarded due to Transmitted frames are larger than PDU size Packets overflow Indicates Discard Eligibility is allowed on transmitted frames based on congestion to maintain committed information rate Forward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by IAD Backward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by the sending device 206 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 18 Frame Relay Statistics Report Parameter Tx congestion counter CLLM frames Tx LMI frames Tx ANSI frames Tx Last error Description No of frames dropped due to congestion to maintain committed information rate No of CLLM frames received No of LMI frames received No of ANSI frames received Description of last recorded error since reset Serial USI Statistics Report Type S to display the Serial Statistics report This
318. ted with the port 0 7 227 February 2004 set lan rip set lan stp bridge set mgcp bracketing set mgcp listening port 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Enables or disables RIP on a WAN IP port If you do not enter any optional parameters the IAD performs the command against the first available slot interface and port set lan rip on off version 1 2Bcst 2M1ti gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off RIP on the specified port version 1 2Bcst 2MIti Keyword identifying version to implement Must be preceded by keyword version slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 0 to 7 Description Enables or disables Spanning Tree Protocol on a LAN port set lan stp bridge on off slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off STP on the specified port slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description When communicating with the notified entity call agent indicates whether the UDP port number should be wrapped in brackets for compatibility set mgcp bracketing on off on off Keyword to enable on or disable off MGCP bracketing Description Specifies the UDP port the Notified Entity call agent is listening on set mgcp listening por
319. tem NOTE Some gateways directly support file transfer as a means of upgrading IADs For information refer to the Voice Gateway manufacturer s operating manual To use TFTP you must configure both the IAD and the computer that contains the TFTP Server program a program that you license separately Using TFTP Servers via LAN or WAN Before the IAD can access a LAN or Intranet based TFTP server you must configure the IP address of the Ethernet port page 12 on the same subnet as your TFTP server and the IAD must be connected to the LAN To access a WAN based server you must configure the T1 E1 or xDSL Interface with a management DLCI or PVC and a WAN IP address For information about setting the IP address of the WAN port see Chapter 6 WAN Configuration on page 48 Copying the Source Files Typically you will receive two ZIP files a core ZIP file and an application ZIP file for each upgrade First extract each file into a single directory on your PC Then set the directory as the path that the TFTP Server will use to send files to the IAD often identified as upload download or outbound directory Upgrading via TFTP If your TFTP Server is not running start it now and note the IP address of the computer it is running on To upgrade the IAD software 1 On the Main menu type 9 to display the Utilities menu Figure 3 3 Utilities Menu Ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck c
320. tem Utilities 2000 A2 GB20 10 The Utilities menu contains utility commands and several menus to upgrade ACOS software and support ACOS application development To display the Utilities menu type 9 on the Main menu 16 24 port IADs display a menu with option U the USI port command Figure 3 6 Utilities Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ko Utilities Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc ko Ping Utility Trace Route Make a USI Module a UART port Configure Console Baud Rate Configure Console Timeout Hard Reset or Reload ACOS from FLASH Set System Default Save System Settings as Defaults Display Event Log Clear Last Reset Reason File System Men Debug Menu File Transfer Menu ed HI DmEIZUSMSX ctNCG iH j To perform a task type the option and proceed to the appropriate section Pinging Network Devices To check for a device on a network follow these instructions 1 Type P on the Utilities menu To set up Ping to run supply the following information 1 Type the IP address or complete host name If you enter a host name you must enter the domain name with the host name For example mycomputer mydomain com 2 Type the ping packet size 3 Type the number of times to ping 0 causes Ping to run until you press Escape The IAD displays the
321. ter NAT Local Server Translated Port Number 1 65535 0 Type the translated port number range 1 65535 and press Enter The IAD prompts for the translated port number Enter NAT Local Server Standard Port Number 1 65535 0 Type the standard port number range 1 65535 and press Enter If you did not choose TCP and UDP for protocol the IAD displays the following message Updating NAT Local Server entry 1 Translated IP address 95 4 4 4 Translated Port 100 is accessible as Standard Port 65535 If you chose TCP and UDP for protocol the IAD displays the following Enter number of consecutive ports to use 1 10 1 Type the number of consecutive ports to use and press Enter 10 The IAD displays this port report 172 February 2004 Configuring NAT Timeouts 2000 A2 GB20 10 11 Updating NAT Local Server entry 1 Translated IP address 91 1 1 200 Translated Port 32 is accessible as Standard Port 32 Translated Port 33 is accessible as Standard Port 33 Translated Port 34 is accessible as Standard Port 34 Translated Port 35 is accessible as Standard Port 35 The IAD saves the NAT configuration and displays the NAT Configuration menu Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 12 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish configuring NAT Under normal circumstances the timeout default setting is adequate However if users interact with products inclu
322. th to complete a call The IAD displays the Insufficient Bandwidth Indication Setting menu and the current setting Figure 7 20 Ring Test Menu for JetStream Voice Gateway Insufficient Bandwidth Indication Setting Current sound setting Silence 0 Play Silence 1 Play Fast Beeping Type 0 to replace the dial tone with silence or type 1 to replace dial tone with a fast beeping sound Press Escape to return to the Call Control Setting menu and continue configuration Resetting Statistics Type Z to reset the JetStream statistics The IAD resets the statistics to zero and displays the Call Control Setting menu Configur ATM Adaptation Layer 2 Loop Emulation Services AAL2 LES is a broadband local loop emulation service specifically telephony that uses Ing AAL2 the ATM AAL2 adaptation layer LES CAS When the voice gateway is specified as AAL2 LES CAS af vmoa 0145 type E on the Main menu to display the AAL2 LES Call Control menu Figure 7 21 AAL2 LES CAS Menu XOACkCkCckckck kck kock kock kockock ckock ckock ckock ckockockockockock kockck ck ck ck ck kc k kk kk AAL2 LES Call Control XOACkCkCckckck kck kocko kock kckockck ck ckock kock ckocko ck ck kock ck ckck ck ck k ck k k k kk C Configuration D Debugging S Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Configuring for AAL2 LES CAS Type c to display the AAL2 LES Configurati
323. the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Type S to display the Multicast Routing Source The IAD displays the Multicast Routing Source Table NETWORK ADDRESS NETMASK INCOMING INTERFACE KOR KKK RR RR RK OK RK RK RR KK ORR RK KK KKK KKK KKK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 190 232 5 1 default Press any key to continue IGMP is a communication protocol that operates between a router The IAD and its local subnet Ethernet connection hosts The router sends periodic IGMP query packets to the subnet to check for any hosts that have joined or would like to join a group Type G to display the IGMP Group The IAD displays all Internet Group Management Group IGMP groups for each interface and their expiration times IGMP Groups Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet 224 0 0 1 Default Local Join Expires NEVER 166 February 2004 Displaying the IGMP Querier Displaying the Multi cast Rout ing Table 2000 A2 GB20 10 224 0 0 2 Default Local Join Expires NEVER 224 0 0 13 Default Local Join Expires NEVER Press any key to continue The IGMP Querier is the IGMP router that has the highest IP address among the others It sends periodic IGMP Query messages and handles IGMP Membership Report and Leave messages Type Q to display the IGMP Querier The IAD displays the IGMP Querier for each interface and its expiration time IGMP Querier Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet 140 242 59 65 this interface Press any key to co
324. the option and proceed to the corresponding section The tasks in this section are described beginning at the Frame Relay Options menu Configuring Fragmentation following 90 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Configuring Maintenance Protocol page 93 Configuring Congestion Parameters page 93 Enabling or Disabling Coppermountain CMCP page 94 Selecting Fragmentation Types To select which fragmentation to use 1 Onthe Frame Relay Options menu type 1 to display the FR Fragmentation Configuration menu Figure 4 61 Frame Relay Fragmentation Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckockckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk FR Fragmentation Configuration ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck 1 Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation 2 Configure CopperMountain Fragmentation 2 Doone of the following a Type 1 to select Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation go to FRF 12 Configuration following or b Type 2 to select CopperMountain Fragmentation go to CopperMountain Fragmentation Configuration on page 92 Setting FRF 12 Configuration If you selected FRF 12 Fragmentation the IAD displays the FRF 12 Configuration menu Figure 4 62 FRF 12 Configuration Menu KEKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKK ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck FR FRF 12 Configuration ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck
325. there is activity on the Ethernet port Flashes as the IAD is establishing a link and illuminates solid when there is a proper connection on the WAN port and synchronization has been achieved Illuminates when there is activity on the voice ports When connected to a Jetstream Voice Gateway it remains lit and blinks when there is activity 2000 A2 GB20 10 3 February 2004 JetFusion 16 24 Port IAD Family 2000 A2 GB20 10 Rear Panel Connectors On the rear panel Figure 1 3 the IAD contains several connectors The type and position of the WAN and telephone connectors vary by IAD Figure 1 3 Typical 2 4 8 Port Family Back Panel Connectors POTS Telephone Lines Console DB 9 RJ 11 Jacks Serial Connector C 1 Y JY CA DICERE LED y M cj eese E IB TCR D 4 PWR CONSOLE 10 100 Lan LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE5 LINE 6 LINE7 LINE8 Awan V JA rF Power WAN Module Ethernet RJ 45 Receptacle RJ 45 or RJ 48C Jack DC Power Adapter Connects the IAD to any AC outlet of 90 250 volts via an external 18 volt power supply RS 232 Console Port Connects the IAD to a PC using a straight through 9 pin serial DB9 RS 232 cable for the purpose of using a terminal emulator for IAD configuration and management 10 100Base T Ethernet Port Connects the IAD to the local area network using a CAT 5 straight through Ethernet cable or d
326. tics routing and bridging information and status This user may change this level user ID and password This user may not make or save any changes to the configuration of the IAD To maintain IAD security a user with Supervisor privileges should modify the User security level user ID and passwords for both User level and Network Administrator level prior to placing the IAD into production 2000 A2 GB20 10 23 February 2004 Table 3 2 lists the default values for the user IDs and passwords Table 3 2 Default User IDs and Passwords Security Level User ID Password User Enter Enter Network NetMan Enter Administrator Supervisor Supervisor supervisor The user ID and password may contain up to 17 alphanumeric characters These values are case sensitive spaces and punctuation characters are not allowed em NOTE The IAD can only store one user ID and password at each security level Changing a Password To change a password at any security level you must sign on at or above the security level you re changing and follow these steps 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu Figure 3 1 Password Configuration Menu KKEKEKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK kck ck kock ck k kk Password Configuration Menu KEKE ck cock ck KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KR KKK KKK ck kck KKK k kk 1 Change User ID 2 Change User Password 3 Change NetMan Password 4 Change
327. tion Support File Information Interface type Admin state Physical state WAN DataLink Protocol xDSL type Firmware Version ADSL Standard for Startup SDSL Mode Mode Line Rate Payload Scrambling Frame Relay Management RIP Poisoned Reverse Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Client Bridging Spanning Tree Port Priority Path Cost T1 E1 Only T1 Frame Mode E1 Frame Mode Binary 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS Line Build Out Tx Clock Source Tx Channels Enabled Rx Channels Enabled Description port number of the Telnet server IP address of the DNS server current timeout value in seconds 5 to 20 loaded program files loaded support files ADSL SDSL GSHDSL T1 E1 Ethernet Status enabled disabled online offline Totally Transparent Raw HDLC Cisco compatible HDLC IP Plus compatible HDLC PPP over Raw HDLC ATM Frame Relay G SHDSL Annex A U S GSHDSL Annex B Europe SDSL version of firmware 71 413 GLITE G DMT Alcatel 1 4 Multi Mode ADI ALCATEL Customer Premises Equipment CPE or Central Office CO CPE or CO Auto Fixed 1152 Kbps 768 Kbps 384 Kbps 192 Kbps 2320 Kbps or manually set enabled disabled ATM only maintenance protocol Frame Relay only enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled 0 255 default 128 1 65 535 default 32 768 ESF D4 FAS FASC
328. tistics menu The Memory Statistics menu 1 0 contains two memory display commands Figure 12 8 Memory Statistics Menu ck ckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CK A A KA KR AR KA KR KA Kk ko ko ko kk ok Memory Statistic Menu ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA E A KA KA KA KR KA KA Kk ko ko ok ko ko kk M Display System Memory Statistic T Display Kernel Tasks Memory Statistic To display a specific memory statistic report type the option For details see the corresponding section following System Memory Statistics Report Type M on the Memory Statistics menu to display the System Memory Statistics report The System Memory Statistics report displays the following details about system memory Total Memory Size 8192KB 8388608 Bytes Total Allocated Memory 7454KB 7633688 Bytes Total Free Memory 737KB 754920 Bytes Kernel Memory Size 1152KB 1179648 Bytes Kernel Memory Allocated 901KB 922848 Bytes Allocated Blocks 1143 Blocks Largest Alloc Block Size 159KB 163248 Bytes Highest Memory Used 901KB 922959 Bytes 219 February 2004 Zero All Statistics 2000 A2 GB20 10 Kernel Free Memory 241KB 247016 Bytes Free Blocks 1 Blocks Largest Free Block Size 241KB 247016 Bytes Reserved Area Size 1024KB 1048576 Bytes When you are done reviewing the report press any key to return to the System Memory Repor
329. to enable IP Over Bridge on the WAN port or D to disable it The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each remaining port to configure Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration To unconfigure delete the IP address of an interface follow these steps 1 2 Type U on the Router Configuration menu to select Unconfigure Port IP Address If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to which the IP address is assigned The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port and press Enter The IAD displays the IP interfaces on the port you ve selected IP interfaces on port 1 ID IPAddr IPMask Priority 0 Oe teleg 255 255 255 0 NORMAL Select a connection Enter the ID of the interface to delete and press Enter The IAD deletes the IP address and saves the configuration Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu Reset the
330. to enable a range of channels The IAD displays the channel status and a prompt Tx Channels Enabled No Channels Enabled Select a Channel Range to Enable Available Range 1 to 24 First Channel of Range gt Type the beginning channel and press Enter The IAD displays the second prompt Last Channel of Range gt Type the ending channel to enable and press Enter The IAD makes the change and saves the configuration and displays the E1 Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish E1 configuration Configuring the Transmit Clock Source 1 Type 8 to select Configure Transmit Clock Source and display the Select Tx Clock Source menu and status message Figure 4 35 Select Tx Clock Source menu Ckckckckckckckckck ck ck ckck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk Select Tx Clock Source ckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk Tx Clock is derived from Rx clock Slave Mode 1 External Slave Mode 2 Internal Master Mode m Type 1 to select external or type 2 to select Internal mode The IAD saves the configuration and resets the interface Press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish E1 configuration 74 February 2004 Configuring ATM PVCs int 2000 A2 GB20 10 Displaying Physi
331. to select Configure IP Router 2 The IAD displays the Router Configuration menu 2000 A2 GB20 10 12 February 2004 Figure 2 2 Router Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK Router Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc kk Configure Port IP Address Unconfigure Port IP Address Configure Port Max Transmission Unit Add Remove a Static Route Enable Disable RIP Configure RIP Version by Port Configure RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port Configure DNS Client Configure DHCP Client Configure DHCP Relay Configure Telnet Server Port Configure IP Filtering Configure IP Header Compression Configure LAN IP Broadcast Destination Display Route Table OUuwgo udrmumz uz muusdap Type c to select Configure Port IP Address 3 The IAD displays the following menu sample all options shown The interfaces that display depend on the specific IAD Figure 2 3 Router Configuration Menu Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 1 G7070 ADSL ATU R 1 T1 E1 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type 2 to set the IP address for the Ethernet port 4 Ifthe IP address is configured for the port the IAD displays information about the interface and a prompt IP interfaces on port 2 ID IPAddr IPMask Priority 0 92 1 1 90 255 255 255 0 NORMAL
332. to set 7 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 8 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration D To create update and delete static and default routes type s on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the Router Modification menu which contains commands to manage the IAD s route table Figure 5 3 Router Modification Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckockckck ck ck ck ck ck ckck kk kk Ck kk Ck CkCk Ck ck ck ck ck kc ko Router Modification Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckockckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck KKK KKK ck ck ck ck oko Add a Static Route Remove a Route Add Change the Default Route Remove the Default Route Display Route Table Odd The tasks in this section originate at the Router Modification menu Type the option to perform a task and proceed to the corresponding section Adding a Static Route To add a static route to the Route Table 1 On the Router Modification menu type A to select Add a Static Route 2 The IAD prompts for the destination address Enter destination address of route to add Type the destination address to add and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompt Enter network mask of route 255 255 255 0 gt Type the network mask and press Enter 4 The IAD prompts for the gateway address Enter gateway of route Type the gateway address press Enter 5 The
333. tocol Network management protocol used in TCP IP networks SNMP provides a way to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations Statistics collection performance and security Subnet Mask 32 bit address mask that indicates the bits of an IP address used for the subnet address SVC Switched Virtual Circuit Virtual circuit that is dynamically established on demand and is torn down when transmission is complete T1 Network connection with a capacity of 1 544 Mbps divided into 24 separate channels or DSOs TCP IP Protocols used for IP networks such as the Internet Intranets and many LANs IP networks are connectionless packet switching networks TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Simplified version of FTP that transfers files from one computer to another over a network WAN Wide Area Network Data communications network that serves users across a broad geographic area and often uses transmission devices provided by common carriers Frame Relay is an example of a WAN 271 February 2004 Index Numerics 10 100Base T Ethernet 4 6 16 24 port family features of 5 front panel 5 generally 4 rear panel 6 telephone interface supported 7 USI port on 20 WAN interfaces supported 6 2 4 8 port family features of 2 front panel 3 IADs described 2 rear panel 4 telephone interfaces 4 voice gateways interoperable with 2 5 WAN interfaces supported 4 A AAL Statistics report 201 AALO Enca
334. tructions CMCP is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable 4 Do one of the following To enable CopperMountain CMCP type E or To disable CopperMountain CMCP type D 5 Reset the IAD page 14 for changes to take effect Toggling CMCP Debugging Option E Toggle CMCP Debugging displays when Coppermountain is selected as a Gateway and is reserved for use by Paradyne and Coppermountain network engineers This command enables and disables CopperMountain Control Protocol CMCP debugging You select it once to display the number of transmitted and received CMCP packets in bytes Select it a second time to disable the display 94 February 2004 Quick Con figuration 2000 A2 GB20 10 The JF2304 and JF2308 contain a number of predefined configurations for physical connections and PVCs JF2304 The Quick Configuration option is displayed only on the JF2308 JF2304 and JF2308 To use one of the predefined configurations 1 Onthe Main menu type 5 to select Configure WAN 2 The IAD displays the WAN Configuration menu Figure 4 66 WAN Configuration Menu Ackckck ck ckckck ck ckckockck ck oko kockck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ckckck ck ck ck ck kc k kk WAN Configuration menu Ck ck KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK kckck ck ck ko ko kk Configuring SDSL 0 Quick Configuration 1 Configure Datalink Protocol 2 Configure Physical Interface Type 0 to select Quick
335. ts due to other reasons listed in the following Destination port value in TCP header is zero 190 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Table 12 6 TCP Statistics Report Parameter bad checksums with headers too small packets smaller than header packets larger than frame acks for unsent data with data outside window with data after close segments with data segments with duplicate data segments with only an ACK segments with a duplicate ACK segments with a RST window probes window updates Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal destination port segments with data segments with retransmitted data segments with only an ACK segments with a delayed ACK segments with a RST window probes window updates active opens passive opens connections currently established Description Checksum value in TCP header is incorrect Size of the TCP header is less than 20 bytes Packet size is less than the TCP header size Packet is larger than the internal packet buffer Unacceptable invalid unsent acknowledge number in the TCP header The remote host has sent data beyond the window that the software could advertise TCP packets received in a Closed state connection Total segments received including those received in error This count includes segments received on currently established con
336. u log in as User 16 February 2004 Figure 2 4 Main Menu for Supervisor ck ckckckckckckckckckck ckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Main Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckockckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc kk Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure WAN Configure LAN Configure SNMP Configure Login System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure Multicast Configure NAT Telephony Clock Recovery Diagnostics Menu Command Line Interface Reset System Voice Path Configure Toggle CMCP Debugging Manage MGCP Embedded Client Selection Options E A and O vary depending on the Voice Gateway selected in the Voice Path Configure command These options only display when logged on as Supervisor OBR uuwWomNHdHHZZgZIIU X 0 1o0U Ut hP Figure 2 5 Main Menu for Network Administrator ck ckckckckckckckck ckckckckckockck ck ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Main Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockckckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure SNMP Configure Login System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure Multicast Configure NAT Diagnostics Menu Reset System DNA IIEUYO JUNP Figure 2 6 Main Menu for User ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck
337. uipment that defines transmit and receive levels to the network the loop gain value must match the value of the circuit it supplies the levels set and determined by the PBX or terminating equipment manufacturer You must also change the loop gain value if there is a decrease in power between the signal transmitted and the signal received due to loss through equipment lines or other transmission devices degradation in service or customer perception NOTE Loop gain values should only be set by your Network Administrator To set loop gain values type G to display the Configure Loop Gain menu Figure 7 10 Loop Gain Menu KKEKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Configure Loop Gain Menu KKEKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Current Control Mode AUTO Control Mode 1 Set Loop Gain for all ports 2 Display current Loop Gain settings 3 Configure Loop Gain setting per port Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Setting Loop Gain for All Ports To set the Transmit 9dB to 3dB default 2dB and Receive 9dB to 3dB default 4dB Loop Gain values for all ports 135 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type 1 to select Set Loop Gain for all ports The IAD displays this prompt for the transmit loop Enter Transmit Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 2dB Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter The IAD displ
338. uld only be set by a Network Administrator To set jitter delay 0 to 50 ms default 0 ms follow these steps 1 Type J on the Voice Configuration menu to select Set Jitter Delay 2 The IAD displays this prompt Enter number of ms to delay 10 Type the delay value and press Enter 3 The IAD saves the jitter delay and displays the Voice Configuration menu so you can continue with other voice path configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish voice path configuration To display the current jitter delay value type D on the Voice Configuration menu The IAD displays the current value Jitter Delay 12 ms Press any key to display the Voice Configuration menu and continue To set start mode for POTS only type s on the Voice Configuration menu to display the Start Mode Selection menu Figure 7 4 Start Mode Selection Menu XACkCkCck kck kckokockokock kockock ckock ck ck ckockckockock ck ckocko ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k kk Start Mode Selection XOACkCkCkCckCckckck kock kock kockock ckock ck ck ck ck ko ko k ck ko k ko kck ck ck ck ck k ck k k k kk 1 Set All Ports to Loop Start 2 Set All Ports to Ground Start 3 Display Start Mode 4 Configure Individual Port 130 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 Type the option for the task to perform Proceed to the appropriate section Setting All Ports to Loop Start aaron gt Type 1 to select Set All Ports to Loop Start The IAD sets all ports t
339. uration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration To set the Spanning Tree maximum age a value between 6 40 seconds default 20 follow these steps 1 2 Type S on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Max Age The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Spanning Tree Max Age 6 40 Type the maximum age value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration 20 To set the Spanning Tree forward delay a value between 4 30 seconds default 15 1 2 Type F on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Forward Delay The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Spanning Tree Forward Delay 4 30 Type the forward delay value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish bridge configuration 15 When there are multiple paths to the Root Bridge the Spanning Tree algorithm selects the port with the lowest total path cost as the route port To set the Spanning Tree path cost a value between 1 and 65 535 default 32 768 follow these steps 1 2 Type c on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Confi
340. ut filters 2 The IAD displays the status of input filters and a prompt Input Filters Disabled enter 1 to enable 0 to disable Type 1 to enable input filers or type O to disable them 3 The IAD enables or disables input filters and displays the status of the output filters with another prompt Output Filters Disabled enter 1 to enable 0 to disable Type 1 to enable output filers or type 0 to disable them 4 The AD saves the changes and displays the IP Flltering Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 6 Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish IP filter configuration Toggling Between Input and Output Filters To switch between input and output filter types when using most commands type T To toggle between input and output enter the command again NOTE The filter type that is the current focus of commands is displayed directly below the banner on the IP Filtering Configuration menu page 110 This message alerts you that you are currently working with the input or output filters m Displaying Filters To display a list of filters and details first select the input or output filters using the Toggle command Then type D to display the filters and details as shown in this sample T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi
341. v sent other messages sent No of PIM Hello messages received No of PIM Register messages received No of PIM Register Stop messages received No of PIM Join Prune messages received No of PIM Bootstrap messages received No of PIM Assert messages received No of PIM Graft messages received No of PIM Graft Acknowledgment messages received No of PIM messages received No of PIM messages received No of PIM Hello messages sent No of PIM Register messages sent No of PIM Register Stop messages sent No of PIM Join Prune messages sent No of PIM Bootstrap messages sent No of PIM Assert messages sent No of PIM Graft messages sent No of PIM Graft Acknowledgment messages sent No of PIM messages sent No of PIM messages sent TCP Statistics Report To display the TCP Statistics report type T on the Network Statistics menu The TCP Statistics report displays detailed information about TCP Transport Control Protocol packets sent and received Table 12 6 TCP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons with destination port zero Total TCP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packe
342. ve The connection is down No of BRI frames received No of BRI frames sent No of Overrun errors A consequence of data arriving faster than it can be consumed No of invalid frames received Received Overrun Discarded received packets due to the internal Received Packet Ring Pool are full so that could not process any incoming packets No of CRC errors received No of Aborted of packets received Transmitted Underrun Discarded transmitted packets due to there are no packets waiting in the Transmitted Packet Ring Buffer No of transmitted collision Current status for the B channel connection No of packets received No of packets sent No of discarded transmitted packets Jitter Buffer Overruns There is on available packet buffer from the Transmitted Packet Buffer Pool No of Underrun occurs There is no waiting packets in the Transmitted packet Pool buffer Clearing Media Statistics To clear network statistics type z on the Network Statistics menu The IAD displays the Clear Network Statistics menu Figure 12 7 Clear Network Statistics Menu sample 1 Clear G2237 ADSL Statistics 2 Clear ATM Statistics F Clear Frame Relay DLCI Statistics S Clear Serial Statistics The statistics options shown depend on the ports and configuration of the IAD To permanently reset statistics for a specific protocol type the option The IAD immediately resets all statistics for the specified
343. ve session and reloads ACOS from flash memory To perform a hard reset follow these steps 1 Type R on the Utilities menu The IAD displays the following Sure you want to do a Hard Reset Y N 2 Enter v to immediately perform a hard reset and reload ACOS Managing Configuration Files Each IAD is shipped with a default configuration set in the file default st Once you make any changes to your IAD a new file is created to store the new configuration config st to preserve the default settings After you have configured the IAD for correct operation in a customer s premises the current system settings in the config st file may be saved as the default configuration file and you may choose to set the IAD to boot from this file each time it is reset You may also copy this file to a PC or TFTP server for downloading to other identically configured IADs Once you have copied over the detault st file you cannot retrieve it You should consider copying the default st file to a safe location before replacing it Setting System Defaults You may set the IAD to boot from the modified configuration settings config st or boot from the factory supplied configuration file default st To choose follow these steps 1 Type p on the Utilities menu 2 The IAD displays the following menu ckckckckckckckckckckock ck ckockockck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kc k k kk Select Default ckckckckckckck ck ckckockckockockckck ck ck ck ck ck c
344. ves several tasks These are all displayed and accessed on the Bridge Configuration menu displayed by typing 3 on the Main menu Each task in this chapter is described beginning at the Bridge Configuration menu Figure 6 2 Bridge Configuration Menu Ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CA CA CA A KA KA KA MX Bridge Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckckckockckockock ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CA CA PA KA KA KB MX Enable Disable Bridging Globally Enable Disable Bridging by Port Configure Bridge Aging Timer Enable Disable Spanning Tree Globally Enable Disable Spanning Tree by Port Configure Spanning Tree Bridge Priority Configure Spanning Tree Port Priority Configure Spanning Tree Hello Time Configure Spanning Tree Max Age Configure Spanning Tree Forward Delay Configure Spanning Tree Path Cost gU O umgomugOoOd PHA Delete Bridge Forwarding Database Entry You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure the IAD as a bridge Options that display in the Bridge Configuration menu are the same for both security levels NOTE Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to bridge configuration Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect For bridging to function correctly you must enable bridging both globally or by port and then set the bridge aging timer At least two ports must be enabled
345. want to enable RIP poisoned reverse Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 14 when you finish router configuration Setting the RIP Version To set the RIP version 1 2 Type v on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure RIP Version by Port If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to set The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to set and press Enter The IAD displays the RIP configuration and status of the slot and port you re setting and prompts for a new version Current RIP configuration for Slot 1 Port 1 is Disabled Enter RIP Version for Port 1 0 Disabled 1 Version 1 Broadcast 2 Version 2 Broadcast 3 Version 2 Multicast Type the option number of the version to set 102 February 2004 Managing Static and Default Routes 2000 A2 GB20 10 5 Setting the RIP version for this port is complete The IAD saves the settings and displays the Router Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each remaining port
346. well as LLC Encapsulation PVCs If authorization is PAP or CHAP you must specify an authentication type UserID and password set wan atm ppp auth lt NONE PAP CHAP gt lt ID gt lt password gt slot interface port NONE PAP CHAP Keyword to select authorization type ID PPP user ID password PPP password slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 231 February 2004 set wan atm vc set wan bridge 2000 A2 GB20 10 Description Sets an ATM VC on a given WAN port RFC 1483 and RFC 2364 VC Muxing PVCs as well as LLC Encapsulation PVCs You must specify VPI number VCI number and RFC encapsulation type If you do not enter any optional parameters it will find the first WAN slot interface and port set wan atm vc vpi vci 1483 2364 slot interface port vpi Virtual Port Identifier O 255 vci Virtual Circuit Identifier 32 65535 default is 38 for data and 39 for voice 1483 2364 Encapsulation keyword slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description Enables and disables bridging on a WAN port set wan bridge on off slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off bridging on the specified port slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the
347. xpected average throughput bytes second No of frames received Received Frame Information Rx Bytes Rx Discarded Frames Rx RECN Rx BECN Rx DE Rx Excess Rate Rx Committed Rate Transmitted Frame Inform Tx Frames Tx Bytes Tx Discarded Frame Tx FECN Tx BECN Tx DE Tx Excess Tx Committed Total data received in bytes No of discarded received frames due to Received Frames are larger than size of PDU Received Frames Headers are smaller than the standard HDLC header size Validity of address bits settings in HDLC header is incorrect Checksum Field value in header is incorrect The received DLCI number does not match the DLCI connections on the IAD No No No No No ation of FECN 1 frames received of BECN 1 frames received of DE 1 frame received of frames received within excess info rate of frames received within committed info rate No of frames transmitted No of data transmitted in bytes No of discarded received frames due to Transmitted Frames are larger than the size of the PDU Packets overflow No No No No No of FECN 1 frames transmitted of BECN 1 frames transmitted of DE 1 frame transmitted of frames transmitted within excess info rate of frames transmitted within committed info rate 2000 A2 GB20 10 198 February 2004 2000 A2 GB20 10 ATM PVC Statistics Report To display the PVC Statistics Reports type A on
348. y ENABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable the DNS server assignment for T1 on this port 6 The IAD reports the change displays the status of the DNS server assignment for the port and prompts you to enable or disable it RFC 1877 Client configuration unchanged Cisco 6400 IP Mask Assignment for T1 E1 Port 1 is currently ENABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or p to disable the IP mask assignment for T1 on this port 7 The IAD transfers the IP address and mask assigned to a WAN port to a LAN port 8 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Figure 4 46 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu ck ckckckckck ck ckck ckckckckckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ATM Service Category Configuration KEKE KKK ckockckockock ck ckockock ok okockckock ck ckckck ck ckockockck ck ckck ck ck ko ck kk Current Encapsulation NONE 1 CBR 2 UBR Type 1 to select CBR for high priority data Type 2 to select UBR for low priority data 9 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 47 ATM PCR Configuration Menu ck ckckckckckckckckckockckockckockck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CkCkCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ckck ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration Xckckckckck ckckck ck ckckckck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck A A A A A X A kk ok Current line speed for this interface

Paradyne JetFusion Integrated Access Device User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents